GRID
eeee----terraterraterraterragridcom DIPDIPDIPDIP Teleprotection
USER’S Manual
DIP/EN U/C23
V2.3
User's Manual
DIP/EN U/C23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 1/2
DIP Teleprotection
CONTENT
Area File name Reference
Overview DIP_EN_OS_A23.pdf DIP/EN OS/A23
Safety Section DIP_EN_SS_B23.pdf DIP/EN SS/B23
Main Characteristics DIP_EN_IT_B23.pdf DIP/EN IT/B23
Installation DIP_EN_IN_A23.pdf DIP/EN IN/A23
Commissioning DIP_EN_CM_B23.pdf DIP/EN CM/B23
Maintenance DIP_EN_MT_A23.pdf DIP/EN MT/A23
Human Machine Interface Analogue Single Tone 1-DIP_EN_HI_A23.pdf DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface Analogue Dual Tone 2-DIP_EN_HI_A23.pdf DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface Digital 3-DIP_EN_HI_B23.pdf DIP/EN HI/B23
DIP/EN U/B23
User's Manual
Page 2/2 e-terragridcom DIP
BLANK PAGE
Overview
DIP/EN OS/A23 e-terragridcom DIP
OVERVIEW
Overview
DIP/EN OS/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 1/6
CONTENTS
1. OVERVIEW 5
1.1 Safety Section 5
1.2 Main Characteristics 5
1.3 Installation 5
1.4 Human machine Interface DIP DIGITAL 5
1.5 Human machine Interface DIP ANALOG SINGLE TONE 5
1.6 Human machine Interface DIP ANALOG DUAL TONE 5
1.7 Commissioning 5
1.8 Maintenance 5
2. DEFINITIONS 6
DIP/EN OS/A23
Overview
Page 2/6 e-terragridcom DIP
BLANK PAGE
Overview
DIP/EN OS/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 3/6
MODIFICATIONS PAGE
VERSION DATE COMMENTS
A11 11/14/2007 ORIGINAL ISSUE
A22 08/14/2008 PACKAGE RELEASE 2.2
A23 13/01/2011 Version 2.3
DIP/EN OS/A23
Overview
Page 4/6 e-terragridcom DIP
BLANK PAGE
Overview
DIP/EN OS/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 5/6
1. OVERVIEW
The DIP User manual includes eight sections:
• Safety section,
• Presentation,
• Installation,
• Human Machine Interface DIP DIGITAL ,
• Human Machine Interface DIP ANALOG SINGLE TONE,
• Human Machine Interface DIP ANALOG DUAL TONE,
• Commissioning,
• Maintenance.
1.1 Safety Section
The Safety Section provides full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment. This Safety Section also includes reference to typical equipment label markings.
1.2 Main Characteristics
The Presentation Section provides full information on DIP DIGITAL and ANALOG features, equipment description, main characteristics and performances.
1.3 Installation
The Installation Section provides full information on equipment description, shipment, environmental conditions, boards installation, power supply boards and VDC range, equipment connection.
1.4 Human machine Interface DIP DIGITAL
The Human Machine Interface Section provides full information on HMI software installation, system requirement, operating the Password manager, HMI interface description, operating the HMI.
1.5 Human machine Interface DIP ANALOG SINGLE TONE
The Human Machine Interface Section provides full information on HMI software installation, system requirements, operating the Password manager, HMI interface description, operating the HMI (Single tone and dual tone modes).
1.6 Human machine Interface DIP ANALOG DUAL TONE
The Human Machine Interface Section provides full information on HMI software installation, system requirements, operating the Password manager, HMI interface description, operating the HMI (Single tone and dual tone modes).
1.7 Commissioning
The Commissioning Section provides full information on DIP commissioning, configuring hardware, testing and fault isolation during commissioning, checks.
1.8 Maintenance
The Maintenance Section provides full information on DIP Maintenance, Testing and Fault isolation, firmware upgrade.
DIP/EN OS/A23
Overview
Page 6/6 e-terragridcom DIP
2. DEFINITIONS
Summary of some of the terms and acronyms used in this manual
• Dependability - Ability of a Teleprotection link to issue a valid command in the presence of interference and or noise. For convenience, the probability of missing command Pmc is usually measured, the dependability is therefore given by 1 - Pmc.
• Security - Ability of a system to prevent interference or noise from generating a command state at the receiving end when no command is transmitted. For convenience, the probability of unwanted command Puc is usually measured, the security is then given by 1 - Puc.
• Nominal transmission time - The time elapsed between the moment of a change of state at the transmitter input and the moment of the corresponding change of state at the receiver output when there is no interference or noise. This time does not include propagation time.
• Guard - The guard signal is a signal that is transmitted to monitor the integrity of the teleprotection system and it effectively supervises the channel in terms of the signal quality. Other monitoring is also employed. When present, the guard signal inhibits any command output of the teleprotection receiver.
• Command signal - The command signal is a signal that is transmitted to produce a change of state at a remote location. The requirements for the command signal are dependent upon the type of scheme.
• Permissive trip - Protection schemes where the received command initiates tripping without qualification by local protection. Intertrip channels utilize similar principles to permissive trip channels, however, security against unwanted operation and dependability of correct operation are prime requirements. Speed of operation is usually sacrificed to meet security and dependability requirements, particularly in analogue systems.
• Direct trip / Inter-trip - Protective schemes where the received command initiates tripping without qualification that are similar in operation to permissive trip with the exception that security against unwanted operation and dependability of correct operation are prime requirements. Speed of operation is usually sacrificed to meet security and dependability requirements.
• Blocking - Protective schemes where the received command blocks the operation of local protection. These channels utilise similar principles to permissive trip channels; however dependability of operation and speed are prime requirements. . VF - Voice Frequency.
• DCE - Data Communication Equipment.
• DTE - Data Terminal Equipment.
• LF (AF) - Low Frequency. Signals transmitted in the 0-4 kHz base band. Also called Audio Frequency.
• FV - Guard Frequency.
• FC - Command Frequency.
• TMS – Teleprotection Monitoring System.
• St = Single tone analog version.
• Dt = Dual tone analog version.
Safety Section
DIP/EN SS/A23 e-terragridcom DIP
SAFETY SECTION
Safety Section
DIP/EN SS/A23 e-terragridcom DIP Page 1/12
STANDARD SAFETY STATEMENTS FOR ALSTOM TELEPROTECTION
EQUIPMENT
1. INTRODUCTION 3
2. HEALTH AND SAFETY 3
3. SYMBOLS AND LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT 4
3.1 Symbols 4
3.2 Labels 4
4. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING, AND SERVICING 4
5. DE-COMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL 6
6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY 7
6.1 Protective fuse rating 7
6.2 Protective class 7
6.3 Installation category 7
6.4 Environment 7
DIP/EN SS/A23
Safety Section Page 2/12 e-terragridcom DIP
BLANK PAGE
Safety Section
DIP/EN SS/A23 e-terragridcom DIP Page 3/12
1. INTRODUCTION
This Safety Section and the relevant equipment documentation provide full information on safe handling,
commissioning, and testing of this equipment. This Safety Section also includes references to typical
equipment label markings.
The technical data in this Safety Section is typical only, see the technical data section of the relevant
equipment documentation for data specific to a particular equipment.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment the user should be familiar with the contents
of this Safety Section and the ratings on the equipment’s rating label.
Reference should be made to the external connection diagram before the equipment is installed,
commissioned, or serviced.
Language specific, self-adhesive User Interface labels are provided in a bag for some equipment.
2. HEALTH AND SAFETY
The information in the Safety Section of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that
equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of the
equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger personnel
and equipment and also cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.
Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling, proper
storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance, and servicing. For this
reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.
Qualified personnel are individuals who:
• Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the
system to which it is being connected;
• Are able to perform safely switching operations in accordance with accepted safety engineering
practices and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to isolate, ground, and
label it;
• Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering practices;
• Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
The equipment documentation gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and operation.
However, the manuals cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all
topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper
authorization. Contact the appropriate ALSTOM technical sales office and request the necessary
information.
DIP/EN SS/A23
Safety Section Page 4/12 e-terragridcom DIP
3. SYMBOLS AND LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT
For safety reasons, the following symbols which may be used on the equipment or referred to in the
equipment documentation, should be understood before it is installed or commissioned.
3.1 Symbols
Caution: refer to equipment documentation
Caution: risk of electric shock
Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal
Functional/Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal
Note: This symbol may also be used for a
Protective Conductor (Earth) terminal if that
terminal is part of a terminal block or sub-
assembly, e.g. power supply.
*NOTE: THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THIS TECHNICAL MANUAL IS THE
DIRECT EQUIVALENT OF THE NORTH AMERICAN TERM GROUND.
3.2 Labels
See Safety Guide (SFTY/4L M) for typical equipment labelling information.
4. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING, AND SERVICING
Equipment connections
Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work for this equipment
should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety.
Equipment documentation should be consulted before installing, commissioning, or servicing
the equipment.
The equipment and cabinet must be earthed as specified in IEC 60950-1.
The equipment must be supplied over a circuit breaker for the power supply. The circuit
breaker must be switched off.
Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning, and maintenance may present a
hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated.
Do not work on the equipment or connecting cables during a lightning storm.
Any disassembly of the equipment may expose parts at hazardous voltage; also electronic
parts may be damaged if suitable electrostatic voltage discharge (ESD) precautions are not
taken.
If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by all personnel
to avoid electric shock or energy hazards.
To ensure that wires are correctly terminated, the correct crimp terminal and tool for the wire
size should be used.
The equipment must be connected in accordance with the appropriate connection diagram.
Safety Section
DIP/EN SS/A23 e-terragridcom DIP Page 5/12
Before removing top cover, the isolating terminals of external cables must be opened or
disconnected.
Protection Class I Equipment:
- Before energizing the equipment it must be earthed using the protective conductor
terminal, if provided, or the appropriate termination of the supply plug in the case of
plug connected equipment.
- The protective conductor (earth) connection must not be removed since the
protection against electric shock provided by the equipment would be lost.
- When the protective (earth) conductor terminal (PCT) is also used to terminate
cable screens, etc., it is essential that the integrity of the protective (earth)
conductor be checked after the addition or removal of such functional earth
connections. For M4 stud PCTs the integrity of the protective (earth) connections
should be ensured by use of a locknut or similar.
The recommended minimum protective conductor (earth) wire size is 2.5 mm² (3.3 mm² for
North America) unless otherwise stated in the technical data section of the equipment
documentation, or otherwise required by local or country wiring regulations.
The protective conductor (earth) connection must be low-inductance and as short as possible.
All connections to the equipment must have a defined potential. Connections that are pre-
wired, but not used, should preferably be grounded when binary inputs and output relays are
isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are connected to common potential, the pre-
wired but unused connections should be connected to the common potential of the grouped
connections.
Before energizing the equipment, the following should be checked:
- Voltage rating/polarity (rating label/equipment documentation);
- Protective fuse rating;
- Integrity of the protective conductor (earth) connection (where applicable);
- Voltage and current rating of external wiring, suitable to the application.
It is important that this instruction manual be read and fully understood by all people
involved, including personnel that has already undergone training and is otherwise qualified
before changing configuration or carrying out maintenance. Otherwise the warranty will not
be applicable.
Accidental touching of exposed terminals
If working in a restricted space, such as a cubicle, where there is a risk of electric shock due to
accidental touching of terminals which do not comply with IP20 rating, then a suitable
protective barrier should be provided.
Unused connectors in the equipment sub-racks should be terminated with blank plugs.
Equipment use
If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Removal of the equipment front panel/cover
Removal of the equipment front panel/cover may expose hazardous live parts, which must not
be touched until the electrical power is removed.
DIP/EN SS/A23
Safety Section Page 6/12 e-terragridcom DIP
Equipment operating conditions
The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and environmental limits.
If the link gets disturbed while tuning, testing, simulating alarms, making measurements and
loading new configurations, appropriate measures must be taken to prevent the protection
signal transmission being used.
Before switching on the circuit breaker, check that the equipment/cabinet is securely
connected to the protective earth/ground and check the polarity and value of the power
supply.
Insulation and dielectric strength testing
Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the end of each
part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero to discharge capacitors,
before the test leads are disconnected.
Insertion of modules and pcb cards
Modules and PCB cards must not be inserted into or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it
is energized, since this may result in damage.
Fibre optic communication
Where fibre optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed directly.
Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal level of the device.
Cleaning
The equipment may be cleaned using a lint-free cloth dampened with clean water, when no
connections are energized. Contact fingers of test plugs are normally protected by petroleum
jelly, which should not be removed.
5. DE-COMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL
De-commissioning
The supply input (auxiliary) for the equipment may include capacitors across the supply or to
earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after completely isolating the supplies to the
equipment (both poles of any dc supply), the capacitors should be safely discharged via the
external terminals prior to
de-commissioning.
Disposal
It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses be avoided. The
equipment should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any equipment containing batteries
should have them removed before disposal, taking precautions to avoid short circuits.
Particular regulations within the country of operation may apply to the disposal of the
equipment.
Safety Section
DIP/EN SS/A23 e-terragridcom DIP Page 7/12
6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY
Unless otherwise stated in the equipment technical manual, the following data is applicable.
6.1 Protective fuse rating
The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for equipment is 16A, high rupture
capacity (HRC) Red Spot type NIT, or TIA, or equivalent. The protective fuse should be located as close to
the unit as possible.
6.2 Protective class
IEC 60255-27: 2005 Class I (unless otherwise specified in the
EN 60255-27: 2005 equipment documentation). This equipment
requires a protective conductor (earth) connection to
ensure user safety.
6.3 Installation category
IEC 60255-27: 2005 Installation category II (Overvoltage Category II):
EN 60255-27: 2005 Distribution level, fixed installation.
Equipment in this category is qualification tested at
2,5 kV peak, 1.2/50 µs, 500 Ω, 0.5 J, between all supply
circuits and earth and also between independent circuits.
6.4 Environment
The equipment is intended for indoor installation and use only. If it is required for use in an outdoor
environment then it must be mounted in a specific cabinet or housing which will enable it to meet the
requirements of IEC 60529 with the classification of degree of protection IP54 (dust and splashing water
protected).
Pollution Degree - Pollution Degree 2 Compliance is demonstrated by reference to safety Altitude
- Operation up to 2000m standards.
IEC 60255-27:2005
EN 60255-27: 2005
DIP/EN SS/A23
Safety Section Page 8/12 e-terragridcom DIP
SPECIFIC SAFETY STATEMENTS FOR DIP TELEPROTECTION EQUIPMENT
Personnel qualification: authorized and properly trained personnel only are admitted
to carry out installing, programming, commissioning, maintenance, troubleshooting,
and operation of the equipment.
Technical specifications: the equipment must be operated within the technical
specifications. Failure to do so may result in personal injuries or equipment damage.
Alteration: alteration of the equipment is not allowed.
Insertion and removal of plug-in modules: neither removal nor insertion of
modules, except for redundant power supply units, is permitted. Before inserting or
removing modules, the power supply of the equipment has to be switched OFF.
ESD protection: the modules in this equipment contain devices which can be
damaged by electrostatic discharges. Appropriate measures must be taken before
unpacking modules or removing them from equipment racks. Grounding straps for
technical personnel and the provision of anti-static workbenches are essential
precautions to prevent ESD damage when handling or working on modules. Modules
may only be shipped either in their original packing or installed in equipment racks.
Mechanical installation: the equipment must be mounted in a cabinet.
Safety Section
DIP/EN SS/A23 e-terragridcom DIP Page 9/12
Cabinets which are not secured to the floor tip forwards when the hinged frame is
opened. Do not open the hinged frame without precautions.
Electrical installation: this is Class I equipment as defined in EN 60255-27. The
equipment and cubicle/cabinet shall be solidly bonded to the protective (earth)
conductor for both safety and electromagnetic compatibility reasons. The equipment
must be protected by circuit breakers or fuses with a maximum rating of 16 Amps.
All circuit breakers in the cabinet must be switch OFF before working on the
equipment.
Do not connect or disconnect energized cables to or from the equipment.
The isolating terminals of the external cables must be kept open during installation,
maintenance and before storage, decommissioning, and disposal.
Ensure that all supply inputs have been isolated/switched off before installing the
equipment.
When an analog DIP is connected to cables, pilot wires, or leased circuits, the
equipment must only be used in conjunction with barrier transformers withstanding a
15kVrms or 20kVrms test voltage at 50Hz/60Hz for 1 mn, according to national
regulations or electric utilities’ practice.
DIP/EN SS/A23
Safety Section Page 10/12 e-terragridcom DIP
Fibre optic installation: Optical connectors: clean all optical connectors by an
approved method before making any optical connection; do not rotate the optical
connector unnecessarily when making an optical connection. When not connected, fit
all optical plugs and couplings with protective caps.
Damage to optical fibres: when dressing fibres, take care not to exceed the minimum
bend radius (typically 35mm) and do not over tighten binders used for dressing as
damage may result.
Back cover: hazardous voltages and/or hazardous energy levels behind the back
cover.
Working on the equipment: do not work on the system or connect or disconnect
cables during periods of lightning.
Electrical strength test: do not repeat any electrical tests. Improper test methods can
cause severe damage to the equipment. Electric strength and earth continuity tests
have been performed in the factory.
EMC: this is class A equipment. In a domestic environment, this equipment may
cause radio interference. In this case, the user may be required to take appropriate
measures.
Power supply for alarm: this shall be protected against overcurrents and short circuit
conditions.
Safety Section
DIP/EN SS/A23 e-terragridcom DIP Page 11/12
Common interface UT148: hazardous voltages and/or hazardous energy levels on the
module and the cable. Do not touch the module and the cable leads.
Relay interface SRxxx: hazardous voltages and/or hazardous energy levels on the
module and the cable. Do not touch the module and the cable leads.
Laser / LED: take care using optical cards IR182/IR185, class I Laser/LED product.
Using HMI DIP : the teleprotection link can be disturbed while using certain
maintenance functions of the DIP HMI (e.g. forcing commands).
During routine tests with the DIP in operation, “Reset device” in the menu should
not be activated, as this causes the DIP to be re-initialized and thus be blocked for
approximately 5 seconds. During this time no commands can be transmitted.
Commissioning: do not close/establish any connections to protection devices until the
DIP is properly commissioned.
DIP/EN SS/A23
Safety Section Page 12/12 e-terragridcom DIP
Supervision network port P19 : As per as IEC 60950 compliancy, when voltage
higher than 60 Vcc are involved in the DIP, the supervision network port P19 cannot
be used as direct access HMI port, so no operation could be performed directly with a
PC (please refer to Installation part chapter 8)
Input and Ouput Voltage : Inputs / outputs at very low voltage ( below 60 Vcc) are
isolated from dangerous voltage by a main insulation, so the level of voltage are not
guaranteed in case of equipment failure.
I/O connection : Inputs and outputs shall not be connected to equipment that may be
used by an operator or service person. Only service persons are entitled to handle the
equipment when voltage higher than 60 Vcc are involved.
Access to the equipment : In this equipment has been design for installation in the
substation with an access strictly restricted to service persons or operators who have
been informed of the safety rules and risk of intervention.
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23 e-terragridcom DIP
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 1/44
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 6
2. DEFINITIONS 7
3. OVERVIEW 8
4. DIP GENERAL PRESENTATION AND FEATURES 9
4.1 Protection schemes managed 10
4.2 Optional features 11
4.3 Allocation of logical input commands 11
4.4 Alarms 12
4.5 Auto-tests 12
4.6 Ease of use 12
4.6.1 Customization 12
4.6.2 HMI monitoring features 13
4.6.3 Features of tests and maintenance. 13
4.7 Accessories 14
5. DIGITAL MODE 15
5.1 Principle of digital transmission 15
5.2 Interfaces available in the digital mode 15
5.2.1 Digital interfaces managed 16
5.2.2 IR185 optical fiber interface 17
5.2.3 IR187 optical interfaces 17
5.2.4 SFP modules 18
5.2.5 Path redundancy. 19
5.3 Optimizing the transmission medium 20
5.4 Number of commands 20
5.5 Applications 20
5.6 Link control 20
5.7 Maintenance and loopback 21
6. ANALOG MODE 22
6.1 Frequency coding of the single tone version 22
6.2 Frequency coding of the dual tone version 23
6.3 Description of the communication interface 24
6.4 Characteristics specific to the analog mode 24
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 2/44
6.4.1 Transmission medium (all versions) 24
6.4.2 Optimizing the single tone version 24
6.4.3 Number of commands – Single tone version 24
6.4.4 Link test 26
6.4.5 Unblocking feature 26
6.4.6 Voltage presence 26
6.4.7 External alarm input 26
6.4.8 DIP connected to a PLC 26
6.5 Characteristics specific to the analog mode in the dual tone version 28
7. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION 29
8. MAIN CHARACTERISTICS 31
8.1 Mechanical characteristics 31
8.2 Environmental characteristics 32
8.3 Electrical characteristics of the power supply 33
8.4 Characteristics of the IRIG-B interface 33
8.5 Operating characteristics 34
8.6 Characteristics of digital transmission 37
8.7 Characteristics of SFP modules 38
8.7.1 Single mode unidirectional modules 38
8.7.2 Single mode bidirectional modules 38
8.7.3 Multimode unidirectional module 38
8.8 Characteristics of voice frequency transmission 39
8.8.1 General characteristics 39
8.8.2 Band sharing - Single tone version 39
8.8.3 Band sharing – Dual tone version 40
9. PERFORMANCE 41
9.1 Digital interfaces 41
9.1.1 Maximum transfer time according to transmission speed 41
9.1.2 Transfer time according to the IEEE C37-94 protocol 41
9.1.3 Security 41
9.1.4 Dependability 42
9.2 Analog interface – Single tone version 42
9.2.1 Transmission time 42
9.2.2 Security (bandwidth 300-3 400 Hz) 42
9.2.3 Dependability (bandwidth 300-3400 Hz) 42
9.3 Analog interface – Dual tone version 43
9.3.1 Transmission time 43
9.3.2 Security (bandwidth 300- 1900 Hz) 43
9.3.3 Dependability (bandwidth 300 - 1900 Hz) 43
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 3/44
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1 – DIP ENVIRONMENT 9
FIGURE 2 – EXAMPLE OF LINK WITH E-TERRAGRIDCOM OCM 5000 14
FIGURE 3 – DIGITAL INTERFACES 16
FIGURE 4 – UNIDIRECTIONAL MODULE 18
FIGURE 5 – BIDIRECTIONAL MODULE 18
FIGURE 6 – BIDIRECTIONAL TRANSMISSION 19
FIGURE 7 – REDUNDANCY DIAGRAM 19
FIGURE 8 – LOOPBACK 21
FIGURE 9 - TRANSMISSION – SINGLE TONE VOICE FREQUENCY BAND 22
FIGURE 10 - TRANSMISSION – DUAL TONE VOICE FREQUENCY BAND 23
FIGURE 11 – VOICE FREQUENCY INTERFACE 24
FIGURE 12 – LINK TEST – ANALOG MODE 26
FIGURE 13 - EXAMPLE OF AUTOMATIC POWER PROCESS 27
FIGURE 14 – DIP RACK 29
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE 1– LOG FUNCTION 11
TABLE 2– CODING OF INPUT COMMAND FREQUENCIES 22
TABLE 3 – CODING OF INPUT COMMAND FREQUENCIES 23
TABLE 4 – DIP BOARDS 30
TABLE 5 – MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS 31
TABLE 6 – ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS 32
TABLE 7 – POWER SUPPLY CHARACTERISTICS 33
TABLE 8 – OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS 35
TABLE 9 – CHARACTERISTICS OF PREVIOUS VERSIONS 36
TABLE 10 – DIGITAL TRANSMISSION CHARACTERISTICS 37
TABLE 11 – CHARACTERISTICS OF UNIDIRECTIONAL SM MODULES 38
TABLE 12 – CHARACTERISTICS OF BIDIRECTIONAL SM MODULES 38
TABLE 13 – CHARACTERISTICS OF UNIDIRECTIONAL MM MODULES 38
TABLE 14 – GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF VOICE FREQUENCY TRANSMISSION 39
TABLE 15 – BAND SHARING – SINGLE TONE VERSION 39
TABLE 16 – DUAL TONE VERSION FREQUENCIES 40
TABLE 17 – FREQUENCIES AND BANDWIDTH (DUAL TONE VERSION) 40
TABLE 18 – MEASUREMENTS OF TRANSMISSION TIMES FOR ELECTRICAL AND IR187 BOARDS 41
TABLE 19 – MEASUREMENTS OF TRANSMISSION DATA FOR THE IE185 BOARD WITH MUX 41
TABLE 20 – TRANSMISSION TIME SINGLE TONE VERSION 42
TABLE 21 – TRANSMISSION TIME DUAL TONE VERSION 43
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 4/44
MODIFICATIONS PAGE
VERSION DATE COMMENTS
A 17/10/2000 Original issue
B 18/04/2001 Optical interface added
C 02/06/2004 Analog part added
D11 14/11/2007 New features, new structure
E11 11/02/2008 Minor corrections
A22 23/08/2009 Software version 2.2
B22 01/06/2010 Minor corrections, added I/O SR200 and optical interface IR187
A23 29/11/2010 Software version 2.3
B23 17/03/2011 Update of the transfer time with SR200 board
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 5/44
BLANK PAGE
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 6/44
1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY SECTION DIP/EN SS/A11 OR LATER ISSUE, THE TECHNICAL DATA SECTION AND THE RATING ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.
THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED RS232C(1)
SERIAL PORT IS AN EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. WHEN THE TELEPROTECTION IS ENERGIZED, THE TERMINALS OF THIS PORT SHOULD NOT BE TOUCHED SINCE IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF A SINGLE FAULT CONDITION THERE WOULD BE A VERY LOW PROBABILITY OF AN ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS DESIGNED TO BE USED FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, THAT IS MONITORING AND SOFTWARE DOWNLOADS; IT IS NOT INTENDED TO BE PERMANENTLY CONNECTED.
THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED RJ45(1)
SERIAL PORT IS AN EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS INTENDED TO BE USED FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, I.E. MONITORING AND DOWNLOADING THE SOFTWARE.
(1) As per the option chosen
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 7/44
2. DEFINITIONS
Summary of some of the terms and acronyms used in this manual
• Dependability - Ability of a Teleprotection link to issue a valid command in the presence of interference and or noise. For convenience, the probability of missing command Pmc is usually measured, the dependability is therefore given by 1 - Pmc.
• Security - Ability of a system to prevent interference or noise from generating a command state at the receiving end when no command is transmitted. For convenience, the probability of unwanted command Puc is usually measured, the security is then given by 1 - Puc.
• Nominal transmission time - The time elapsed between the moment of a change of state at the transmitter input and the moment of the corresponding change of state at the receiver output when there is no interference or noise. This time does not exclude the propagation time due to the transmission medium.
• Guard - The guard signal is a signal that is transmitted to monitor the integrity of the teleprotection system and it effectively supervises the channel in terms of the signal quality. Other monitoring methods are also employed. When present, the guard signal inhibits any command output of the teleprotection receiver
• Command signal - The command signal is a signal that is transmitted to produce a change of state at a remote location. The requirements for the command signal are dependent upon the type of scheme.
• Permissive tripping - Protection schemes where the received command initiates trip without qualification by local protection. Command channels of this type can run in a voice frequency band, a PLC frequency band or with a digital binary speed. The channel is often designed to provide high operating dependability, particularly when the telecommunication channel may be impacted, e.g. due to disturbance in the power supply.
• Direct tripping / Remote tripping - Protection schemes where the received command initiates tripping without qualification by local protection. These schemes are similar to permissive trip, except that requirements in terms of security against untimely commands and lack of faulty command are essential. Speed of operation is usually sacrificed to meet security and dependability requirements, particularly in analogue systems.
• Blocking - Protective schemes where the received command blocks the operation of local protection. These channels use principles similar to permissive tripping channels. However, they have higher operating dependability and speed requirements.
• VF - Voice Frequency.
• DCE - Data Communication Equipment
• DTE - Data Terminal Equipment
• LF (AF) - Low Frequency. Signals transmitted in the 0-4 kHz base band. Also called Audio Frequency.
• GF - Guard Frequency
• CF - Command Frequency.
• SFP - Small form Factor Pluggable.
• WDM - Wave-length Division Multiplexing.
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 8/44
3. OVERVIEW
ALSTOM’s DIP equipment requires no maintenance, is easy to start up and offers high installation flexibility.
The features described in this manual apply to the last product release.
It may be monitored and managed remotely through a telecommunication network using different systems:
• Standard management system using the SNMP protocol, e.g. e-terra SENTINEL by ALSTOM.
• Remote access through a TCP/IP network.
The DIP teleprotection equipment is designed to run in harsh environment conditions, such as those encountered in relaying buildings of very high voltage stations.
To this end, it is fitted with protections against electromagnetic disturbance (induced or radiated).
Although intended mainly for the field of energy, the DIP teleprotection equipment is also used in all applications where the following criteria are imperative:
• Very short transfer times.
• Optimum dependability and safety.
• Immunity to disturbance from the electric environment.
The DIP unit also supports:
• Information coding ensuring, on the one hand compatibility with the standard transmission medium, on the other hand immunity to disturbance encountered on it.
• Advanced decoding and processing of signals received, allowing accurate restitution of the information transmitted.
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 9/44
4. DIP GENERAL PRESENTATION AND FEATURES
The DIP equipment is composed of a broad range of interfaces designed to meet different teleprotection needs.
Transmission in the digital or analog mode on different media is managed:
• Digital electrical medium (V11, G703)
• ‘Versatile’ optical medium with SFP module
• Single-mode optical medium (1310 nm, 1550 nm)
• Multimode optical medium (850 nm) compliant with recommendation IEEE C37-94
• Analog medium (single tone or dual tone coded version)
FIGURE 1 – DIP ENVIRONMENT
The DIP equipment also includes the following features:
• Possibility to transmit up to 8 independent commands in the digital mode and 4 commands in the analog mode
• Logical combination of inputs, type AND, OR, LOG (digital mode) for automation applications
• Indication of the status of alarms and teleprotection on the front face by LED, software
• Broad selection of communication interfaces
• Broad range of SFP optical modules
• Two contacts per command for input and output
• Dual tone coded analog mode
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 10/44
• Two RS 232 access for connection to a PC or network access modem (1 local access et 1 remote access)
• Broad range of power supply boards for power supply voltages between 24 Vdc and 250 Vdc
• Acquisitions of commands by polarities between 24 and 250 Vdc in standard
• Possibility of power supply redundancy by adding a power supply board
• Possibility to supply the DIP by two different battery banks with identical or different voltages
• Modular design allowing hardware modification merely by changing boards
• Capacity to have an optical backup communication medium in the standby mode
• Permanent monitoring of the hardware and communication link
• Real-time measurement of the transfer time and BER (bit error rate) with indication when using the HMI software (digital mode only)
• Teleprotection fully programmable locally or remotely using the HMI software running on PC. This feature is available only in the digital mode. However, it is possible in all modes by using a management system (from version 2.x).
• Event and alarm recorder with a capacity of 1785 events each
• Time-stamping with a 1 ms accuracy for the event recorder
• Software upgrade by downloading from a PC
• Possibility to export the list of events, alarms and counter to spreadsheet compatible files (MS Excel® type)
4.1 Protection schemes managed
In all cases, the performance of a teleprotection link results from a compromise between transfer time, dependability and security. According to the protection scheme to which the equipment must be connected, one of the following three criteria must be chosen. To do this, the DIP digital teleprotection equipment has 3 types of application and 3 additional types in dual tone analog coded mode.
• Single tone analog mode:
− Permissive tripping (enhancing dependability)
− Blocking (enhancing transfer time)
− Direct tripping (enhancing security)
• Dual tone coded analog mode:
− Permissive tripping
− Blocking
− Direct tripping
− Reinforced blocking with more dependability
− Reinforced permissive tripping with more dependability
− Direct tripping reinforced with more security
The transfer times of reinforced protection schemes exceed those in single mode s.
• Digital mode:
− Permissive tripping (enhancing dependability)
− Blocking (enhancing transfer time)
− Direct tripping (enhancing security)
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 11/44
4.2 Optional features
The following features may be supplied on analog and digital DIP equipment:
• IRIG-B interface to synchronize event logging on both sides of the link.
• Addition of an I/O board module providing access to combination logic features on the inputs and outputs.
• Possibility of acquisition of commands in dry loop with the optional filter board FI005 to be fitted on the SR200 board only.
• FI002 filter board providing reinforced protection against capacitive discharge.
• Redundancy of opto-electrical interface boards (digital mode only).
• Optional ME50 board, ensuring:
− Compatibility with an SNMP management system
− SNTP synchronization
− Access to reading the configuration using a standard browser
4.3 Allocation of logical input commands
Each physical input of the DIP can be allocated to a logical operation. Several physical inputs can hence be grouped to form a command transmitted online.
The combination authorized in the analog mode is:
OR: OR logic between 2 inputs
AND: AND logic between 2 inputs
The combination authorized in the digital mode is:
OR: OR logic between 2 inputs
AND: AND logic between 2 inputs
LOG: logical function as follows:
I1 I2 O1
1 0 1
0 1 0
0 0 Previous status
1 1 Previous status
TABLE 1– LOG FUNCTION
Position <1> corresponds to a closed contact (polarized or not according to the option), <0> to an open contact.
This feature is accessible when the number of inputs available exceeds the number of commands, as follows:
⇒ Version with 2 commands with one I/O board
⇒ Version with 4 commands with two I/O boards
Also, in these variants, the output command is activated on two independent relays.
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 12/44
4.4 Alarms
In case of malfunction, the equipment can generate a major alarm or a minor alarm.
• Major Alarm
The equipment is no longer able to ensure a good level of dependability and security, the following actions are taken:
− Protection of command outputs, the equipment is unavailable
− Lamps lighting
− Record usable for information (history)
− Availability of two alarm loops
• Minor Alarm
The equipment is still able, in spite of the presence of a fault, to ensure a good level of dependability and security, the following actions are taken:
− Lamps lighting
− Record usable for information (history)
− Availability of two alarm loops
These alarms are detailed in the maintenance manual.
4.5 Auto-tests
The DIP teleprotection equipment includes many automated procedures controlling permanently its different functions (monitoring components internal to the CPU, monitoring the power supply, monitoring I/O boards,….).
The transmission link, whether digital or analog, is monitored permanently. The alarm conditions are met when the transmission medium is no longer able to ensure a good level of dependability and security.
Any operating fault triggers the following actions:
• Protection of command outputs
• Lamps lighting
• Record usable for information (history)
• Availability of alarm loops
4.6 Ease of use
The DIP teleprotection equipment was designed to facilitate startup, operation and maintenance of the links. Hence, it is fitted with two access points allowing to connect a PC to ensure, without any other instrument, all startup and maintenance operations.
4.6.1 Customization
Main features accessible in digital mode:
• Definition of identities and addresses of local and remote teleprotection
• Setting of the time and date of local and remote teleprotection
• Definition of the alarm trigger bit error rate
• Command prolongations in transmission and reception
• Types of configurable protection schemes
• Alarm customization
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 13/44
Main features accessible in analog mode:
• Definition of identity and address of local teleprotection
• Setting of the time and date of local teleprotection
• Definition of a signal to noise ratio alarm. (analog dual tone only)
• Command prolongations in transmission and reception
• Configurable protection scheme type for each command
• Alarm customization
4.6.2 HMI monitoring features
For all versions:
• Number of commands transmitted and received
• Alarm status
• Inhibition status
• Status of locks and loopbacks
• Current parameters display
• Dated lists of 1785 events and 1785 alarms
For the digital version:
• Instant bit error rate
• Estimated transfer time
4.6.3 Features of tests and maintenance.
• For all versions:
− Operating commands
− Line locking
− Blocking of restitution relays
− Forcing of command transmission and restitution
• For the digital version only:
− Remote loopback
− Measurement of transfer time in the events list
− Optic electric communication interface redundancy
• For the analog single tone version only:
− Forcing of PLC commands
• For the analog dual tone coded version only:
− Forcing of tone transmissions one by one and of the outputs
− Monitoring feature (option)
• Monitoring by Web browser or SNMP based centralized system
When fitted, the optional board ME50 provides remote access to any DIP connected through an IP network.
Limitation to 250 DIP per PC (number of virtual ports under MS Windows®)
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 14/44
4.7 Accessories
• Electrical V11 to optical e-terragridcom OCM converter.
This converter, robust in the environment of electrical stations, provides a link between a DIP in the digital mode and a remote transmission unit.
Therefore, it avoids some disturbance met in copper cable links.
FIGURE 2 – EXAMPLE OF LINK WITH E-TERRAGRIDCOM OCM
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 15/44
5. DIGITAL MODE
5.1 Principle of digital transmission
The transmission principle used is that of permanent transmission of a digital frame corresponding to the guard status.
Closing one or several contacts changes this frame and transmits a command message.
The length of the messages depends on the teleprotection variant chosen. The messages are coded in 4, 8 or 16 words selected in a code. The code is calculated as to provide optimum security and dependability.
The transfer delay hence depends directly on the variant chosen.
5.2 Interfaces available in the digital mode
The architecture and principles used ensure the DIP digital / analog teleprotection equipment can adapt to different transmission media:
• Speed between 32 Kbps and 2048 Kbps
• V11/ RS422 interface, rate from 32 Kbps to 256 Kbps
• G703-1 interface at 64 Kbps
• G703-6 interface (E1) at 2048 Kbps. Impedance 75 or 120 ohms
• Interface for single mode optical fiber , rate 256 Kbps
• Interface for multimode optical fiber, IEEE C37-94. Rate nX64 Kbps with n=1 to 8
• Versatil Optical interface with interchangeable SFP module
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 16/44
5.2.1 Digital interfaces managed
LINE
LINE
LINE
LINE
ETCD
ETCD
ETCD
ETCD
Clock
(Clock)
Clock
Clock
Clock
Clock
Clock
Clock
Clock
Clock
Optical fibre
Optical fibre
OPTICAL FIBRE
OPTICAL FIBRE
LINE
Optical fibre
Optical fibre
D0045FRb
FIGURE 3 – DIGITAL INTERFACES
NOTE: The V11 / X24 configuration allows running with a clock supplied by the
equipment (DCE mode). In each configuration, two DIP teleprotections can run together without the DCE equipment.
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 17/44
5.2.2 IR185 optical fiber interface
This interface, compliant with recommendation IEEE C37.94, was developed for short links, e.g. a direct secured connection to a multiplexer. Typically, the link in a station between the DIP located in a relaying building and the transmission equipment located in the communication building.
The standardized connector is of the ST type, to be used with 62.5/125 µm multimode fiber with an 850nm wavelength.
The IEEE C37.94 protocol runs at 2 048 Kbits/s, twelve time slots (TS) of 64 Kbits/s each are available for a maximum transmission rate. In the DIP, this number is limited to 8.
A rotary switch selects the number of slots used for communication. Please note that the IR-185 boards uses eight slots maximum.
If N is the value on the coding wheel, the actual rate is Nx64kbps.
5.2.3 IR187 optical interfaces
This optical interface was developed to be able to use SFP modules. It broadens the range of use of the DIP. Just change the module according to the application required. Installation modifications are hence highly simplified.
The IR187 board can only be fitted in the latests AM170D rack.
The IR187 interface can be configured to use two types of protocol:
• Manchester 2 protocol
In this case, the interface is compatible with the IR182 board it can replace.
• C37.94 protocol
This setting is recommended for optical links between several DIP.
The IEEE C37.94 protocol runs at 2 048 Kbits/s, twelve time slots (TS) of 64 Kbits/s each are available for a maximum transmission rate. In the DIP, this number is limited to 8.
A rotary switch selects the number of TS used for communication.
Note: The IEEE C37.94 recommendation defines an optical interface standard between a teleprotection and a multiplexer.
The IR187 interface can be set to use the C37.94 protocol, but unlike the IR185 board, it is not strictly compatible with this standard in terms of optical and connector characteristics.
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 18/44
5.2.4 SFP modules
The SFP module is a compact optical transceiver. It is fitted onto the IR187 board interchangeably to adapt to the needs of the application:
These modules, defined originally for high speed STM-1 and faster SDH digital transmissions, perfectly match the requirements of DIP applications. Two main types of SFP modules may be used:
• Unidirectional
It is the most current standard for applications in the energy sector. One fiber is used by transmission direction (2 fibers for one link).
D0640xxb
FIGURE 4 – UNIDIRECTIONAL MODULE
There are several types of modules according to the range to be reached:
• Multimode module (1300 and 1500 nm)
• Single mode module (850 nm)
• Bidirectional
A single fiber is used for both directions. Each communication direction uses a different wavelength.
D0641xxb
FIGURE 5 – BIDIRECTIONAL MODULE
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 19/44
A new technology has emerged in the last few years covering two wavelengths carried by the fiber, in opposite directions. External WDM couplers (multiplexers), combining or separating the two wavelengths, are used at the ends. As the technology has evolved, passive external WDM couplers have been integrated to a standard optical transceiver interface.
By combining the transmission and reception functions in a single fiber, without external mixer filter, the bidirectional SFP module on a single fiber is a simple way of offering optical transmission while halving fiber wiring required.
FIGURE 6 – BIDIRECTIONAL TRANSMISSION
For short distances, the wavelength for one transmission direction is 1310nm and 1550nm in the other direction.
For longer distances, the wavelength for one transmission direction is 1510nm and 1590nm in the other direction.
For a given link, the modules are paired, one per end, each transmitting in the wavelength chosen.
5.2.5 Path redundancy.
The DIP can toggle communication from the optical interface (IR187) to another digital interface (IR173, IR179 or IR180), according to the criteria defined by the user.
FIGURE 7 – REDUNDANCY DIAGRAM
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 20/44
5.3 Optimizing the transmission medium
Digitizing the telecommunication networks for power distribution and carrying services optimizes exchanges of teleprotection messages, as they are transmitted as the other services of these systems.
On the other hand, in the principle chosen, the link transmits a frame permanently, even if there are no commands, allowing both teleprotection to communicate and exchange this information via service words.
The DIP can use an optical medium for the main path, and an electrical medium for the backup path.
To avoid routing error, 2 DIP with different address cannot communicate.
Similarly, over a link, one DIP shall be configured as master and the other as slave, avoiding untimely loopback.
5.4 Number of commands
The architecture of the DIP digital teleprotection equipment allows to transmit 2, 4 or 8 commands using standard boards. Regardless of the variant used, the different commands are independent, but could also be transmitted simultaneously.
5.5 Applications
Protection scheme customization is applied in group of 2 commands (1-2), (3-4), (5-6), (7-8). The application can be selected from the blocking, permissive or direct tripping.
5.6 Link control
The transmission medium is controlled permanently using a part of the frame transmitted (call service channel). This service channel allows teleprotection to exchange data on their respective status, and decide whether the link is able to perform its task. The local unit reflects the status remotely using the remote alarm feature. The transmission delay of the link is also controlled permanently by the service channel, by measuring on both sides the return time of a particular message from the opposite side.
The latter runs on any PC under Windows 2000 or XP, after connection to an appropriate connector on the DIP Teleprotection unit.
The HMI application provides to the operator an instant measurement of the bit error rate over the communication link.
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 21/44
5.7 Maintenance and loopback
To control operation locally or remotely of the teleprotection unit, the operator can switch the unit into the maintenance mode and perform a local or remote loopback using the DIP human-machine interface:
• Local loopback can be used during transmission with a remote unit.
• Remote and local loopback are mutually exclusive. This means that if one is activated, the other is inaccessible.
• Commands can be forced with the HMI in local or remote mode.
LOCAL
LOOP
Tx
Rx
LOCAL
REMOTE
LOOP
REMOTE
Remote looping
command
Transmitterblocked or not
D0636 FRa
FIGURE 8 – LOOPBACK
This feature allows to check the entire transmission link.
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 22/44
6. ANALOG MODE
6.1 Frequency coding of the single tone version
In the analog mode, a guard frequency is transmitted permanently when the DIP is idle.
When one or several commands are present at the input of the transmission unit, the guard frequency is stopped, and one or several command frequencies are transmitted on line.
IdleGuard frequency
Transmission of
2 commands
D0048 FRa
FIGURE 9 - TRANSMISSION – SINGLE TONE VOICE FREQUENCY BAND
The following table presents the frequency coding on line according to the status of the inputs:
Input command Frequency coding
Command 1 Fc1
Command 2 Fc2
Command 3 Fc3
Command 4 Fc4
Commands 1+2 Fc1+Fc2
Commands 1+3 Fc1+Fc3
Commands 1+4 Fc1+Fc4
Commands 2+3 Fc2+Fc3
Commands 2+4 Fc2+Fc4
Commands 3+4 Fc3+Fc4
Commands 1+2+3+4 Fc1+Fc2+ Fc3+Fc4
Commands 1+2+3 Fc1+Fc2+ Fc3
Commands 2+3+4 Fc2+ Fc3+Fc4
Commands 1+3+4 Fc1+ Fc3+Fc4
Commands 1+2+4 Fc1+ Fc2+Fc4
Link test Fv + 6 dB
Guard Fv
TABLE 2– CODING OF INPUT COMMAND FREQUENCIES
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 23/44
6.2 Frequency coding of the dual tone version
In the single tone mode, the command frequency is Fv and each command corresponds to a frequency Fci (i = 1 to 4):
F1 F6F4 F5F3F2 F8F7
DF
D0485ENa
FIGURE 10 - TRANSMISSION – DUAL TONE VOICE FREQUENCY BAND
The following table presents the commands frequency coding:
Input command Frequency coding
Commands 1 F1+F3
Commands 2 F2+F4
Commands 3 F1+F4
Commands 4 F2+F5
Commands 1+2 F1+F5
Commands 1+3 F3+F5
Commands 1+4 F2+F6
Commands 2+3 F1+F6
Commands 2+4 F3+F6
Commands 3+4 F4+F6
Commands 1+2+3+4 F5+F7
Commands 1+2+3 F1+F7
Commands 2+3+4 F4+F7
Commands 1+3+4 F3+F7
Commands 1+2+4 F2+F7
Link test F6+F7
Guard F8
TABLE 3 – CODING OF INPUT COMMAND FREQUENCIES
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 24/44
6.3 Description of the communication interface
Interface for 4-wire voice frequency transmission medium. For example, it may be a PLC, an analog channel on a multiplexer, a wired link, a leased line, a point to point radio link, etc.
FIGURE 11 – VOICE FREQUENCY INTERFACE
The voice frequency interface operates in a part of the audio frequency band at 4kHz, the signal is transported from the transmitter to the receiver via a telecommunication circuit.
6.4 Characteristics specific to the analog mode
6.4.1 Transmission medium (all versions)
The DIP teleprotection unit is designed to transmit low frequency signals over a 4-qire analog transmission medium with analog access to voice frequencies. The link is always bidirectional.
The architecture and principles used ensure the DIP system can be adapted to the different bandwidth constraints of conventional transmission media:
• 300 - 2400 Hz (cables)
• 300 - 3400 Hz (microwave, multiplexers, radio, etc.)
• 300 - 2000 and 300 - 3700 Hz (PLC)
• Several 1600Hz bands in the dual tone version (see section 8.8.3 )
6.4.2 Optimizing the single tone version
Using the DIP unit with PLC equipment (publication CEI 60495) allows to optimize the operation of the transmission medium:
• Optimizing the bandwidth
In the absence of commands, the link can transmit other signals (e.g. telephony or data). In this particular case, the Fv guard frequency can be the telephony signaling frequency of the telecommunication system, and hence can be generated by the latter. When a command is transmitted, the telephony transmission, calls and high frequency signals are interrupted to the benefit of the command frequency transmission.
• Optimizing power
On the other hand, a specific operating mode, called Advanced mode, allows to use all the power available of the PLC equipment to transmit teleprotection commands.
In this scheme, the level of the command transmitted to the PLC equipment depends on the number of commands to be transmitted simultaneously, to obtain the P.E.P level, on the R.F medium, equivalent to the maximum power level of the PLC equipment.
6.4.3 Number of commands – Single tone version
The architecture of the DIP equipment is such that standard boards may be used to supply configurations with 2 or 4 commands.
Two variants are available:
• Normal maintenance
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 25/44
In this mode, commands are totally independent and can be transmitted simultaneously. The output level is shared between the command signals. As transmission is simultaneous, the level of each command signal is limited so that the sum is equal or below the admissible transmitted level.
• Enhanced mode
This mode, defined by a particular coding mode by algorithm, forces the command output signal to the maximum output power available. This solution is particularly suited to the PLC medium and links sensitive when the optimized SNR is reached.
The DIP transmits its command signal at the maximum output reference. In the case of two simultaneous commands, the level of each signal is reduced to avoid exceeding the maximum output reference.
This configuration returns automatically to the initial setting (maximum reference) when canceling the simultaneous condition.
With its 4 commands, the DIP unit is configured in a 2+2 operating mode. The 4 commands are distributed into 2 groups combined with a priority rule .
Each group observes the maximum automatic reference concept. The 2+2 rule of priority is designed for optimized signal transmission.
Rule of priority
Active command input Command transmitted Comment
1
2
1+2
1
2
1+2
Group A
3
4
3+4
3
4
3+4
Group B
1+3
1+4
2+3
2+4
1+2+3
2+3+4
1+2+3+4
1
1
2
2
1+2
2
1+2
Group A has priority over group B
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 26/44
6.4.4 Link test
The operator can check the global operation of the link during operation, by pressing a push button or through the maintenance PC. This procedure allows to transmit a test message with loopback at the other end of the link.
This operation provides very fast checking of the transmission medium and the ‘transmitter’ and ‘receiver’ parts of the equipment.
This procedure can also be launched, automatically, by the equipment with a programmable periodicity (daily or hourly). This feature is programmed via the HMI application and associated with an alarm level.
In case of failure of the procedure (after three attempts), the equipment switches to the irreversible minor or major alarm condition according to the programming (fault lamps on and alarm loops activation).
The alarm is maintained until operator intervention. In case of minor alarm, the next link test (periodical or manual) can be performed, and then the minor alarm is maintained or not, according to the result.
T
R
T
R
Test
TestCPU CPU
FIGURE 12 – LINK TEST – ANALOG MODE
6.4.5 Unblocking feature
This function allows to send one of the 4 commands upon a guard frequency reception fault.
Triggering condition: a loss of the guard frequency or drop of its level above the programmed threshold and during a time longer than that selected, causes the transmission of a command calibrated on the output selected.
• Transmission time: adjustable from 5 to 100 ms in 1 ms steps.
• Trigger threshold: adjustable from 10 to 20 dB under the nominal guard level by steps of 0.1 dB.
• Command time adjustable from 30 to 500 ms per 1 ms steps.
6.4.6 Voltage presence
The voice frequency interface module provides an output (relay) contact closed as long as the DIP is powered on. This feature allows the communication equipment or protection automation system to be notified in case of loss of power supply of the teleprotection when the guard frequency is transmitted by the communication equipment.
The circuit for this contact is located in the connector of the communication interface.
6.4.7 External alarm input
The voice frequency interface board includes an opto-electronic input circuit activated by a voltage (48V nominal). This input can be configured by the HMI to trigger an alarm on the teleprotection equipment. This alarm, which can be minor or major, is activated after a user-set time (0 to 2.5 seconds per 100 ms steps).
For example, this feature allows the DIP to consider the interruption or lack of the power supply, as well as the dedicated alarms transmitted by the communication equipment.
The circuit for this input is located in the communication interface connector.
6.4.8 DIP connected to a PLC
This paragraph concerns only the single tone enhanced analog mode.
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 27/44
6.4.8.1 Automatic maximum increase
When the DIP equipment is used in the enhanced mode with the PLC equipment, the command signal is set automatically to the maximum power available of the transmitter (the signals selected for the PLC are interrupted during the transmission of the command).
The use of the power supply of the 40 W (+ 46 dBm) PLC for the command, or 80 W (+ 49 dBm), in an enhanced mode ensures the best command transmission in unfavorable conditions (optimized Signal to Noise Ratio).
6.4.8.2 Operation
The 40 W optimized transmission power corresponds to the following data:
Active command input RF output signal per command
One command (group A or group B)
+46 dBm PLC P.E.P.
Two commands (in the same group)
+40 dBm PLC P.E.P. -6 dB
The 80 W optimized transmission power corresponds to the following data:
Active command input RF output signal per command
One command (group A or group B)
+49 dBm PLC P.E.P.
Two commands (in the same group)
+43 dBm PLC P.E.P. -6 dB
C1
C2
C3
C1
C1
C2C2 C3
P.E.P. limit
Command
input ON
R.F. output
(CPL)
Automatic power process
D0487FRa
FIGURE 13 - EXAMPLE OF AUTOMATIC POWER PROCESS
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 28/44
6.5 Characteristics specific to the analog mode in the dual tone version
Teleprotection mode: teleprotection CODED
• 8 frequency tones
• Dual tone command (F1 to F7)
• F8 for the guard frequency (use of PLC signaling forbidden)
• Dual tone link test
• Teleprotection with 4 commands (6 types of application)
• Bandwidths 9 x 1600 Hz between 300 Hz and 3600 Hz
The level and time of the noise alarm, part of the decision process and measured by smoothening the decision filters, must be defined.
The delay of the blocking alarm, corresponding to a state of blocking of the decision algorithm (impossibility to recognize a command in bad line conditions), must be defined.
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 29/44
7. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
A DIP Teleprotection unit is made of a rack, EUROPE type, 3 Units high, inside which the printed circuit boards supporting the components are placed (format 6 units, depth 220 mm)
The modules are connected by a back plane also including outlets allowing to insert connectors to the power supply, transmission and operation media.
D0051XXb
(3U)
132.5 mm
300 mm
or
316 mm
37.7 mm
37.7 mm
57.1 mm
FIGURE 14 – DIP RACK
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 30/44
Different boards composing the DIP:
Name Function Position
AM170 (1) Rack with FB182 back plane with single power supply connector
AM170D Rack with FB182D back plane with two power supply connectors
UT148(1) CPU board 1
UT148D CPU board 1
SR114(1) Input-output board with 4 commands for 48 to 250 Vdc acquisition voltage. 2 / 3
SR114D Input-output board with 4 commands for 48 to 250 Vdc acquisition voltage. 2 / 3
SR115 Input-output board with 4 commands for 24 to 127 Vdc acquisition voltage. 2 / 3
SR116 Input-output board with 4 commands for 24 to 127 Vdc acquisition voltage. 2 / 3
SR200 Input-output board with 4 commands for 24 to 250 Vdc acquisition voltage. Enhanced restitution characteristics.
2 / 3
AL137(2) Power supply 48 V nominal input with standard, normally closed, alarm contacts 5 / 6 *
AL142(2) Power supply 48 V nominal input with normally open alarm contacts 5 / 6 *
AL139A(2) Power supply 110 V to 127 Vdc nominal input with standard, normally closed, alarm contacts 5 / 6 *
AL143(2) Power supply 110 V to 127 Vdc nominal input with normally open alarm contacts 5 / 6 *
AL139B(2) Nominal input power supply 220 to 250 Vdc 5 / 6 *
AL140(2) Nominal input power supply 24 Vdc 5 / 6 *
Digital communication interface
IR173_75 G703-6 interface (2 Mbps) Impedance 75 ohms On CPU
IR173_120 G703-6 interface (2 Mbps) Impedance 120 ohms On CPU
IR179 V11 interface (32 kbps to 512 kbps) On CPU
IR180 G703-1 codirectional interface (64 kbps) On CPU
IR185 Short distance optical fiber interface, C37.94 standard (λ = 850 nm, 62.5/125 µm), ST connectors. Rate Nx64kbps with N from 1 to 8.
4
IR187(3) Optical interface able to receive different types of SFP module. LC connector. Rate 256 kbps or Nx64kbps with N 1 to 8 according to use
4
Analog communication interface
IR183 Voice frequency interface. On CPU
Optional boards
IR184 IRIG-B interface board On CPU
FI002 Filter against capacitive discharge 2
ME50 RS232/IP converter, RJ45 LAN interface, SNMP management, configuration reading by web browser.
On CPU board
FI005 (4) Board allowing to acquire commands by dry loop instead of a voltage On SR200
TABLE 4 – DIP BOARDS
(1) Models reserved to France only.
(2) To increase dependability, two power supply modules can be used, with the same input voltages or different voltages.
(3) The IR187 board can only be fitted in the AM170D rack.
(4) Only on SR200 board.
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 31/44
8. MAIN CHARACTERISTICS
8.1 Mechanical characteristics
Dimensions
Height 132 mm (3U)
Width 483 mm (19")
Depth 300 mm (behind the bracket)
Weight 7.6 kg
Cross-section of conductors on the connectors
AWG 20 to 22 (0.324 to 0.519 mm²)
Diameter of the access connector cable 8.2 mm maximum
Cable to connect to the terminal devices (command I/O)
0.08 < Cross-section < 2.5 mm²
Protection rating IP30
TABLE 5 – MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 32/44
8.2 Environmental characteristics
Climatic conditions
Nominal operating range
Temperature -10°C to +55°C
Relative humidity 90 % at 23°C
Operating limits
Temperature -40°C to +55°C
Relative humidity 95 % at 40°C
Limit storage conditions
Temperature -40°C to +85°C
Relative humidity 100 % at 23°C no condensation
Product safety
Generic standard EN 60255-5 (2000) / EN60255-27(2005)
Teleprotection standard CEI 60834-1 (1999) / EN 60834-1 (2000)
insultation resistance > 30.104 MΩ / 500 VDC
Dielectric tests at 50 Hz 2.5 kV on I/O commands
1 kV on the communication link
Impulse withsdtand level ± 5 kV on I/O commands
Earth continuity < 22 mΩ
EMC requirements
Compliance with IEC recommendations
Teleprotection standard CEI 60834-1 (1999) / EN 60834-1 (2000)
Generic immunity (industrial) CEI 61000-6-2 (2005)
Generic transmission (industrial) CEI 61000-6-4 (2006)
Generic immunity (station and substation environment)
CEI/TS 61000-6-5 (2001)
Electromagnetic compatibility requirements (tests)
Static discharge CEI 61000-4-2(2001) Level 3 / CEI 60255-22-2 (1996)
Radiated magnetic field CEI 61000-4-3 (2006) Level 3
Fast transient bursts CEI 61000-4-4 (2004) Level 4 / CEI 60255-22-4 (2002) Level B
Surge immunity CEI 61000-4-5(2005) Level 3 / CEI 60255-22-5 (2002)
Conducted electromagnetic field CEI 61000-4-6(2006) Level 3 / CEI 60255-22-6 (2001)
Magnetic field CEI 61000-4-8 (2001) Level 5
Pulse magnetic field CEI 61000-4-9 (2001) Level 5
Voltage drops, short voltage interruptions and variations
CEI 61000-4-29 (2000)
Oscillatory waves CEI 61000-4-12(2006) Level 3 / CEI 60255-22-1 (2007)
Conducted disturbance common mode CEI 61000-4-16(2002) Level 4 / CEI 60255-22-7 (2003)
TABLE 6 – ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 33/44
8.3 Electrical characteristics of the power supply
Nominal voltage 24 VDC 48 VDC 48/60 VDC 110/127 VDC 220/250 VDC
Operating range (Vdc) 18 to 30 36 to 60 36 to 72 80 to 160 160 to 300
Fuses 3.15 AT / 250 V
Redundant power supply possibility
2 separate accesses
Nominal consumption 7.5 W
Maximum absorbed power < 15 W
Maximum current at power on < 15 A (50µs ≤ t ≤ 1.5 ms
< 8 A (1.5 ms ≤ t ≤ 500 ms)
Frequency offset authorized between 100 Hz and 600 Hz
< 1.5 V peak to peak
Variations likely to be overlaid on top
± 20 V max in amplitude
Maximum duration: 1 s
Fleeting power cut < 50 ms / 500 ms
Re-injected noise < 3 mV psophometric
< 6 mV peak to peak
TABLE 7 – POWER SUPPLY CHARACTERISTICS
8.4 Characteristics of the IRIG-B interface
IRIG-B format B12x interface (modulated),
200-04 Standard,
Input impedance 4.7 kΩ at 1000 Hz,
Modulation ratio: 3:1 to 6:1,
Peak-to-peak input signal: 100 mV to 10 V.
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 34/44
8.5 Operating characteristics
General
Number of commands transmitted 2 or 4 with an I/O board, up to 8 with a second board
Particularity All commands are independent and can also be used simultaneously
Command acquisition
Physical input 4 per I/O board, up to 8 with 2 boards
Mode Per voltage from 24 to 250 VDC
In dry loop option with the SR200 board
Decoupling Opto-electronic
Input filter 0 to 100 ms selectable by the HMI, 1 ms step
Except for the single tone filter version from 0 to 3mS
Value recommended 1mS
Validation times Analog version only: from 1 ms to 5 ms (1 ms step) selectable by the HMI
Input combination logic AND, OR, LOG possibility between 2 inputs
Command holding time (default minimum or maximum time in calibrated mode) (2)
For the digital transmission 0 or 20 to 200 ms per 1 ms step with the HMI
For the analog transmission 20 to 500 ms per 1 ms step with the HMI
Command restitution (according to type of SR board)
SR11x SR200
Mode By contacts (static and electromechanical relay)
Number of contacts 4 contacts in operation, up to 8 with two boards
Contacts operating in pairs if the input combination logic is configured.
Maximum voltage 290 Vdc 300 Vdc
Maximum current 2 A 5A
Cut-off power 120 W 650 W (1)
Short-circuit current 100 A / 30 ms
Contact closing time Programmable
Restitution holding time (minimum) (2)
For the digital output 0 to 3 s. Either 0 to 200 ms by 1 ms step , either 200 ms to 3 s per 10 ms step with the HMI
For the dual tone analog output 0 to 3 s. Either 0 to 200 ms by 2 ms step, either 200 ms to 3 s per 20 ms step with the HMI
For the single tone analog output 0 to 500 ms in 1 ms steps
(1) Within the limit of maximum voltage or current. Examples: 5A under 127 Vdc or 2A under 300
Vdc (2) The holding times indicated are valid from version 2.2. For previous versions refer to Table 7
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 35/44
Auxiliary relays
Mode By contacts (solid state relay)
Number of contacts 1 contact in operation
At least 2 auxiliary contacts per command (1 Tx and 1 Rx)
Up to 4 auxiliary contacts per command (2 Tx and 2 Rx) with the input logic.
Characteristics identical to command restitution
Alarm features
Interface Lamps and relays
Number of contacts 2 contacts for the minor alarm.
2 contacts for the major alarm
Type of contacts Normally closed (by default).
Normally open in option for 48/60Vdc and 110/127 Vdc
Maximum voltage 290 VDC
Maximum current 5 A
Cut-off power 100 W
Short-circuit current 100 A / 30 ms
Delay on command relay alarm 0 s / 2.5 s / 5 s / 10 s configurable by HMI
Operator assistance
Operations Alarm lamps and loops
Maintenance Connection of a PC for all startup and maintenance operations
Histories 1785 time-stamped events 1785 time-stamped alarms Resolution = 1 ms between 2 events or alarms
TABLE 8 – OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 36/44
For versions before 2.2
Versions 1.x Version 2.1
Command holding (default minimum time)
Digital mode 0 or 20 to 250 ms per 1 ms step with the HMI
Dual tone analog mode NA 0 to 500 ms in 1 ms steps
Single tone analog mode 0 to 500 ms per 1 ms step with the HMI
Restitution holding (minimum time)
Digital mode 0 to 250 s in 1 ms steps
Dual tone analog mode NA 0 to 3 s. Either 0 to 200 ms by 2 ms step either 200 ms to 3 s per 20 ms step with the HMI
Single tone analog mode 0 to 500 ms in 1 ms steps
TABLE 9 – CHARACTERISTICS OF PREVIOUS VERSIONS
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 37/44
8.6 Characteristics of digital transmission
Digital medium G703.1 / G703.6 / V11 / Optical
Transmission speed 32 Kbit/s to 2048 Kbit/s
Connector SUB-D 15 pin, shielded
Impedance G703-6 120 Ω or 75 Ω
Insulation By translator for G703
By optocouplers for V11
Optical characteristics IR187 board with SFP module
See following paragraph dedicated to SFP modules
Multimode IR185
Compliance IEEC C.37.94 yes
Transmission speed n x 64 kbps (1 ≤ n ≤ 8)
Optical power at 820 nm 50 µm fibers Nominal -19 dBm Minimum -23 dBm
Optical power at 820 nm 62 µm fibers Nominal -16 dBm Minimum -19 dBm
Receiver sensitivity - 30 dBm
TABLE 10 – DIGITAL TRANSMISSION CHARACTERISTICS
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 38/44
8.7 Characteristics of SFP modules
8.7.1 Single mode unidirectional modules
Type of interface S1.1 L1.2e U1.2e
Wavelength (nm) 1261 to 1360 1480 to 1580 1480 to 1580
Type of fiber SM
Average output power (dBm) -14 to -8 -3 to +2 +5 to +8
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -34 -34 -45
Max acceptable power at receiver input -8 -8 -10
Connector Double LC
Maximum chromatic dispersion (ps/nm) NA NA 4800
Maximum theoretical distance * (km) 30 100 240
TABLE 11 – CHARACTERISTICS OF UNIDIRECTIONAL SM MODULES
8.7.2 Single mode bidirectional modules
Pair 1 Pair 2 Pair 3
Type of interface BIDI-180-1
BIDI-180-2
BIDI-1120-1
BIDI-1120-2
BIDI-1200-1
BIDI-1200-2
Tx wavelength (nm) 1310 1550 1510 1590 1510 1590
Rx wavelength (nm) 1550 1310 1590 1510 1590 1510
Type of fiber SM
Average output power (dBm) -2 to -3 -2 to -3 -2 to -3 -2 to -3 1 to 5 1 to 5
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -34 -34 -34 -34 -45 -45
Max acceptable power at receiver input -8 -8 -8 -8 -10 -10
Connector LC
Maximum possible chromatic dispersion (ps/nm)
NA
Maximum theoretical distance * (km) 80 120 200
TABLE 12 – CHARACTERISTICS OF BIDIRECTIONAL SM MODULES
8.7.3 Multimode unidirectional module
Type of interface MM-20
Wavelength (nm) 830 to 860
Type of fiber MM
Average output power (dBm) -7 to -2
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -16
Connector LC
Maximum theoretical distance * (km) 1
TABLE 13 – CHARACTERISTICS OF UNIDIRECTIONAL MM MODULES
* This distance is given for information, depending on the quality of the facility. Only a measurement of the optical budget allows giving a precise evaluation.
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 39/44
8.8 Characteristics of voice frequency transmission
8.8.1 General characteristics
Access medium
Line impedance 600 Ω or high impedance (selection by jumper)
Return loss 20 dB minimum over 600 Ω
Galvanic insulation Translator
Connector SUB-D 15 pin, shielded
Sender
Precision of frequencies transmitted 1 Hz
Transmission level -30 dBm to +6 dBm
Maximum global output level (4 commands) +6 dBm
Pre-emphasis Up to 14 dB between two signals
Signals non valid out of band < 50 dB signals transmitted
Receiver
Levels acceptable -40 dBm to 0 dBm
Adjustment 1 for the guard frequency and 1 for commands
Acceptable difference between command and guard frequency 0 to 14 dB
TABLE 14 – GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF VOICE FREQUENCY TRANSMISSION
8.8.2 Band sharing - Single tone version
The following table presents the allocation of frequencies in single tone bandwidths.
2 commands
Channel bandwidth 300 - 3400 Hz 300 - 2400 Hz 300 - 2000 Hz 300 - 2000 Hz
Guard frequency band (Rx) 3500 / 3800 Hz 2400 / 2650 Hz 2000 / 2300 Hz 3600 / 3800 Hz
Guard frequency (Tx) 3600 Hz 2600 Hz 2240 Hz 3680 Hz
Command 1 frequency 900 Hz 400 Hz 480 Hz 480 Hz
Command 2 frequency 2100 Hz 1200 Hz 1120 Hz 1120 Hz
4 commands
Channel bandwidth 300 - 3400 Hz 300 - 2400 Hz 300 - 2000 Hz 300 - 2000 Hz
Guard frequency band (Rx) 3500 / 3800 Hz 2400 / 2650 Hz 2000 / 2300 Hz 3600 / 3800 Hz
Guard frequency (Tx) 3680 Hz 2600 Hz 2240 Hz 3680 Hz
Command 1 frequency 640 Hz 400 Hz 480 Hz 480 Hz
Command 2 frequency 1280 Hz 800 Hz 800 Hz 800 Hz
Command 3 frequency 1920 Hz 1200 Hz 1120 Hz 1120 Hz
Command 4 frequency 2560 Hz 1600 Hz 1440 Hz 1440 Hz
TABLE 15 – BAND SHARING – SINGLE TONE VERSION
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 40/44
8.8.3 Band sharing – Dual tone version
The following tables present the bandwidths and spectral distribution of frequencies used in the dual tone version.
Band F8 Bandwidth
1 1741 300-1900
2 1820 400-2000
3 2110 670-2260
4 2295 850-2450
5 2479 1040-2630
6 2664 1220-2810
7 2848 1400-3000
8 3033 1590-3180
9 3429 1990-3580
TABLE 16 – DUAL TONE VERSION FREQUENCIES
Frequencies
(Hz) Band 1 Band 2 Band 3 Band 4 Band 5 Band 6 Band 7 Band 8 Band 9
F1 448 527 818 1002 1187 1371 1556 1741 2136
F2 633 712 1002 1187 1371 1556 1741 1925 2321
F3 818 897 1187 1371 1556 1741 1925 2110 2505
F4 1002 1081 1371 1556 1741 1925 2110 2294 2690
F5 1187 1266 1556 1741 1925 2110 2294 2479 2875
F6 1371 1451 1741 1925 2110 2295 2479 2664 3059
F7 1556 1635 1925 2110 2294 2479 2664 2848 3244
F8 1741 1820 2110 2294 2479 2664 2848 3033 3429
Link test F3+F7 F3+F7 F3+F7 F3+F7 F3+F7 F3+F7 F3+F7 F3+F7 F3+F7
TABLE 17 – FREQUENCIES AND BANDWIDTH (DUAL TONE VERSION)
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 41/44
9. PERFORMANCE
9.1 Digital interfaces
9.1.1 Maximum transfer time according to transmission speed
Junction type Operation mode 4 Commands 8 Commands
G703 64 kbps
Blocking 5.5 ms 7.5 ms
Permissive 6.5 ms 9.5 ms
Direct tripping 8.0 ms 12.0 ms
V11 256 kbps
Blocking 3.0 ms 3.5 ms
Permissive 3.5 ms 4.0 ms
Direct tripping 4.0 ms 5.0 ms
G703.6 – 2048 kbps
Blocking 3.0 ms 3.5 ms
Permissive 3.0 ms 3.5 ms
Direct tripping 3.0 ms 3.5 ms
Optical link IR182/IR187
Blocking 3.0 ms 3.5 ms
Permissive 3.5 ms 4.0 ms
Direct tripping 4.0 ms 5.0 ms
TABLE 18 – MEASUREMENTS OF TRANSMISSION TIMES FOR ELECTRICAL AND IR187 BOARDS
NOTE: The times indicated correspond to a configuration with input filter 1ms activated and latest I/O board SR200
9.1.2 Transfer time according to the IEEE C37-94 protocol
C37.94 interface Rotary switch position 8 T0 Max. (ms)
Permissive 3,5
Blocking 3,0
Direct 3,5
TABLE 19 – MEASUREMENTS OF TRANSMISSION TIME FOR THE IR185 & IR187 BOARD WITH MUX
NOTE: The times indicated correspond to a configuration with input filter 1ms activated and latest I/O board SR200
9.1.3 Security
The following table indicates the values of dependability and security according to the protection mode with 4 commands and a speed of 64 kbps.
Protection mode Security (Puc) TEB = 0.5
(worst case)
Blocking < 2E-7
Permissive tripping 6E-14
Direct tripping 1E-20
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 42/44
9.1.4 Dependability
Protection mode Dependability (Pmc)
TEB = 1E-3
Blocking 1E-30
Permissive tripping 1E-35
Direct tripping 1E-19
9.2 Analog interface – Single tone version
9.2.1 Transmission time
For each application, the two times indicated are expressed in milliseconds, and with 6 dB boost – without 6 dB boost respectively (in normal mode).
BANDWIDTH OPERATION
Command channel
Guard frequency
Blocking Permissive tripping Direct tripping
2 cmds 4 cmds 2 cmds 4 cmds 2 cmds 4 cmds
300-3400 3600 Hz 7 - 7 7 - 8 8 - 9 9 - 10 11 - 12 14 - 15
300-2400 2540 Hz 10 - 10 11 - 12 13 - 13 13 - 14 18 - 18 19 - 20
300-2000 2240 Hz 10 - 10 11 - 12 13 - 13 14 - 15 18 - 18 19 - 20
300-2000 3680 Hz 10 - 10 11 - 12 13 - 13 14 - 15 18 - 18 19 - 20
TABLE 20 – TRANSMISSION TIME SINGLE TONE VERSION
NOTE: The times indicated correspond to a configuration with input filter deactivated.
9.2.2 Security (bandwidth 300-3 400 Hz)
The values indicated in the following table correspond to the worst SNR.
Protection mode 2 commands 4 commands
Blocking <6.10-4
<3.10-4
Permissive tripping <6.10-6
<6.10-6
Direct tripping <1.10-11
<6.10-11
9.2.3 Dependability (bandwidth 300-3400 Hz)
The values indicated in the following table correspond to a 6 dB S/N ratio.
Protection mode 2 commands 4 commands
Blocking <4.10-4
<6.10-4
Permissive tripping <7.10-4
<8.10-4
Direct tripping <8.10-4
<8.10-4
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 43/44
9.3 Analog interface – Dual tone version
9.3.1 Transmission time
BANDWIDTH STANDARD OPERATION
Blocking Permissive tripping Direct tripping
300-1900 Hz 10 ms
BANDWIDTH REINFORCED OPERATION
Blocking Permissive tripping Direct tripping
300-1900 Hz 11 ms 12 ms 13 ms
TABLE 21 – TRANSMISSION TIME DUAL TONE VERSION
9.3.2 Security (bandwidth 300- 1900 Hz)
Security (for the worst SNR)
Blocking Permissive tripping Direct tripping
<1.10-5
<1.10-5
<1.10-9
9.3.3 Dependability (bandwidth 300 - 1900 Hz)
Dependability (for S/N = 6 dB)
Blocking Permissive tripping Direct tripping
See curves below
General characteristics
DIP/EN IT/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 44/44
Installation
DIP/EN IN/A23 e-terragridcom DIP
INSTALLATION
Installation
DIP/EN IN/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 1/38
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 7
2. SHIPPING 8
2.1 Packaging 8
2.2 Storage 8
2.3 Parts list 8
3. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 10
4. INSTALLATION 11
4.1 Description 11
4.2 Implementation of the boards 11
4.2.1 Basic configuration 11
4.2.2 Adding additional boards to the rack 12
4.2.3 Optional boards 13
5. POWER SUPPLY BOARDS 14
5.1 Range of Vdc values of power supply boards 14
5.2 Constraints relative to the Vdc input values 14
5.3 Power supply and consumption 14
6. CONNECTION 15
6.1 Rear connectors 15
6.2 I /O wiring of terminal blocks 16
6.2.1 Description of connection to the terminal blocks 16
6.2.2 I/O pin-out of terminal blocks 17
6.2.3 Allocation of logical input commands 18
6.2.4 Examples of wiring 20
6.3 Wiring alarms and copy contacts 20
6.3.1 Description of connection to the terminal blocks 20
6.3.2 Pin-out of the copy and alarm outputs on the terminal blocks 21
6.3.3 Particular case of the AL142 and AL143 boards. 22
6.3.4 Allocation of copy outputs 22
6.3.5 Recommendation 23
6.4 Power supply wiring 24
6.4.1 Description of connection to the terminal blocks 24
6.4.2 Pin-out of the power supply connector with the AM170 rack 24
6.4.3 Pin-out of the power supply connector with the AM170D rack 24
6.5 Access port for line connection support 25
DIP/EN IN/A23
Installation
Page 2/38 e-terragridcom DIP
6.5.1 Description of the connectors 25
6.5.2 Pin-out of the V11 / X24 - IR179 interface 26
6.5.3 Pinout of the G703-1 (64 kbps) - IR180 codirectional interface 27
6.5.4 Pinout of the G703-6 (2 Mbps) - IR173 interface 28
6.5.5 Voice frequency (analog mode) - IR183 interface 29
6.6 Optical fiber access port 30
6.7 Standard HMI access port (PC connection) 30
6.8 Optional RJ45 HMI access port 31
6.9 IRIG-B interface port 31
6.10 FI002 wiring 32
7. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 33
8. APPENDIX 34
8.1 AM170 - Location of the terminal blocks 34
8.2 AM170D - Location of the terminal blocks – Double power supply version 35
8.3 Connector kits delivered with the equipment 36
8.4 Connection of the 2-command version 37
8.5 Connections of the 4-command version with 1 I/O board 37
8.6 Connections of the 4-command version with 2 I/O boards 38
8.7 Connection of the 8-command version 38
Installation
DIP/EN IN/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 3/38
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1 – DIP RACK 11
FIGURE 2 – EXAMPLE OF PLUG-IN CARD POSITIONS 12
FIGURE 3 – LOCATION OF CHILD BOARDS ON THE CPU BOARD 13
FIGURE 4 - AM170 CONNECTORS AT THE BACK 15
FIGURE 5 - AM170DCONNECTORS AT THE BACK 15
FIGURE 6 – 10 PIN WAGO CONNECTOR 17
FIGURE 7 – PLUG-IN TERMINAL BLOCK TOOL 17
FIGURE 8 – 11 PIN WAGO CONNECTOR 20
FIGURE 9 - AM170D WIRING OF TWO POWER SUPPLIES FOR A SINGLE SOURCE 25
FIGURE 10 – PINOUT OF THE V11/X24 INTERFACE 26
FIGURE 11 – PINOUT OF THE G703.1 INTERFACE 27
FIGURE 12 – PINOUT OF THE G703.6 2 MBIT/S IR173 INTERFACE 28
FIGURE 13 – PINOUT OF THE IR173_120 OR IR173_75 INTERFACE 28
FIGURE 14 – PINOUT OF THE ANALOG INTERFACE 29
FIGURE 15 – DESCRIPTION OF THE HMI CONNECTOR ON THE FRONT 30
FIGURE 16 – DESCRIPTION OF THE HMI CONNECTOR AT THE BACK 31
FIGURE 17 – RJ45 PORT 31
FIGURE 18 - AM170 - CONNECTORS AT THE BACK 34
FIGURE 19 - AM170D - CONNECTORS AT THE BACK 35
FIGURE 20 – AM170 KIT 36
FIGURE 21 – AM170D KIT 36
FIGURE 22 – CONNECTIONS OF THE TWO-COMMAND VERSION 37
FIGURE 23 – CONNECTIONS OF THE 4-COMMAND VERSION WITH 1 I/O BOARD 37
FIGURE 24 – CONNECTIONS OF THE 4-COMMAND VERSION WITH 2 I/O BOARDS 38
FIGURE 25 – CONNECTIONS OF THE 8-COMMAND VERSION 38
DIP/EN IN/A23
Installation
Page 4/38 e-terragridcom DIP
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE 1 – LIST OF PARTS IN THE UNIT 8
TABLE 2 – BOARDS AVAILABLE 9
TABLE 4 – LOCATION OF THE CIRCUITS ON THE P10, P11, P12 AND P13 TERMINAL BLOCKS 18
TABLE 6 – LOCATION OF THE CIRCUITS OF TERMINAL BLOCKS P14, P15 AND P16 21
TABLE 7 – PINOUT OF ALARM TERMINAL BLOCKS P16 22
TABLE 9 – PINOUT OF THE P17 TERMINAL BLOCK 24
TABLE 10 – PINOUT OF THE MAIN & AUXILIARY TERMINAL BLOCK 24
TABLE 11 – PINOUT OF THE V11/X24 INTERFACE 26
TABLE 12 – CONNECTION OF THE G703-1 CODIRECTIONAL INTERFACE 27
TABLE 13 – CONNECTION OF THE G703-6 IR 173 INTERFACE 28
TABLE 14 – CONNECTION OF THE IR173_120 OR IR173_75 INTERFACE 29
TABLE 15 – CONNECTION OF THE VOICE FREQUENCY INTERFACE 29
TABLE 16 – COMMAND MANAGEMENT CONNECTORS 34
TABLE 17 – OTHER CONNECTORS ON REAR FACE 34
TABLE 18 – COMMAND MANAGEMENT CONNECTORS 35
TABLE 19 – OTHER CONNECTORS ON REAR FACE 35
Installation
DIP/EN IN/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 5/38
MODIFICATIONS PAGE
VERSION DATE COMMENTS
A 19/10/2000 Original issue
B 18/04/2001 Added the optical interface
C 04/10/2001 Added the grounding recommendation
D11 02/06/2004 ALSTOM – Added the analog part
E111 14/11/2007 New structure. New writing
F11 11/02/2008 Minor corrections
A22 15/09/2009 Software version 2.2
A23 01/06/2010 Minor corrections, added SR200 I/O interface, IR187 optical interface
NOTE: As of revision C, the document numbering has changed in compliance with ALSTOM standards, however the document index was incremented to allow better monitoring.
DIP/EN IN/A23
Installation
Page 6/38 e-terragridcom DIP
BLANK PAGE
Installation
DIP/EN IN/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 7/38
1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY SECTION DIP/EN SS/A23 OR LATER ISSUE, THE TECHNICAL DATA SECTION AND THE RATING ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.
THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED RS232C(1)
SERIAL PORT IS AN EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. WHEN THE TELEPROTECTION IS ENERGIZED, THE TERMINALS OF THIS PORT SHOULD NOT BE TOUCHED SINCE IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF A SINGLE FAULT CONDITION THERE WOULD BE A VERY LOW PROBABILITY OF AN ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS DESIGNED TO BE USED FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, THAT IS MONITORING AND SOFTWARE DOWNLOADS; IT IS NOT INTENDED TO BE PERMANENTLY CONNECTED.
THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED RJ45(1)
SERIAL PORT IS AN EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS INTENDED TO BE USED FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, I.E. MONITORING AND DOWNLOADING THE SOFTWARE.
(1) As per the option chosen
DIP/EN IN/A23
Installation
Page 8/38 e-terragridcom DIP
2. SHIPPING
2.1 Packaging
The packaging of the DIP includes:
• The DIP.
• A set of connectors, including small size tools (x 5) to insert the wiring.
• The reports on tests performed in the factory.
The DIP digital teleprotection equipment is made of a frame designed to host plug-in boards. This frame is designed to be located inside a standard 19-inch cabinet with fastening by the front face. The equipment is packaged and grouped in a standard box suited for transport.
Each box is marked on the outside with the serial number of the equipment to avoid opening when shipping several units in a same delivery.
The total weight of the equipment is about: 8 kg.
2.2 Storage
If the equipment is not installed within the weeks after shipped from the factory, it should be removed from its packaging before being stored, preferably in a shop. The equipment should be installed and powered on when intended to be stored for long periods (several months).
The temperature limits for transport and storage are -40°C to +85°C.
2.3 Parts list
The following table indicates the different components, or options, of a unit according to the variant chosen:
EQUIPMENT COMPONENTS
Variant 2 or 4 commands (3)
Variant 8 commands
3U rack AM170 (4) or AM170D 1
CPU board UT 148 (4) or UT148D 1
Terminal blocks 9 (5)
Line connection (female connector 15 pins) 1
CP connection (female connector DB 9 pins or RJ45 at the front (option)
1
Power supply board ALxxx (1) 1 or 2 (2)
I/O board SRxxx (1) 1 or 2 (3) 2
Digital communication interface IRxxx (1) 1 (DIP digital version)
Optical communication interface IR182, IR185 or IR187 1 (DIP optical fiber version)
Voice frequency interface IR183 1 (DIP analog version)
Filter board FI002 1 for the 2 or 4 command variant only (option)
TABLE 1 – LIST OF PARTS IN THE UNIT
(1) Refer to the list of boards available in table 2 below.
(2) 2 boards if redundant power supply.
(3) Depends on the contact diagram selected.
(4) Models reserved to RTE (France)
(5) 8 only with the AM170 frame
Installation
DIP/EN IN/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 9/38
Category and name of the board
Function Comment
Power supply boards
AL137 / AL142 (1) Power supply 48 / 60 Vdc Input 36 to 72 Vdc
AL139A / AL143 (1)
Power supply 110 / 127 Vdc Input 80 to 160 Vdc
AL139B Power supply 220 / 250 Vdc Input 160 to 300 Vdc
AL140 Power supply 24 Vdc Input 18 to 30 Vdc
I/O boards
SR114 / SR114D Nominal I/O 48 to 250 Vdc Command input 30 to 300 Vdc
SR115 Nominal I/O 24 to 60 Vdc Command input 18 to 72 Vdc
SR116 Nominal I/O 48 to 127 Vdc Command input 36 to 152 Vdc
SR200 Nominal I/O 24 to 250 Vdc Command input 18 to 300 Vdc
Dry loop I/O on option With FI005 board
Communication interface
IR173_75 G703-6 (E1) – 75 ohms Digital mode (256 kbps)
IR173_120 G703-6 (E1) – 120 ohms Digital mode (256 kbps)
IR179 V11 / X24 RS422 Digital mode (32 kbps to 256 kbps)
IR180 G703-1 co-directional Digital mode (64 kbps)
IR182-1310 Single mode optical fiber (1310 nm) Optical fiber mode
IR182-1550 Single Mode optical fiber (1550 nm) Optical fiber mode
IR185 Multimode optical fiber (850 nm) Optical fiber mode C37.94
IR187 ‘Versatile’ optical fiber with SFP module All optical modes
IR183 Voice frequency interface Analog mode
Optional features
ME50 RS232/IP converter, RJ45 LAN interface, SNMP management, configuration reading by web browser.
Child board of the UT148D
IR184 IRIG-B synchronization interface IRIG-B 12x format Standard 200-04 Input impedance 4.7 kΩ at 1000 Hz Modulation ratio 3:1 to 6:1 Peak to peak amplitude input signal: 100 mV to 10 V
FI002 Filter against capacitive discharge 2 or 4 commands only
FI005 Child board allowing to acquire commands by dry loop instead of a voltage
With SR200 board only
TABLE 2 – BOARDS AVAILABLE
(1) Alarm loop relays are fitted on the power supply boards. In standard these contacts
are normally closed, in option these contacts are normally open on the AL142 and AL143 boards.
DIP/EN IN/A23
Installation
Page 10/38 e-terragridcom DIP
3. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Operating limit temperatures: -40°C to +70°C
Maximum relative humidity at 23°C: 90 %
These units are designed to be installed in premises protected from the rain.
Installation
DIP/EN IN/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 11/38
4. INSTALLATION
4.1 Description
The rack dimensions comply with the EUROPE type 19-inch standard, 3 units high as per the DIN 41494 standard.
The latter is designed to be installed in bays or boxes. The only support and fastening points are located on the front face of the racks, on drilled angle pieces.
4.2 Implementation of the boards
With its modular design, the DIP is available on several versions: analog, digital, 2, 4 or 8 commands, etc.
Optional boards are also managed.
The different configurations of the equipment are created by adding optional boards onto the basic configuration.
1 or 2 AI13x power supply boards
according to the option chosen
Flap
D0052FRc
(3U)
132.5 mm
300 mm
or
316 mm
37.7 mm
37.7 mm
57.1 mm
RS232C connectorOptional optical
interface
FIGURE 1 – DIP RACK
The UT 148, I/O boards type SRxxx and FI002, 220 mm long and 6U wide, are plugged and locked horizontally on the left-hand part of the rack. (positions 1 to 3).
Power supply boards of the ALxxx type and optical interfaces IR182, IR185 or IR187 are plugged and locked vertically in the right-hand part of the rack (positions 4 to 6).
4.2.1 Basic configuration
It is made of:
− 1 UT148 or UT148D CPU board in position 1.
− 1 I/O board (1) in position 3.
− 1 power supply board (1) in position 5.
(1) See table 2 List of boards available.
DIP/EN IN/A23
Installation
Page 12/38 e-terragridcom DIP
The following figure shows examples of board positions in the rack:
IR18
5
AL
xxx
SRxxx board
UT 148 board
Version with 4 commands,
or 2 commands with combination logic
Optical interface
IR18
2
D0494FRb
AL
xx
x
SRxxx board
IR183 interface
UT 148 board
Version with 4 commands,
analog with combination logic
SRxxx board
SRxxx boardVersion with 8 commands,
or 4 commands with combination logicOptical interface
UT 148 board ALx
xx
AL
xxx
SRxxx board
SRxxx board
IR183 interfaceUT 148 board
FI002 board
Analog version with 4 commands,
or 2 commands with combination logic
with filtering interface and
redundant power supply
AL
xxx
FIGURE 2 – EXAMPLE OF PLUG-IN CARD POSITIONS
4.2.2 Adding additional boards to the rack
According to the configuration required, the following boards may be added:
• 1 second I/O board (SRxx) in position 2 in the 4-command version to extend the number of outputs or supply the combination logic on inputs.
• 1 communication interface board selected among:
- Digital interface (V11, G703-1 or G703-6) installed as child board on the CPU board. (see figure 3)
- Optical fiber interface board (IR182, IR185 or IR187) installed in position 4
- Analog interface IR183 installed as child board on the CPU board
Installation
DIP/EN IN/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 13/38
D0053 frb
ME50
IR xxx
Communication interface board
IR184
Optional IRIG-B interface board
FIGURE 3 – LOCATION OF CHILD BOARDS ON THE CPU BOARD
4.2.3 Optional boards
The following boards may be added as an option:
• 1 redundant power supply board in position 4.
• 1 IRIG_B interface (IR184) installed as child board on the CPU board.
• 1 LAN, ME50 interface as child board on the CPU board.
• 1 I/O board in position 2 in the 4-command version to extend the number of outputs or supply the combination logic on inputs.
• 1 filtering board FI002 in position 2. In this case, the equipment is limited to 4 or 2 with input logic.
• 1 impedance adaptation board FI003 fitted on the SR200 board.
• 1 board allowing acquisition of commands in dry loop FI005 fitted on the SR200 board.
DIP/EN IN/A23
Installation
Page 14/38 e-terragridcom DIP
5. POWER SUPPLY BOARDS
FOR POWERING ON, ACTIVATE THE POWER SUPPLY BOARD USING THE SWITCH ON THE FRONT FACE OF THE ALxxx (FOR THE LOCATION, REFER TO THE APPENDIX OF THE COMMISSIONING MANUAL).
5.1 Range of Vdc values of power supply boards
The DIP digital teleprotection equipment is supplied in direct current by 1 or 2 independent power supply boards.
The power supply boards are available in several versions covering a broad range of nominal input voltages.
The following table specifies the nominal voltage as well as the power supply range matching each power supply board:
BOARD Nominal voltage
Vdc
Min voltage
Vdc
Max voltage
Vdc
AL137 / AL142 48 – 60 36 72
AL139A / AL143 110 – 127 80 160
AL139B 220 – 250 160 300
AL140 24 18 30
TABLE 3 – RANGE OF VDC VALUES OF POWER SUPPLY BOARDS
The power supply modules are protected by 3.15 AT / 250 V fuses.
THE INPUT VOLTAGE OF THE POWER SUPPLY BOARD MUST COMPLY WITH THE RANGE OF VALUES MANAGED.
5.2 Constraints relative to the Vdc input values
The Vdc input signal applied must comply with the following rules:
Alternate frequency component above or equal to 100 Hz: 0.12 Un peak to peak.
Input voltage variation:
⇒ ± 20 V max in amplitude
⇒ 10 ms max for the duration
⇒ 100 V/ms max slope
5.3 Power supply and consumption
The DIP digital Teleprotection unit must be supplied by a power supply board compatible with the Vdc input values complying with the constraints described above. It may be referenced to the mechanical ground of the rack or not.
Actuate the switch present on the power supply board to power on the teleprotection.
In case of redundant power supply, two different sources may be used, with a different voltage level (e.g. 48 Vdc and 125 Vdc or any other combination).
Consumption of a unit fully equipped at nominal voltage is below 20W.
Idle consumption (without command) is 7 W.
Installation
DIP/EN IN/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 15/38
6. CONNECTION
To meet safety requirements as well as the EMC specifications announced, the protection conductor terminal (ground) at the back of the DIP unit must be connected to a grounding bar, through the shortest possible path.
A flat braid in tinned copper with a cross-section of 12mm x 1mm and a length of 30cm is supplied to this effect with the equipment. This braid must be connected to one of the two M5 studs located at the back of the DIP unit.
SAFETY OF THE EQUIPMENT DEPENDS ON ITS CONNECTION TO THE PROTECTION CONDUCTOR (GROUND).
THE LEVEL OF EMC PROTECTION IS RELATED DIRECTLY TO THE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE GROUNDING CONNECTION. ANY DIFFERENCE MAY HAVE A SIGNIFICANT IMPACT ON THE PROTECTION.
When the DIP commands electromechanical relays, these should be fitted with free wheel diodes at the coil terminals.
6.1 Rear connectors
There are two types of racks differentiated by their back panel:
• the first AM170, reserved to RTE (France) features a single power supply connector,
• the second AM170D with two power supply connectors.
Both types of racks allow to install redundant power supply boards.
The connectors and external connecting points of the DIP teleprotection equipment are located on the rear panel of the equipment.
Optical fibre
access
D0058FRa
FIGURE 4 - AM170 CONNECTORS AT THE BACK
AUX
P16
P14
P15
P11
P10
P12
P13P19
P20
P18
Optical fibre
access
Tx
Rx
- BAT
+BAT
1
1
11
1
1
- BAT
+BAT
MAIN
D0492Frc
FIGURE 5 - AM170DCONNECTORS AT THE BACK
DIP/EN IN/A23
Installation
Page 16/38 e-terragridcom DIP
Certain connectors are integral with the motherboard and are detailed as follows:
• Terminal block P10 reserved to acquisition inputs 1 to 4.
• Terminal block P11 reserved to restitution contacts 1 to 4.
• Terminal block P12 reserved to acquisition inputs 5 to 8, or 1 to 4 when the FI002 optional board is installed.
• Terminal block P13 reserved to restitution contacts 5 to 8.
• Terminal block P14 for transmission copy auxiliary outputs and command restitutions 1 to 4.
• Terminal block P15 for transmission copy auxiliary outputs and command restitutions 5 to 8.
• Terminal block P16 for distribution of major and minor alarm loops.
• Terminal block P17 for power supply in the case of the AM170.
• Terminal block for main P17 MAIN & auxiliary P21 AUX power supply in the case of the AM170.
• Female connector 15 pins P18 for access to the communication line
• Female connector 9 pins P19 for the RS 232C link with the maintenance / operation interface PC or remote access.
• BNC P20 connector to connect an external clock by IRIG-B signal.
The following connectors are part of the optical interface and are accessible by the back (hole in the rack)
• FC/PC connectors on the IR182 board.
• ST connectors on the IR185 board (IEEE C37-94), and
• LC or double LC connectors on the IR187 board (SFP module).
FIGURE 5 SHOWS THE POSITION OF THE TX AND RX OPTICAL CONNECTORS FOR THE IR182 AND IR185 BOARDS ON THE AM170D RACK.
THE TX AND RX ARE REVERSED ON THE SFP MODULES OF THE IR187 BOARD
6.2 I /O wiring of terminal blocks
Commands transmitted and received through the protection relays are wired to the P10, P11, P12 and P13 terminals blocks.
All input and output connections of these terminal blocks are isolated.
6.2.1 Description of connection to the terminal blocks
The terminal blocks are fitted with a locating device to prevent any misconnection.
The I/O wires, with a cross-section of 0.08 to 2.5 mm², are connected to these terminal blocks through 10 self-locking connecting devices.
Installation
DIP/EN IN/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 17/38
D0055XXa
12
34
56
78
910
FIGURE 6 – 10 PIN WAGO CONNECTOR
The wiring of these terminal blocks must be performed as follows:
⇒ Strip each wire to a length of 9 mm,
⇒ Using the tool supplied (lever)) (see Figure 7 – Plug-in terminal block tool), press on 1,
⇒ Insert the wire in the dedicated housing,
⇒ Release the lever.
This type of terminal block offers the benefit of providing constant pressure to hold the cables while avoiding any risk of damage upon installation (over tightening)
Lever
D0054FRa
FIGURE 7 – PLUG-IN TERMINAL BLOCK TOOL
6.2.2 I/O pin-out of terminal blocks
The following table indicates the I/O pin-out on the P10, P11, P12 and P13 terminal blocks.
In this table, the following symbols are used to mark the pins:
IN A command is activated by applying voltage to these terminals. + designates the point to be connected to the positive terminal of the application – designates the point to be connected to the negative terminal of the application
OUT T and C respectively designate the MAKE and COMMON points of the available contacts.
DIP/EN IN/A23
Installation
Page 18/38 e-terragridcom DIP
ACCESS POINT
P10 TERMINAL BLOCK
P11 TERMINAL BLOCK
P12 TERMINAL BLOCK
P13 TERMINAL BLOCK
1 O ⇒ External loop External loop External loop External loop
2 O ⇒ Terminal present Terminal present Terminal present Terminal present
3 O ⇒ – IN1
C OUT1
– IN5
C OUT5
4 O ⇒ + T + T
5 O ⇒ – IN2
C OUT2
– IN6
C OUT6
6 O ⇒ + T + T
7 O ⇒ – IN3
C OUT3
– IN7
C OUT7
8 O ⇒ + T + T
9 O ⇒ – IN4 C OUT4 – IN8 C OUT8
10 O ⇒ + T + T
TABLE 4 – LOCATION OF THE CIRCUITS ON THE P10, P11, P12 AND P13 TERMINAL BLOCKS
The pins 1 and 2 of the P10, P11, P12 and P13 connectors (see figure 6 – 10 pin wago connector) must be connected together. This bridging allows checking the presence of the terminal block. If removed, the connection is no longer detected, and an alarm generated.
RECOMMENDATION
ALL EXTERNAL RELAYS CONNECTED TO THE OUTPUT CONTACTS OF THE TELEPROTECTION MUST BE FITTED WITH A FREE- WHEELING DIODE.
6.2.3 Allocation of logical input commands
Depending on the DIP hardware configuration, a combinatorial logic operator can be applied to inputs and then allocated to commands sent to another DIP.
Input logic allows a logical operator to be affected to board input and to be allocated to a command.
Permitted combinations are:
OR: OR logic between 2 inputs
AND: AND logic between 2 inputs
LOG: logical function (digital mode) as follows
This feature is accessible when the number of inputs available exceeds the number of commands, as follows:
⇒ Version with 2 commands with one I/O board
⇒ Version with 4 commands with two I/O boards
Also, in these variants, the command output is activated on two independent relays.
The allocation of input and output commands is given by table 5 below) using the human machine interface (see the HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE chapter § Configuring I/O parameters).
Installation
DIP/EN IN/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 19/38
TERMINAL
BLOCK COMMAND ALLOCATION VERSION 2 COMMANDS 1
I/O BOARD VERSION 4 COMMANDS 1
I/O BOARD VERSION 4 COMMANDS 2
I/O BOARDS VERSION 8 COMMANDS
(1)
2 I/O BOARDS DIGITAL
ONLY
P10
Acquisition COMMAND 1
IN1 IN1
IN1 IN1
IN2 IN2
IN1 or IN2 IN1 or IN2
IN1 and IN2 IN1 and IN2
LOG (IN1, IN2) (2) LOG (IN1, IN2) (2)
Acquisition COMMAND 2
IN3 IN2
IN3 IN2
IN4 IN4
IN3 or IN4 IN3 or IN4
IN3 and IN4 IN3 and IN4
LOG (IN3, IN4) (2) LOG (IN3, IN4) (2)
Acquisition
COMMAND 3
IN3
IN5 IN3
IN6
IN5 or IN6
IN5 and IN6
LOG (IN5, IN6) (2)
Acquisition
COMMAND 4
IN4
IN7 IN4
IN8
IN7 or IN8
IN7 and IN8
LOG (IN7, IN8) (2)
P12
Acquisition
COMMAND 5
IN5
Acquisition
COMMAND 6
IN6
Acquisition
COMMAND 7
IN7
Acquisition
COMMAND 8
IN8
P11
Restitution COMMAND 1
OUT1 / OUT2 OUT1 OUT1 / OUT2 OUT1
Restitution COMMAND 2
OUT3 / OUT4 OUT2 OUT3 / OUT4 OUT2
Restitution COMMAND 3
OUT3 OUT5 / OUT6 OUT3
Restitution COMMAND 4
OUT4 OUT7 / OUT8 OUT4
P13
Restitution COMMAND 5
OUT5
Restitution COMMAND 6
OUT6
Restitution COMMAND 7
OUT7
Restitution COMMAND 8
OUT8
TABLE 5 – COMMAND ALLOCATION
(1) Standard I/O, without combination
(2) Only in digital mode
DIP/EN IN/A23
Installation
Page 20/38 e-terragridcom DIP
6.2.4 Examples of wiring
For wiring Examples in different contexts (2, 4, 8 commands, one or two I/O boards) see figure 17 – rj45 portFigure 18 - AM170 - CONNECtors at the backFigure 19 - AM170D – CONNECTOR AT THE BACK and figure 20 – AM170 kit.
6.3 Wiring alarms and copy contacts
The command output copies are wired on terminal blocks P14, P15 and the alarm contacts output on terminal block P16 at the rear side of the unit. The connector reference and Pin 1 position are labelled on the rear panel (see Appendix -figure 17 – rj45 port).
The copy outputs are distributed into 4 groups, all isolated from one another. Each group is composed of 4 normally-open contacts and one common contact.
The alarm outputs are distributed as 4 normally-closed contacts all isolated from each other, 2 contacts for major alarms and 2 contacts for minor alarms.
6.3.1 Description of connection to the terminal blocks
The conductors, with a cross-section of 0.08 to 2.5 mm², are connected to these terminal blocks through 11 self-locking connecting devices.
D0056XXa
12
34
56
78
910
11
FIGURE 8 – 11 PIN WAGO CONNECTOR
Installation
DIP/EN IN/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 21/38
6.3.2 Pin-out of the copy and alarm outputs on the terminal blocks
The following table specifies the PIN-OUT of the command copy outputs and alarm contact outputs on the P14, P5 and P16 terminal blocks.
For the alarm terminal block, refer also to the following chapter when using an AL142 or AL143 board.
The following abbreviations were used to name the pins:
COPY Ti for the i contact of copy output normally-open.
COPY C for the auxiliary output common contact
R, T, C designates the normally-closed, normally-open and common contacts available, respectively.
PIN TERMINAL BLOCK P14 TERMINAL BLOCK P15 TERMINAL BLOCK P16
1 T COPY T1 T COPY T9 C
Minor alarm output 1
2 T COPY T2 T COPY T10 R
3 T COPY T3 T COPY T11 not used
4 T COPY T4 T COPY T12 C
Minor alarm output 2
5* C COPY C 1 to 4 C COPY C 9 to 12 R
6 not used not used not used
7 T COPY T5 T COPY T13 C
Major alarm output 1
8 T COPY T6 T COPY T14 R
9 T COPY T7 T COPY T15 not used
10 T COPY T8 T COPY T16 C
Major alarm output 2
11** C COPY C 5 to 8 C COPY C 13 to 16 R
TABLE 6 – LOCATION OF THE CIRCUITS OF TERMINAL BLOCKS P14, P15 AND P16
* Pin 5 is common to contacts 1 to 4 of terminal blocks 14 & 15.
** Pin 11 is common to contacts 7 to 10 of terminal blocks 14 & 15.
DIP/EN IN/A23
Installation
Page 22/38 e-terragridcom DIP
6.3.3 Particular case of the AL142 and AL143 boards.
When these optional boards are used, the alarm contacts are normally open. The output points on P16 are identical but the allocation is changed.
PIN TERMINAL BLOCK P16
1 C Minor alarm output 1
2 T
3 not used
4 C Minor alarm output 2
5 T
6 not used
7 C Major alarm output 1
8 T
9 not used
10 C Major alarm output 2
11 T
TABLE 7 – PINOUT OF ALARM TERMINAL BLOCKS P16
6.3.4 Allocation of copy outputs
Copy output relays are used to transmit information on the current status of transmission and reception, as follows:
Tx State for command number n: the contact(s) is(are) closed while the command n is being transmitted, open when in guard state or while other commands are transmitted.
Rx state for command number n: the contact(s) is(are) closed while the command n is being received, open when in guard state or while other commands are being received.
Installation
DIP/EN IN/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 23/38
The allocation of the copy output relays depends on the configuration (see table below).
COMMAND ALLOCATION 2 COMMANDS VERSION
1 I/O BOARD
4 COMMANDS VERSION
1 I/O BOARD
4 COMMANDS VERSION
2 I/O BOARDS
VERSION 8 COMMANDS)
2 I/O BOARDS (DIGITAL
ONLY)
COMMAND 1 Acquisition COPY
P14
P14
COPYT1
P14
COPYT1
COPYT2
COMMAND 1 Acquisition
COPY
P14
P14
COPYT5
COMMAND 2
Acquisition COP
Y
COPYT1
COPYT5 COPYT1 COPYT1 COPYT5 COPYT1
COPYT5 P14
P14
COMMAND 2 Acquisition COPY
COPYT6 COPYT2 COPYT2
P15
COPYT6 COPYT2
COMMAND 3 Acquisition COPY
COPYT3 COPYT9
COPYT13 COPYT3
COMMAND 4 Acquisition COPY
COPYT4
COPYT10
COMMAND 4 Acquisition
COPY
COMMAND 5
Acquisition COP
Y
COMMAND 6
Acquisition COP
Y
COPYT14 COPYT4 COPYT14 COPYT4
COMMAND 5 Acquisition COPY
P15
COPYT9
COMMAND 6 Acquisition COPY
COPYT10
COMMAND 7 Acquisition COPY
COPYT3
COPYT11
COMMAND 8 Acquisition COPY
COPYT12
COMMAND 1 Output COPY
P14 COPYT3
COPYT7 P14 COPYT5 P14
TABLE 8 – ALLOCATION OF COPY OUTPUT
6.3.5 Recommendation
All relays connected to the output contacts must be fitted with a free-wheeling diode.
DIP/EN IN/A23
Installation
Page 24/38 e-terragridcom DIP
6.4 Power supply wiring
According to the type of rack, there are one or 2 power supply terminal blocks. In the case of a rack with 2 power supply terminal blocks, these are marked ‘main’ for the main power supply and ‘aux’ for the auxiliary power supply respectively, on the rear face (see Appendix figure 20 – AM170 kit).
The functional ground is mostly useful to protect the user during the laboratory test. In normal use, the grounding braid supplied with the equipment must be connected to one of the two M5 studs located at the back of the DIP unit.
According to the installations, it may be better to connect the +BAT or -BAT to this functional ground, or leave these polarities floating.
6.4.1 Description of connection to the terminal blocks
The cables, with a cross-section of 0.08 to 2.5 mm², are connected to the terminal block through a WAGO self-locking connector.
6.4.2 Pin-out of the power supply connector with the AM170 rack
PIN MARKING POLARITY
1 -BAT Power supply negative polarity
2 -BAT
3 +BAT Power supply positive polarity
4 +BAT
5 Non connected
6
Functional ground
7
TABLE 9 – PINOUT OF THE P17 TERMINAL BLOCK
6.4.3 Pin-out of the power supply connector with the AM170D rack
Two power supply connectors are available on the rear panel (see figure 5).
P21 main connector, P17 secondary connector in case of redundant power supply.
These two connectors offer the same pinout:
PIN MARKING POLARITY
1 -BAT Power supply negative polarity
2 +BAT Power supply positive polarity
3 Non connected
4
Functional ground
TABLE 10 – PINOUT OF THE MAIN & AUXILIARY TERMINAL BLOCK
These two connectors are independent, and can hence be supplied by two different sources.
Note: When a single source is available but two power supply boards are to be installed, the two connectors must be linked, as shown in the following figure.
Installation
DIP/EN IN/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 25/38
AUX
- BAT
+BAT
- BAT
+BAT
MAIN
D0065 FRa
P17 P21
Battery
FIGURE 9 - AM170D WIRING OF TWO POWER SUPPLIES FOR A SINGLE SOURCE
6.5 Access port for line connection support
This chapter concerns all versions of the DIP equipment, except the variant using optical fiber. In this case, refer to chapter 6.6 on connections by optical fiber.
6.5.1 Description of the connectors
The line connection interface (connector P18) is on the mother board of the equipment (See Appendix - Figure 18 - AM170 - CONNECtors at the back
The connection must be implemented using the male SUB-D 15 pin connector supplied with the equipment, It is locked by screws (supplied). A cover holding the cable for a straight outlet is also part of standard equipment.
Non-allocated terminals must not be connected, in compliance with isolation restrictions.
The definition of the multi-strand conductor to be used is the following:
To be welded: AWG 20 to 22 (0.324 to 0.519 mm²).
Acceptable cable diameter: 8.2 mm maximum.
Cable-clamp reducers for maximum diameters of 4.1mm, 5.5mm and 6.8mm are supplied.
Cable shielding must be connected to the metallic cover.
For digital teleprotection links, immunity to electromagnetic disturbance is linked directly to proper connection of the cable shield to the functional ground on both sides of the link.
DIP/EN IN/A23
Installation
Page 26/38 e-terragridcom DIP
6.5.2 Pin-out of the V11 / X24 - IR179 interface
V11/X24 interface
(ISO 1903)
S’: clock transmitter circuit
for non-standard use
D0607FRa
FIGURE 10 – PINOUT OF THE V11/X24 INTERFACE
Pin Name direction Signal designation Pin Name Signal designation
1 nc
2 T(A) output Transmission (A) 9 T(B) Transmission (B)
3 nc 10
4 R(A) input Reception (A) 11 R(B) Reception (B)
5 nc 12
6 S(A) input Signal synchronization (A)
13 S(B) Signal synchronization (B)
7 S'(A) output DCE mode Synchronization (A)
14 S'(B) DCE mode synchronization (B)
8 nc 15
TABLE 11 – PINOUT OF THE V11/X24 INTERFACE
The S signal is a non standard feature. In fact, the DIP must be considered as being a DTE. The S synchronization clock signal is supplied in order to provide a direct link between two DIP units to perform tests. The use of the S’ signal is controlled by the HMI.
Installation
DIP/EN IN/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 27/38
6.5.3 Pinout of the G703-1 (64 kbps) - IR180 codirectional interface
Codirectional interfaceG703.1
D0608 FRa
FIGURE 11 – PINOUT OF THE G703.1 INTERFACE
Pin Name direction Signal designation Pin Name
Signal designation
1 nc
2 T(A) output Transmission (A) 9 T(B) Transmission (B)
3 nc 10
4 R(A) input Reception (A) 11 R(B) Reception (B)
5 nc 12
6 nc 13
7 nc 14
8 nc 15
TABLE 12 – CONNECTION OF THE G703-1 CODIRECTIONAL INTERFACE
DIP/EN IN/A23
Installation
Page 28/38 e-terragridcom DIP
6.5.4 Pinout of the G703-6 (2 Mbps) - IR173 interface
The IR173, G703-6, 120 ohm interface board has been derived into 2 models:
• IR173_120 (Index B), 2 Mbps / 120 ohms interface
• IR173_75 (Index A), 2 Mbps / 75 ohms interface
D0609Frb
FIGURE 12 – PINOUT OF THE G703.6 2 MBIT/S IR173 INTERFACE
Pin Name direction Signal designation Pin Name
Signal designation
1 nc
2 nc 9
3 Tx + output Transmission (A) 10 Tx - Transmission (B)
4 nc 11
5 Rx + input Reception (A) 12 Rx - Reception (B)
6 nc 13
7 nc 14
8 nc 15
TABLE 13 – CONNECTION OF THE G703-6 IR 173 INTERFACE
FIGURE 13 – PINOUT OF THE IR173_120 OR IR173_75 INTERFACE
Installation
DIP/EN IN/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 29/38
Pin Name direction Signal designation Pin Name
Signal designation
1 nc
2 Tx +
nc
output Transmission (A)
9
10 Tx - Transmission (B)
3
4 Rx +
nc
input Reception (A)
11
12 Rx - Reception (B)
5
6 nc 13
7 nc 14
8 nc 15
TABLE 14 – CONNECTION OF THE IR173_120 OR IR173_75 INTERFACE
6.5.5 Voice frequency (analog mode) - IR183 interface
Analog interface
D0610FRa
FIGURE 14 – PINOUT OF THE ANALOG INTERFACE
Pin Name directionPin Name Designation and description of the circuits
1
2 Tx(A) output 9 Tx(B) Voice frequency output signal (transmission)
3 TBB(A) output 10 TBB(B) Tx Blocking / Boost command circuit (solid-state relay)
4 Rx(A) input 11 Rx(B) Voice frequency signal in (receive)
5 RB(A) output 12 RB(B) Rx Blocking command circuit (solid-state relay)
6 EA(+) input 13 EA(-) External Alarm input (opto-isolated)
7 AL(A) output 14 AL(B) Live output circuit (solid-state relay)
8 nc 15
TABLE 15 – CONNECTION OF THE VOICE FREQUENCY INTERFACE
DIP/EN IN/A23
Installation
Page 30/38 e-terragridcom DIP
6.6 Optical fiber access port
In case of configuration by optical fiber, the optical interface board, installed in the reserved location of the rack, must be blocked with its two fastening screws.
Three versions of optical boards are managed: IR182, IR185 and IR187.
The connectors of the optical interface, accessible at the back (see figure 20 – AM170 kit), are part of the optical board:
• 2 FC / PC connectors for IR182.
• ST connectors for IR185.
• LC connector for IR187.
The types of fibers recommended are:
• Single mode fiber 9/125 µm for 1310 and 1550 nm applications
• Multimode fiber 62.5/125 µm for 850 nm applications.
EMC protection
When not used, the rack connector must be covered with an EMC protection plate.
REMOVING THE OPTICAL BOARD
DO NOT REMOVE THE OPTICAL BOARDS WITHOUT HAVING REMOVED THE TWO SCREWS FASTENING THE REAR PANEL.
6.7 Standard HMI access port (PC connection)
The DIP is equipped with two RS 232 serial ports, one located on the front panel, the second on the back of the unit (see Appendix-Figure 16 – Description of the HMI CONNECtor at the back).
The download / display port fitted on the front panel is an ultra low voltage circuit (ULV) ensuring basic isolation against electric shock. When powering on the relay, the terminals of this port must not be touched to prevent any risk of electric shock in case of fault. This port is designed to be used for maintenance, i.e. monitoring and downloading software, it must not be connected permanently.
The connectors are female SUB-D 9-pin connectors.
These ports allow to connect the PC to the unit by means of an RS 232C cable. When two cables are connected, the one on the front face has the priority.
FIGURE 15 – DESCRIPTION OF THE HMI CONNECTOR ON THE FRONT
When using the RS 232C main connector at the back, an adapter of the DTE-DCE type must be connected. This port supports the RTS / CTS hardware protocol and the remote connection.
Installation
DIP/EN IN/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 31/38
D0619FRa
FIGURE 16 – DESCRIPTION OF THE HMI CONNECTOR AT THE BACK
CAP
When not used, fit the cap supplied onto the connectors.
6.8 Optional RJ45 HMI access port
If the ME50 option is chosen, the RS232 front serial port is replaced by a standard RJ45 network port.
1 8
D0620FRa
FIGURE 17 – RJ45 PORT
6.9 IRIG-B interface port
If an optional IRIG_B interface board is installed, this port is used to connect with an external clock supporting an IRIG-B synchronization interface (IRIG-B mode with 1 kHz analog modulation).
The connector, located on the unit’s rear, is a standard female BNC connector (see P20 in Appendix - Figure 19 - AM170D – CONNECTOR AT THE BACK). It is accessible with a male connector of a standard BNC coaxial cable.
Cap
When not used, the connector must be covered with the BNC cap supplied with the equipment.
DIP/EN IN/A23
Installation
Page 32/38 e-terragridcom DIP
6.10 FI002 wiring
An FI002 board may be installed to guarantee advanced protection against capacitive discharge at the input.
The command input must be connected to the P13 connector. The P10 and P12 connectors must be interconnected (see the figure au-dessoushere below).
P10
P12
P13
P11
1 10
Cmd 1
Cmd 2
Cmd 3
Cmd 4
+ + + +
Command Outputs access
FI002 filter wiring
Command inputs
D0489ENa
FIGURE 26 – WIRING OF THE COMMAND AND FILTER INPUTS
Installation
DIP/EN IN/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 33/38
7. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
The equipment’s installation includes the following phases:
1. Install casing (rack, cabinet, or box).
2. Insert cables for subsystems and operation (power supply, earthing, transmission medium, and protection equipment).
3. Mount rack in casing. Fasten in place using the screws on the front panel.
4. Connect rack to earth circuit.
5. Before installing the cards in the racks, make sure apparatus is switched off (plugs removed or switch open).
6. Install cards in rack.
NOTE: The optical interface card must be mounted and tied to the rack before mounting the rack in the frame.
DIP/EN IN/A23
Installation
Page 34/38 e-terragridcom DIP
8. APPENDIX
8.1 AM170 - Location of the terminal blocks
Optical fibre
access
D 0058 FRa
FIGURE 18 - AM170 - CONNECTORS AT THE BACK
Command input and output terminal blocks
P10 Acquisition of commands 1 to 4
Connecting terminal blocks to the protection and command management systems (§ 6.2 and § 6.3)
P11 Restitution of commands 1 to 4
P12 Acquisition of commands 5 to 8
P13 Restitution of commands 5 to 8
P14 Command copy contacts 1 to 4
P15 Command copy contacts 5 to 8
TABLE 16 – COMMAND MANAGEMENT CONNECTORS
Auxiliary terminal blocks
P16 Terminal blocks for connection to alarm management systems (§ 6.3)
P17 Power supply connection terminal blocks (§ 6.4)
P18 Line connection port (§ 6.5)
P19 Remote access (§ 6.7)
P20 External time synchronization connection port (§ 6.8)
TABLE 17 – OTHER CONNECTORS ON REAR FACE
Installation
DIP/EN IN/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 35/38
8.2 AM170D - Location of the terminal blocks – Double power supply version
AUX
P16
P14
P15
P11
P10
P12
P13P19
P20
P18
Optical fibre
access
Tx
Rx
- BAT
+ BAT
1
1
1 1
1
1
- BAT
+ BAT
MAIN
D0492 Frc
FIGURE 19 - AM170D – CONNECTOR AT THE BACK
The figure above shows the position of the Tx and Rx optical connectors for the IR182 and IR185 boards.
These outputs are reversed on SFP modules of the IR187 board.
Command input and output terminal blocks
P10 Acquisition of commands 1 to 4
Connecting terminal blocks to the protection and command management systems (§ 6.2 and § 6.3)
P11 Restitution of commands 1 to 4
P12 Acquisition of commands 5 to 8
P13 Restitution of commands 5 to 8
P14 Auxiliary outputs of commands 1 to 4
P15 Auxiliary outputs of commands 5 to 8
TABLE 18 – COMMAND MANAGEMENT CONNECTORS
Auxiliary terminal blocks
P16 Terminal blocks for connection to alarm management systems (§ 6.3)
MAIN Main power supply connection terminal blocks (§ 6.4)
AUX Secondary power supply connection terminal blocks
P18 Line connection ports (§ 6.5)
P19 Remote access (§ 6.7)
P20 External time synchronization connection port (§ 6.8)
TABLE 19 – OTHER CONNECTORS ON REAR FACE
DIP/EN IN/A23
Installation
Page 36/38 e-terragridcom DIP
8.3 Connector kits delivered with the equipment
FIGURE 20 – AM170 KIT
FIGURE 21 – AM170D KIT
The SUB-D 15 pin connector can change according to the supplier.
Installation
DIP/EN IN/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 37/38
8.4 Connection of the 2-command version
Copy Command acquisition 1
Copy Command acquisition 2
Copy Command restitution 1
Copy Command restitution 2Command restitution 1 Command restitution 2
Command acquisition 1 Command acquisition 2
Group 1 Group 2
Common copy group 1
Common copy group 2
S S S S
EN EN EN EN
D 0059 FRa
FIGURE 22 – CONNECTIONS OF THE TWO-COMMAND VERSION
8.5 Connections of the 4-command version with 1 I/O board
D0060FRa
P10
E1 E2 E3 E4
- + - - -+ + +
P11P14
S1 S2 S3 S4
Copie Acquisition Ordre 1
Copie Acquisition Ordre 2
Copie Acquisition Ordre 3
Copie Acquisition Ordre 4
Copie Restitution Ordre 1
Copie Restitution Ordre 2
Copie Restitution Ordre 3
Copie Restitution Ordre 4
Acquisition
Ordre 1
Acquisition
Ordre 3
Acquisition
Ordre 4
Acquisition
Ordre 2
Restitution
Ordre 1
Restitution
Ordre 3
Restitution
Ordre 4
Restitution
Ordre 2
Commun Copies
Acquisition d'ordres
Commun Copies
Restitution d'ordres
FIGURE 23 – CONNECTIONS OF THE 4-COMMAND VERSION WITH 1 I/O BOARD
DIP/EN IN/A23
Installation
Page 38/38 e-terragridcom DIP
8.6 Connections of the 4-command version with 2 I/O boards
Copy Command acquisition 1
Copy Command acquisition 2
Copy Command restitution 1
Copy Command restitution 4
Copy Command restitution 3
Copy Command acquisition 4
Copy Command acquisition 3
Copy Command restitution 2
Group 1
Group 3
Group 2
Group 4
Common group 1Common group 2Common group 3Common group 4
Command restitution 1
S1 S2 S3 S4
S5 S6 S7 S8
EN1 EN2 EN3 EN4
EN5 EN6 EN7 EN8
Command restitution 2
Command acquisition 1 Command acquisition 2
Command acquisition 3 Command acquisition 4
Command restitution 3 Command restitution 4
D 0061 FRa
FIGURE 24 – CONNECTIONS OF THE 4-COMMAND VERSION WITH 2 I/O BOARDS
8.7 Connection of the 8-command version
Copy Command acquisition 1
Command
acquisition 1
Command
acquisition 2
Command
acquisition 3
Command
acquisition 4
Command
acquisition 5
Command
acquisition 6
Command
acquisition 7
Command
acquisition 8
Copy Command acquisition 2Copy Command acquisition 3Copy Command acquisition 4
Copy Command acquisition 8Copy Command acquisition 7Copy Command acquisition 6Copy Command acquisition 5
Copy Command restitution 1Copy Command restitution 2Copy Command restitution 3Copy Command restitution 4
Copy Command restitution 8Copy Command restitution 7Copy Command restitution 6Copy Command restitution 5
Common group 1Common group 2Common group 4Common group 3
Group 1 Group 2
Group 3 Group 4
Command
restitution 1
Command
restitution 2
Command
restitution 3
Command
restitution 4
Command
restitution 5
Command
restitution 6
Command
restitution 7
Command
restitution 8
S1 S2 S3 S4
S5 S6 S7 S8
EN1 EN2 EN3 EN4
EN5 EN6 EN7 EN8
D0062 FRa
FIGURE 25 – CONNECTIONS OF THE 8-COMMAND VERSION
Commissioning
DIP/EN CM/B23 e-terragridcom DIP
COMMISSIONING
Commissioning
DIP/EN CM/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 1/44
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 7
2. FOREWORD 8
2.1 Step by step procedure 8
2.1.1 Reminder on the final status of the installation procedure 8
3. PRIOR CONDITIONS CHECK 9
4. HARDWARE CONFIGURATION 10
4.1 Initial status 10
4.2 Configuration of the I/O board jumpers 10
4.2.1 I/O board type SR11x 10
4.2.2 I/O board type SR200 10
4.2.3 Option FI005 on SR200 board 12
4.3 Configuration of the IR187 optical communication interface 12
4.3.1 IR182 mode 13
4.3.2 C37.94 Mode 13
4.4 Configuration of the IR185 optical communication interface 14
4.5 Final status 14
5. POWER ON 15
5.1 Initial status of the power on 15
5.2 Prior conditions 15
5.3 Power on procedure 15
5.4 Final status of the power on 15
6. SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION 16
6.1 Introduction 16
6.2 Prior conditions 16
6.3 Initial status 16
6.4 Configuration of the DIP digital version 16
6.4.1 Creating a user password 16
6.4.2 Creating a software password 17
6.4.3 Configuring General Parameters 17
6.4.4 Configuring the communication interface 17
6.4.5 Configuring the redundancy interface 17
6.4.6 Configuring Input/output Parameters 19
6.4.7 Configuring application parameters 20
6.4.8 Configuring alarm parameters 21
6.4.9 Entering comments 22
6.4.10 Saving the configuration 22
DIP/EN CM/B23
Commissioning
Page 2/44 e-terragridcom DIP
6.5 Configuring DIP Single tone analog version 23
6.5.1 Creating a user password 23
6.5.2 Configuring General Parameters 23
6.5.3 Configuring Sender Parameters 24
6.5.4 Configuring Receiver Parameters 25
6.5.5 Configuring I/O parameters 26
6.5.6 Alarms parameters – Single tone 26
6.5.7 Saving the configuration 27
6.6 Configuring DIP Analogue Dual Tone 27
6.6.1 Creating a password 27
6.6.2 Configuring general parameters - Dual tone analog version 27
6.6.3 Configuring sender parameters - Dual tone version 28
6.6.4 Configuring receiver parameters - Dual tone version 29
6.6.5 Configuring I/O parameters - Dual tone version 30
6.6.6 Configuring alarms parameters - Dual tone version 31
6.6.7 Saving the configuration 31
6.7 Final status of the configuration step 31
7. TESTS AND FAULT ISOLATION 32
7.1 Initial status 32
7.2 Checking procedure 32
7.3 Final status 33
8. OPERATING CHECKS 34
8.1 Initial status 34
8.2 Procedure 34
8.3 Self-checks 35
8.3.1 Alarms forcing 35
8.3.2 Maintenance forcing commands 35
8.3.3 Forcing PLC commands 35
8.4 Online checks 35
8.5 Final status 35
9. APPENDIX A 36
9.1 Implantation diagram of the UT148 / UT148D board 36
9.2 Implantation diagram of the SR11x board and jumper settings 37
9.3 Implantation diagram of the SR200 board and jumper settings 38
9.4 Implantation diagram of the AL137 and AL140 board 40
9.5 Implantation diagram of the AL139 board 40
9.6 Implantation diagram of the IR183 board 41
9.7 Implantation diagram of the FI002 board and jumper settings 42
9.8 Implantation diagram of the IR185 board and jumper settings 43
9.9 Implantation diagram of the IR187 board and jumper settings 44
Commissioning
DIP/EN CM/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 3/44
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1 – COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE 8
FIGURE 2 – JUMPERS OF THE SR11X BOARDS 10
FIGURE 3 – JUMPERS OF THE SR200 11
FIGURE 4 – IR187 MODE IR182 13
FIGURE 5 – IR187 MODE C37.94 13
FIGURE 6 – POWER ON PROCEDURE 15
FIGURE 7 – FINAL CHECKS AND CONFIGURATION 34
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE 1 – CONFIGURATION OF JUMPERS ON SR11X BOARDS 10
TABLE 2 – ACQUISITION VOLTAGE SELECTION SR11X 10
TABLE 3 – CONFIGURATION OF JUMPERS ON SR200 BOARDS 11
TABLE 4 – ACQUISITION VOLTAGE SELECTION SR200 11
TABLE 5 –PARTICULAR CASE SR200 WITH FI005 12
TABLE 6 – SETTINGS OF THE ROTATING SWITCH 14
TABLE 7 – GENERAL PARAMETERS SHEET – DIGITAL VERSION 17
TABLE 8 – COMMUNICATION INTERFACE PARAMETERS SHEET 17
TABLE 9 – REDUNDANCY INTERFACE PARAMETERS SHEET 18
TABLE 10 – I/O PARAMETERS SHEET – DIGITAL VERSION 19
TABLE 11 – APPLICATION PARAMETERS SHEET – DIGITAL VERSION 21
TABLE 12 – ALARMS PARAMETERS SHEET – DIGITAL VERSION 22
TABLE 13 – COMMENTS PARAMETERS SHEET – DIGITAL VERSION 22
TABLE 14 – GENERAL PARAMETERS SHEET – SINGLE TONE ANALOG VERSION 23
TABLE 15 – SENDER PARAMETERS SHEET – SINGLE TONE ANALOG VERSION 24
TABLE 16 – RECEIVER PARAMETERS SHEET – SINGLE TONE ANALOG VERSION 25
TABLE 17 – I/O PARAMETERS SHEET – SINGLE TONE ANALOG VERSION 26
TABLE 18 – ALARMS PARAMETERS SHEET – SINGLE TONE ANALOG VERSION 27
TABLE 19 – GENERAL PARAMETERS – DUAL TONE 28
TABLE 20 – SENDER PARAMETERS – DUAL TONE 29
TABLE 21 – RECEIVER PARAMETERS – DUAL TONE ANALOG 30
DIP/EN CM/B23
Commissioning
Page 4/44 e-terragridcom DIP
TABLE 22 – I/O PARAMETERS SHEET – DUAL TONE 30
TABLE 23 – ALARMS PARAMETERS – DUAL TONE 31
Commissioning
DIP/EN CM/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 5/44
MODIFICATIONS PAGE
VERSION DATE COMMENTS
A 28/12/2000 Original issue
B 23/04/2001 Added the optical interface
C 23/08/2004 ALSTOM logo and addition of analog version
D 14/11/2007 New features, task oriented writing
E 29/02/2008 Minor correction
A22 20/04/2009 Version 2.2
A23 13/01/2011 Minor corrections, added I/O SR200 interface, IR187 optical interface
B23 28/03/2011 Former State on digital version added
DIP/EN CM/B23
Commissioning
Page 6/44 e-terragridcom DIP
BLANK PAGE
Commissioning
DIP/EN CM/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 7/44
1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY SECTION DIP/EN SS/A23 OR LATER ISSUE, THE TECHNICAL DATA SECTION AND THE RATING ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.
THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED RS232C(1)
SERIAL PORT IS AN EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. WHEN THE TELEPROTECTION IS ENERGIZED, THE TERMINALS OF THIS PORT SHOULD NOT BE TOUCHED SINCE IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF A SINGLE FAULT CONDITION THERE WOULD BE A VERY LOW PROBABILITY OF AN ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS DESIGNED TO BE USED FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, THAT IS MONITORING AND SOFTWARE DOWNLOADS; IT IS NOT INTENDED TO BE PERMANENTLY CONNECTED.
THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED RJ45(1)
SERIAL PORT IS AN EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS INTENDED TO BE USED FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, I.E. MONITORING AND DOWNLOADING THE SOFTWARE.
(1) As per the option chosen
DIP/EN CM/B23
Commissioning
Page 8/44 e-terragridcom DIP
2. FOREWORD
Commissioning the DIP applies the step by step procedure described in the following paragraphs.
Applying this procedure prevents any risk of malfunction or damage of the equipment.
This procedure also guarantees an optimum configuration of the link and better levels of performance in a minimum time, in compliance with safety rules.
The commissioning procedures and checks require from the user an acquaintance with the use of the HMI software (refer to the chapter Human-Machine Interface for more information).
Only a PC supporting the HMI software can be used for commissioning, no other measurement device or multimeter is required.
2.1 Step by step procedure
2.1.1 Reminder on the final status of the installation procedure
The first step in the commissioning procedure is the final status of the installation procedure:
• The DIP unit is grounded with the grounding braid supplied with the equipment.
• The boards are installed.
• The power supply cables and those of the transmission medium are connected.
Steps in commissioning a DIP unit:
Prior conditions check
Hardware configuration
Power on
Software configuration
Tests and troubleshooting
Operating checks
End
Start
D0611FRa
FIGURE 1 – COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE
Commissioning
DIP/EN CM/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 9/44
3. PRIOR CONDITIONS CHECK
Before commissioning, the following points MUST be checked:
• Installation complete.
• The DIP unit is grounded (refer to § Connection in the Installation chapter).
• The value of the direct power supply on the level of the DIP input.
• Connection with the power supply terminal block (refer to § Wiring the supply in the Installation chapter).
• Power supply board compliant with the direct input voltage available (refer to § Ranges of Vdc values of the power supply boards in the Installation chapter).
• If applicable, polarity of the command inputs at connectors P10 and P12.
• Pins 1 and 2 on the terminal blocks P10, P11, P12 and P13 must be connected with a jumper (refer to § I/O wiring of the terminal blocks in the Installation chapter), otherwise an alarm is present.
• Pre-requisite: only a trained and authorized technician may perform the installation, programming, commissioning, maintenance, test and repair operations.
• Caution:
Signs: precautions and indications on hazardous voltages and power levels must be observed.
DIP/EN CM/B23
Commissioning
Page 10/44 e-terragridcom DIP
4. HARDWARE CONFIGURATION
4.1 Initial status
Prior conditions have been checked.
The positions of the links must not be modified, unless the input voltage has been isolated.
4.2 Configuration of the I/O board jumpers
This step requires an intervention on the boards. Safety reminder:
ESD protection: the modules of this equipment contain devices likely to be damaged by static discharge. Appropriate measures are to be applied before unpacking the modules or removing them from the equipment racks. Essential precautions avoiding damage due to static discharge during any intervention on the modules: grounding braids for technical staff and supply of antistatic workshops. The modules can be shipped only in their original packing or be installed in the equipment racks.
4.2.1 I/O board type SR11x
SR11x boards are fitted with the S2 S3 S4 S5 jumpers.
D0127XXa
123
S 2
123
S 3
123
S 4
123
S 5
FIGURE 2 – JUMPERS OF THE SR11X BOARDS
The jumpers on the SR11x I/O boards must be configured according to the value of the command acquisition voltage.
• The following table indicates the correspondence between command inputs and the location of the SR 11x board in the rack in an installation with two boards.
S2 S3 S4 S5
SR11x In high position
Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4
SR11x In medium position
Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8
TABLE 1 – CONFIGURATION OF JUMPERS ON SR11X BOARDS
• The following table indicates, per type of SR11x board, the value of direct voltage accepted at command input according to the position of each jumper.
Position SR114 SR114D SR115 SR116
1 - 2 220 V –250 Vdc 220 V –250 Vdc 48 V -60 Vdc 110 V -127 Vdc
2 - 3 48 V -127 Vdc 48 V -127 Vdc 24 Vdc 48 V -60 Vdc
TABLE 2 – ACQUISITION VOLTAGE SELECTION SR11X
4.2.2 I/O board type SR200
The SR200 board is fitted with several configurable jumpers.
Commissioning
DIP/EN CM/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 11/44
4.2.2.1 Acquisition of a command
The JP1, JP3, JP5 and JP7 jumpers must be configured according to the value of the command acquisition voltage.
FIGURE 3 – JUMPERS OF THE SR200
• The following table indicates the correspondence between command inputs and the location of the SR 200 I/O board in the rack in an installation with two boards.
JP1 JP3 JP5 JP7
SR200 In high position in the rack
Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4
SR200 In medium position in the rack
Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8
TABLE 3 – CONFIGURATION OF JUMPERS ON SR200 BOARDS
• The following table indicates the value of direct voltage accepted at command input according to the position of each jumper.
Position SR200 Minimum Maximum
1 - 2 24Vdc 18 Vdc 30 Vdc
3 - 4 48 V -60 Vdc 36 Vdc 75 Vdc
5 - 6 110-127Vdc 83 Vdc 158 Vdc
7 - 8 220-250 Vdc 165 Vdc 312 Vdc
TABLE 4 – ACQUISITION VOLTAGE SELECTION SR200
DIP/EN CM/B23
Commissioning
Page 12/44 e-terragridcom DIP
4.2.2.2 Output contacts
All output contacts both for commands and command copy are implemented by a static relay and a mechanical relay in parallel.
The JP9 to JP32 jumpers allow to commission the static relay or not, to the detriment of transfer time.
Position 1 – 2 Position 2 – 3 Command
JP9 – JP10 Command output
on mechanical relay and static relay in parallel
Command output on mechanical
relay only
1 or 5
JP11 – JP12 2 or 6
JP13 – JP14 3 or 7
JP15 – JP16 4 or 8
JP17 – JP18
Command copy output on
mechanical relay and static relay in
parallel
Command copy output on
mechanical relay only
The allocation of the copy outputs is detailed in the INSTALLATION
part
JP19 – JP20
JP21 – JP22
JP23 – JP24
JP25 – JP26
JP27 – JP28
JP29 – JP30
JP31 – JP32
4.2.3 Option FI005 on SR200 board
When the SR200 board is fitted with the FI005 module to send commands by dry loop instead of voltage, the JP1, JP3, JP5 and JP7 jumpers must be set to position 1-2.
Position SR200 Minimum Maximum
1 - 2 24Vdc 18 Vdc 30 Vdc
TABLE 5 –PARTICULAR CASE SR200 WITH FI005
4.3 Configuration of the IR187 optical communication interface
The IR187 board can be configured in two different modes:
• IR182 mode using the Manchester 2 protocol,
• IR185 mode using the protocol defined by the IEEE C37.94 recommendation.
Check that the SFP module is present and matches the application required.
Commissioning
DIP/EN CM/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 13/44
4.3.1 IR182 mode
This mode ensures compatibility with the IR182 single mode optical interface.
• Set JP1 to 1-2
• Set JP2 to 2-3
• Set the coding wheel to position 1
32
78
FIGURE 4 – IR187 MODE IR182
4.3.2 C37.94 Mode
This mode is recommended for intra-substation optical links.
• Set JP1 to 2-3
• Set JP2 to 1-2
• The coding wheel must be set to position 1 to 8, according to the flow chosen. If N is the value on the coding wheel, the actual rate is Nx64kbps. See table 6 which is also applicable here.
32
78
FIGURE 5 – IR187 MODE C37.94
DIP/EN CM/B23
Commissioning
Page 14/44 e-terragridcom DIP
4.4 Configuration of the IR185 optical communication interface
Safety reminder
Laser / LED: beware when using optical boards of class I Laser / LED products.
The IR185 optical communication interface has a rotating switch to be defined according to the frequency clocks of the DIP.
The following table allows selecting the position of the rotating switch.
Position of the rotating switch Actual rate DIP
0 Factory test
1 64 Kbps
2 128 Kbps
3 192 Kbps
4 256 Kbps
5 320 Kbps
6 384 Kbps
7 448 Kbps
8 512 Kbps
9 Not used
TABLE 6 – SETTINGS OF THE ROTATING SWITCH
4.5 Final status
The hardware configuration of the I/O boards is compatible with the CC value of the input signal command.
If applicable, the optical communication interface is configured and ready for use.
The DIP is ready to be powered on.
Commissioning
DIP/EN CM/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 15/44
5. POWER ON
5.1 Initial status of the power on
• Prior conditions have been checked.
• The hardware configuration is complete.
5.2 Prior conditions
This procedure requires knowing the location of the switch on the power supply boards and indication of the LED status.
• For more information on the location of the LEDs and the switch on the boards, refer to appendix A.
• For more information on the indication of the status of the LEDs, refer to § Maintenance in the Maintenance chapter.
5.3 Power on procedure
Powering on the DIP unit is performed as follows:
Start
Power on
(AL13x / AL14x boards)
Check the state of the LEDs:
Is the AL13x /
AL14x power supply LED green ?
Check the state of
the LEDs: Are the ‘state’
indicators on the UT148
board green ?
Repair
(See § Tests and
troubleshooting)
No
No
Yes
End
D0612FRa
Yes
FIGURE 6 – POWER ON PROCEDURE
When the DIP is powered on, check the status of the LEDs, which must be green.
• In the case of a LED corresponding to a fault, refer to § Tests and fault isolation in the Maintenance chapter.
5.4 Final status of the power on
At the end of this procedure, the DIP is powered on and ready to receive the configuration files.
DIP/EN CM/B23
Commissioning
Page 16/44 e-terragridcom DIP
6. SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION
6.1 Introduction
The software configurations of the digital DIP, single tone analog DIP and dual tone analog versions are described separately in the following paragraphs.
6.2 Prior conditions
The software configuration requires a PC running the HMI software, compatible with the firmware of the DIP. The operator must be acquainted with the use of the HMI software.
To create a new configuration, you must be connected with a DIP.
Upon commissioning, you must:
• Either create a new configuration,
• Or have a configuration already saved in the PC,
• Or log onto the DIP, read the configuration, modify it, and return it to the DIP if required.
6.3 Initial status
The DIP unit is powered on.
OPERATING THE HMI DIP: DURING OPERATION MAY DISTURB THE TELEPROTECTION LINK BY THE USE OF CERTAIN FEATURES PROPOSED BY THE DIP HMI WITHIN EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE (E.G. COMMAND FORCING).
6.4 Configuration of the DIP digital version
For more details on the configuration procedures of DIP DIGITAL, refer to the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP DIGITAL chapter. Each step of the procedure corresponds to a paragraph in the HMI chapter.
The configuration procedure is as follows:
• Creating a user password
• Creating a software password
• Configuring General Parameters
• Configuring the backup interface (option)
• Configuring I/O parameters
• Configuring application parameters
• Configuring alarm parameters
• Entering comments
• Saving the configuration
6.4.1 Creating a user password
Access to the configuration parameters of the DIP is protected by password. The intervention level granted to a user depends on the password. First, create the passwords, then the associated levels.
To create a user password, refer to § DIP Managing security passwords / Creating a user password in the chapter HMI - DIP DIGITAL.
The password is saved in the PC.
ATTENTION
Commissioning
DIP/EN CM/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 17/44
6.4.2 Creating a software password
For more security, a software password may be created, which is then saved in the equipment.
To create a software password, refer to § DIP Managing security passwords / Creating a user password in the chapter HMI - DIP DIGITAL.
If the software password is lost, the CPU, UT148 board must be returned to the factory to be reset.
6.4.3 Configuring General Parameters
Refer to the § Configuring the general parameters in the Human Machine Interface - DIP Digital chapter for more details (description of the parameters and range of values).
Configure or enter the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:
The greyed out lines correspond to the mandatory minimum configuration of the parameters.
Parameter / HMI § General configuration Parameter value
Com link Master Slave
Logical address ……………. 0 to 127
Number of commands 2 commands 4 commands
8 commands
HMI port speed
19200 bit / s 4800 bit / s
2400 bit / s 1200 bit / s
600 bit / s
IRIG-B Enabled Disabled
Limitation of the number of events and alarms
Yes (255) No (1785)
TABLE 7 – GENERAL PARAMETERS SHEET – DIGITAL VERSION
* To set the synchronization refer to document PTC-DIP5K-TS-F-013.
6.4.4 Configuring the communication interface
Parameter / HMI § Communication interface
Type Clock (*) Speed (kbps)
IR173 G703.6
Received
Internal (default)
2048
IR179 V11 / X24 Normal (default)
H1
H2
32 64
128 256
IR180 G703-1 codirectional
Received
Internal (default)
64
IR182 Optical fiber or IR187 mode IR182
Received
Internal (default)
256
IR185 IEEE C37.94 or IR187 mode C37.94
Received
Internal (default)
Adjustable by coding wheel
TABLE 8 – COMMUNICATION INTERFACE PARAMETERS SHEET
* To set the clocks refer to document PTC-DIP5K-TS-E-009.
6.4.5 Configuring the redundancy interface
If the redundancy interface is installed, its parameters must be configured.
DIP/EN CM/B23
Commissioning
Page 18/44 e-terragridcom DIP
Refer to the § Configuring the redundancy interface in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP DIGITAL chapter for more details.
Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:
Parameter / HMI § Redundancy interface
Type Clock (*) Speed (kbps)
Redundancy interface
IR173 G703.6
Received
Internal (default)
2048
IR179 V11 / X24 Normal (default)
H1
H2
32 64
128 256
IR180 G703-1 codirectional
Received
Internal (default)
64
Delay before switching
5 to 100 mS
TABLE 9 – REDUNDANCY INTERFACE PARAMETERS SHEET
* To set the clocks refer to document PTC-DIP5K-TS-E-009.
Commissioning
DIP/EN CM/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 19/44
6.4.6 Configuring Input/output Parameters
Refer to the § Configuring the I/O parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP DIGITAL chapter for more details.
Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:
Parameter / HMI § I/O configuration
Parameter value (*)
Input/Output 1 board 2 boards
Input Filter and logic/Input Filter Command 1
........................ 1 to 100 ms
Input Filter and logic/Input Filter Command 2
........................ 1 to 100 ms
Input Filter and logic/Input Filter Command 3
........................ 1 to 100 ms
Input Filter and logic/Input Filter Command 4
........................ 1 to 100 ms
Input Filter and logic/Input Filter Command 5
........................ 1 to 100 ms
Input Filter and logic/Input Filter Command 6
........................ 1 to 100 ms
Input Filter and logic/Input Filter Command 7
........................ 1 to 100 ms
Input Filter and logic/Input Filter Command 8
........................ 1 to 100 ms
Reverse logic command** 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Input Filter and logic/Reverse Logic Command 1
E1 E2 E1 or E2
E1 and E2 LOG (E1 and E2)
Input Filter and logic/Reverse Logic Command 2
E3 E4 E3 or E4
E3 and E4 LOG (E3 and E4)
Input Filter and logic/Reverse Logic Command 3
E5 E6 E5 or E6
E5 and E6 LOG (E5 and E6)
Input Filter and logic/Reverse Logic Command 4
E7 E8 E7 or E8
E7 and E8 LOG (E7 and E8)
TABLE 10 – I/O PARAMETERS SHEET – DIGITAL VERSION
* * For more details on delay parameters, refer to document PTC-DIP5K-TS-E-008.
** When a command is programmed in reverse logic, if the acquisition input is idle, teleprotection sends a permanent command.
DIP/EN CM/B23
Commissioning
Page 20/44 e-terragridcom DIP
6.4.7 Configuring application parameters
Refer to the § Configuring the application parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP DIGITAL chapter for more details.
Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:
Parameter / HMI § Configuring application parameters
Parameter value (*)
Holding delay / Transmission 1 Holding-……………….
Pulsed -…………….
Holding delay / Transmission 2 Holding -……………….
Pulsed -…………….
Holding delay / Transmission 3 Holding -……………….
Pulsed -…………….
Holding delay / Transmission 4 Holding -……………….
Pulsed -…………….
20 to 250 ms
Holding delay / Transmission 5 Holding -……………….
Pulsed -…………….
Holding delay / Transmission 6 Holding -……………….
Pulsed -…………….
Holding delay / Transmission 7 Holding -……………….
Pulsed -…………….
Holding delay / Transmission 8 Holding -……………….
Pulsed -…………….
Relay state on alarm / command 1 idle Former State
Relay state on alarm / command 2 Idle Former State
Relay state on alarm / command 3 Idle Former State
Relay state on alarm / command 4 Idle Former State
Relay state on alarm / command 5 idle Former State
Relay state on alarm / command 6 Idle Former State
Relay state on alarm / command 7 Idle Former State
Relay state on alarm / command 8 Idle Former State
Commissioning
DIP/EN CM/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 21/44
Parameter / HMI § Configuring application parameters
Parameter value (*)
1 -………………
2 -………………
3 -………………
Restitution / Holding in operation 4 -……………… 1 to 3000 ms
5 -………………
6 -………………
7 -………………
8 -………………
Type of reception commands 1/2 Permissive tripping
Blocking
Remote trigger
Type of reception commands 3/4 Permissive tripping
Blocking
Remote trigger
Type of reception commands 5/6 Permissive tripping
Blocking
Remote trigger
Type of reception commands 7/8 Permissive tripping
Blocking
Remote trigger
TABLE 11 – APPLICATION PARAMETERS SHEET – DIGITAL VERSION
* For more details on delay parameters, refer to document PTC-DIP5K-TS-E-008.
6.4.8 Configuring alarm parameters
Refer to the § Configuring the alarms parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP DIGITAL chapter for more details.
DIP/EN CM/B23
Commissioning
Page 22/44 e-terragridcom DIP
Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:
Parameter / HMI § Configuring alarms parameters
Parameter value
Minor alarm threshold on bit error rate (BER)
1. 00E -3 1. 00E-4 1.00E-5 1.00 E-6
Major alarm threshold on bit error rate (BER)
1. 00E -1 1. 00E -2 1.00E-3
Alarm on prolonged command
Type
Duration
YES NO
Minor Major
................... 1 to 30 s
Communication time alarm
Type
Delay
YES NO
Minor Major
................... 1 to 20 ms
Output delay major alarm 1 0 sec 2.5 sec 5 sec 10 sec
Output delay major alarm 2 0 sec 2.5 sec 5 sec 10 sec
Output delay major minor alarm 1 0 sec 2.5 sec 5 sec 10 sec
Output delay major minor alarm 2 0 sec 2.5 sec 5 sec 10 sec
TABLE 12 – ALARMS PARAMETERS SHEET – DIGITAL VERSION
6.4.9 Entering comments
Refer to the § Entering comments in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP DIGITAL chapter for more details.
Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:
Parameter / HMI § Entering comments
Parameter value
Name of source station
Name of destination station
Comments
TABLE 13 – COMMENTS PARAMETERS SHEET – DIGITAL VERSION
6.4.10 Saving the configuration
Send the configuration to the DIP and save it (refer to the § Configuring the Windows file in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE-DIP DIGITAL chapter).
Commissioning
DIP/EN CM/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 23/44
6.5 Configuring DIP Single tone analog version
For more details on the configuration procedures of DIP Single tone analog, refer to the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP SINGLE TONE ANALOG chapter. Each step of the procedure corresponds to a paragraph in the HMI chapter.
The configuration procedure is as follows:
• Creating a user password
• Configuring General Parameters
• Configuring Sender Parameters
• Configuring Receiver Parameters
• Configuring I/O parameters
• Configuring alarm parameters
• Saving the configuration
6.5.1 Creating a user password
Access to the configuration parameters of the DIP is protected by password. The intervention level granted to a user depends on the password.
To create a user password, refer to § DIP Managing security passwords / Creating a user password in the chapter HMI - DIP Analog.
6.5.2 Configuring General Parameters
Refer to the § Configuring the alarms parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP SINGLE TONE ANALOG chapter for more details.
Configure or enter the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:
The grayed out lines correspond to the mandatory minimum configuration of the parameters.
Default parameter values are in bold.
Parameter / HMI § Configuring general parameters
Parameter value
Number of orders 2 commands 4 commands
IRIG-B Enabled Disabled
Mode selection Normal Extended
Logical address* ……………. 0 to 255
Limitation of the number of events and alarms / Limitation of histories to 255
Yes (255) No (1785)
HMI Speed
19200 bit / s 4800 bit / s
2400 bit / s 1200 bit / s
600 bit / s
Link test
Hour and minutes
Minutes
Disabled
Daily …………H ……………mn
Hourly ……………………….mn
Comments / Source station
Comments / Destination station
Comments / Comments
TABLE 14 – GENERAL PARAMETERS SHEET – SINGLE TONE ANALOG VERSION
* This parameter is not used currently.
DIP/EN CM/B23
Commissioning
Page 24/44 e-terragridcom DIP
6.5.3 Configuring Sender Parameters
Refer to the § Configuring the sender parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP SINGLE TONE ANALOG chapter for more details.
Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:
Parameter name / HMI § Configuring sender parameters
Parameter value
Sender LF Band Bandwidth
§ Configuring Sender LF Band
300-2000 Hz
300-2400 Hz
300-3400 Hz
Sender LF Band Guard
§ Configuring Sender LF Band
2240 Hz
2600 Hz
3680 Hz
Guard source
§ Configuring Guard source
Internal
External
Transmission level / Guard …………………………
Transmission level / Frequency 1 …………………………
Transmission level / Frequency 2 ………………………… -30 to +6dBm
Transmission level / Frequency 3 …………………………
Transmission level / Frequency 4 …………………………
Input Validation delay / Command 1 …………………………
Input Validation delay / Command 2 ………………………… 0 to 5ms
Input Validation delay / Command 3 …………………………
Input Validation delay / Command 4 …………………………
Holding delay / Pulsed mode Command 1
Holding-……………….
Pulsed -…………….
Holding delay / Pulsed mode Command 2
Holding -……………….
Pulsed -…………….
20 to 500 ms
Holding delay / Pulsed mode Command 3
Holding -……………….
Pulsed -…………….
Holding delay / Pulsed mode Command 4
Holding -……………….
Pulsed -…………….
Type of application / Command 1 Permissive tripping
Blocking
Direct tripping
Type of application / Command 2 Permissive tripping
Blocking
Direct tripping
Type of application / Command 3 Permissive tripping
Blocking
Direct tripping
Type of application / Command 4 Permissive tripping
Blocking
Direct tripping
TABLE 15 – SENDER PARAMETERS SHEET – SINGLE TONE ANALOG VERSION
Commissioning
DIP/EN CM/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 25/44
6.5.4 Configuring Receiver Parameters
Refer to the § Configuring the receiver parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP SINGLE TONE ANALOG chapter for more details.
Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:
Parameter name / HMI § Configuring receiver parameters
Parameter Values
Useful band/ Commands 300-2000 Hz 300-2400 Hz
300-3400 Hz
Useful band/ Guard 2100/2300 Hz 2400/2660 Hz
3500/3800 Hz
Reception / Guard level …………………… - 40 to 0 dBm
Command / Guard relative frequency level
……………… /.0 to -6 dBm normal version
…………… /0 to -16 dBm advanced version
Holding delay command 1 ………………………
Holding delay command 2 ……………………… 0 to 3000 ms
Holding delay command 3 ………………………
Holding delay command 4 ………………………
Command 1 Relay State on AI/§ Configuring Relay State on AI
Idle State Former State
Command 2 Relay State on AI/§ Configuring Relay State on AI
Idle State Former State
Command 3 Relay State on AI/§ Configuring Relay State on AI
Idle State Former State
Command 4 Relay State on AI/§ Configuring Relay State on AI
Idle State Former State
Command 1 Protection Scheme/
§ Configuring protection schemes
Permissive tripping
Blocking
Direct tripping
Command 2 Protection Scheme/§ Configuring protection schemes
Permissive tripping
Blocking
Direct tripping
Command 3 Protection Scheme/§ Configuring protection schemes
Permissive tripping
Blocking
Direct tripping
Command 4 Protection Scheme/§ Configuring protection schemes
Permissive tripping
Blocking
Direct tripping
Unblocking command 1 Unblocking
Unblocking command 2 Unblocking
Unblocking command 3 Unblocking
Unblocking command 4 Unblocking
Unblocking threshold ………………………. - 20 to -10 dB
Unblocking validation delay ………………………. 5 to 100 ms
Unblocking holding delay ………………………. 30 to 500 ms
TABLE 16 – RECEIVER PARAMETERS SHEET – SINGLE TONE ANALOG VERSION
DIP/EN CM/B23
Commissioning
Page 26/44 e-terragridcom DIP
6.5.5 Configuring I/O parameters
Refer to the § Configuring the I/O parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP SINGLE TONE ANALOG chapter for more details.
Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:
Parameter / HMI § I/O configuration Parameter value
Configuring I/O boards 1 board 2 boards
Command 1 Input Filter Delay/§ Configuring Input Filter Delay
………………………. - 0 to 3 ms
Command 2 Input Filter Delay/§ Configuring Input Filter Delay
………………………. - 0 to 3 ms
Command 3 Input Filter Delay/§ Configuring Input Filter Delay
………………………. - 0 to 3 ms
Command 4 Input Filter Delay/§ Configuring Input Filter Delay
………………………. - 0 to 3 ms
Command 1 Combinatorial Logic on Inputs/§ Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs
IN1 IN2
IN1 or IN2 IN1 and IN2
Command 2 Combinatorial Logic on Inputs/§ Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs
IN3 IN4
IN3 or IN4 IN3 and IN4
Command 3 Combinatorial Logic on Inputs/§ Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs
IN5 IN6
IN5 or IN6 IN5 and IN6
Command 4 Combinatorial Logic on Inputs/§ Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs
IN7 IN8
IN7 or IN8 IN7 and IN8
TABLE 17 – I/O PARAMETERS SHEET – SINGLE TONE ANALOG VERSION
6.5.6 Alarms parameters – Single tone
Refer to the § Configuring the alarms parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP SINGLE TONE ANALOG chapter for more details.
Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:
Commissioning
DIP/EN CM/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 27/44
Parameter name / HMI § Configuring alarms parameters
Parameter value
Alarm on external input
Type
Delay
YES NO
Minor Major
................... 0 to 2.5 s
Input Command Duration Alarm
Type
Duration
YES NO
Minor Major
................... 0.5 to 10 s
Loss of Signal Alarm Threshold
Delay
................... -15 to – 6dBr
................... 1 to 10 s
Locking alarm
Delay
YES NO
................... 0.5 to 10 s
Alarm Outputs Delay Major alarm 1 0 sec 2.5 sec 5 sec 10 sec
Alarm Outputs Delay Major alarm 2 0 sec 2.5 sec 5 sec 10 sec
Alarm Outputs Delay Minor alarm 1 0 sec 2.5 sec 5 sec 10 sec
Alarm Outputs Delay Minor alarm 2 0 sec 2.5 sec 5 sec 10 sec
TABLE 18 – ALARMS PARAMETERS SHEET – SINGLE TONE ANALOG VERSION
6.5.7 Saving the configuration
Save the configuration (refer to the § Configuring the File menu in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP SINGLE TONE ANALOG chapter).
6.6 Configuring DIP Analogue Dual Tone
For more details on the configuration procedures of DIP Dual tone analog, refer to the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP DUAL TONE ANALOG chapter.
The configuration procedure is as follows:
• Creating a password
• Configuring General Parameters
• Configuring Sender Parameters
• Configuring Receiver Parameters
• Configuring I/O parameters
• Configuring alarm parameters
• Saving the configuration
6.6.1 Creating a password
Access to the configuration parameters of the DIP is protected by password. The intervention level granted to a user depends on the password.
To create a user password, refer to § DIP Managing security passwords / Creating a user password in the chapter HMI - DIP Analog.
6.6.2 Configuring general parameters - Dual tone analog version
Refer to the § Configuring the general parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP DUAL TONE ANALOG chapter for more details.
Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:
The grayed out lines correspond to the mandatory minimum configuration of the parameters.
Default parameter values are in bold.
DIP/EN CM/B23
Commissioning
Page 28/44 e-terragridcom DIP
Parameter / HMI § Configuring general parameters
Parameter value
IRIG-B on off
Logical address ……………. 0 to 255
Limitation of the number of events and alarms / Limitation of histories to 255
Yes (255)* No (1785)
HMI Speed
19200 bit / s 4800 bit / s
2400 bit / s 1200 bit / s
600 bit / s
Link test
Hour and minutes
Minutes
Disabled
Daily …………H ……………mn
Hourly ...………………….……mn
Comments / Source station
Comments / Destination station
Comments / Comments
TABLE 19 – GENERAL PARAMETERS – DUAL TONE
* Limitation to 255 when the DIP is supervised..
6.6.3 Configuring sender parameters - Dual tone version
Refer to the § Configuring the sender parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP DUAL TONE ANALOG chapter for more details.
Configure or enter the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:
Parameter name / HMI § Configuring receiver parameters
Parameter value
Useful band / Commands 300-1900 Hz 400-2000 Hz
670-2260 Hz 850-2450 Hz
1040-2630 Hz 1220-2810 Hz
1400-3000 Hz 1590-3180 Hz
2000-3600 Hz
Transmission level / Guard …………………………
-30 to +6dBm
Transmission level / Frequency 1 …………………………
Transmission level / Frequency 2 …………………………
Transmission level / Frequency 3 …………………………
Transmission level / Frequency 4 …………………………
Transmission level / Frequency 5 …………………………
Transmission level / Frequency 6 …………………………
Transmission level / Frequency 7 …………………………
Transmission level / Frequency 8 …………………………
Input Validation delay / Command 1 …………………………
Input Validation delay / Command 2 …………………………
Input Validation delay / Command 3 …………………………
Input Validation delay / Command 4 …………………………
Holding delay / Pulsed mode Command 1 Holding-……………….
Pulsed -…………….
Holding delay / Pulsed mode Command 2 Holding -……………….
Pulsed -…………….
20 to 500 ms
Commissioning
DIP/EN CM/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 29/44
Parameter name / HMI § Configuring receiver parameters
Parameter value
Holding delay / Pulsed mode Command 3 Holding -……………….
Pulsed -…………….
Holding delay / Pulsed mode Command 4 Holding -……………….
Pulsed -…………….
Type of application / Command 1 Permissive tripping Reinforced
Blocking Reinforced
Direct tripping Reinforced
Type of application / Command 2 Permissive tripping Reinforced
Blocking Reinforced
Direct tripping Reinforced
Type of application / Command 3 Permissive tripping Reinforced
Blocking Reinforced
Direct tripping Reinforced
Type of application / Command 4 Permissive tripping Reinforced
Blocking Reinforced
Direct tripping Reinforced
TABLE 20 – SENDER PARAMETERS – DUAL TONE
6.6.4 Configuring receiver parameters - Dual tone version
Refer to the § Configuring the receiver parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP DUAL TONE ANALOG chapter for more details.
Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:
Parameter name / HMI § Configuring receiver parameters
Parameter value
Useful band / Commands 300-1900 Hz 400-2000 Hz
670-2260 Hz 850-2450 Hz
1040-2630 Hz 1220-2810 Hz
1400-3000 Hz 1590-3180 Hz
2000-3600 Hz
Reception / Guard level …………………… - 40 to 0 dBm
Command / Guard relative frequency level ……………… /.6 to -6 dBm normal version
…………… /0 to -16 dBm advanced version
Holding delay command 1 ………………………
Holding delay command 2 ………………………
Holding delay command 3 ………………………
Holding delay command 4 ………………………
Relay state on alarm / command 1 idle Former State
Relay state on alarm / command 2 Idle Former State
Relay state on alarm / command 3 Idle Former State
Relay state on alarm / command 4 Idle Former State
Type of application / Command 1 Permissive tripping Reinforced
Blocking Reinforced Direct tripping Reinforced
DIP/EN CM/B23
Commissioning
Page 30/44 e-terragridcom DIP
Parameter name / HMI § Configuring receiver parameters
Parameter value
Type of application / Command 2 Permissive tripping Reinforced
Blocking Reinforced Direct tripping Reinforced
Type of application / Command 3 Permissive tripping Reinforced
Blocking Reinforced Direct tripping Reinforced
Type of application / Command 4 Permissive tripping Reinforced
Blocking Reinforced Direct tripping Reinforced
Unblocking command 1 Unblocking
Unblocking command 2 Unblocking
Unblocking command 3 Unblocking
Unblocking command 4 Unblocking
Unblocking threshold …………………… - 20 to 10 dB
Unblocking Validation delay ………………………. 5 to 100 ms
Unblocking Holding delay ………………………. 30 to 500 ms
TABLE 21 – RECEIVER PARAMETERS – DUAL TONE ANALOG
6.6.5 Configuring I/O parameters - Dual tone version
Refer to the § Configuring the I/O parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP DUAL TONE ANALOG chapter for more details.
Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:
Parameter / HMI § I/O configuration Parameter value
Configuring I/O boards 1 board 2 boards
Command 1 Input Filter Delay/§ Configuring Input Filter Delay
…………… - 0 to 100 ms (default 1 ms)
Command 2 Input Filter Delay/§ Configuring Input Filter Delay
…………… - 0 to 100 ms (default 1 ms)
Command 3 Input Filter Delay/§ Configuring Input Filter Delay
…………… - 0 to 100 ms (default 1 ms)
Command 4 Input Filter Delay/§ Configuring Input Filter Delay
…………… - 0 to 100 ms (default 1 ms)
Command 1 Combinatorial Logic on Inputs/§ Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs
IN1 IN2
IN1 or IN2 IN1 and IN2
Command 2 Combinatorial Logic on Inputs/§ Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs
IN3 IN4
IN3 or IN4 IN3 and IN4
Command 3 Combinatorial Logic on Inputs/§ Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs
IN5 IN6
IN5 or IN6 IN5 and IN6
Command 4 Combinatorial Logic on Inputs/§ Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs
IN7 IN8
IN7 or IN8 IN7 and IN8
TABLE 22 – I/O PARAMETERS SHEET – DUAL TONE
Commissioning
DIP/EN CM/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 31/44
6.6.6 Configuring alarms parameters - Dual tone version
Refer to the § Configuring the alarms parameters in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP DUAL TONE ANALOG chapter for more details.
Configure the parameters in compliance with the following configuration sheet:
Parameter name / HMI § Configuring alarms parameters
Parameter value
Alarm on external input
Type
Delay
YES NO
Minor Major
....................... 0 to 2.5 s
Input Command Duration Alarm
Type
Duration
YES NO
Minor Major
........................ 0.5 to 10 s
Loss of Signal Alarm Threshold
Delay
................... -16 to – 6dBr
........................ 1 to 10 s
Noise alarm Threshold
Delay
................... -6 to +12 dBr
........................ 1 to 10 s
Alarm on link test failure Minor Major
Locking alarm
Delay
YES NO
........................ 0.5 to 10 s
Saturation threshold alarm ................... +8 to +14 dBr
Alarm Outputs Delay Major alarm 1 0 sec 2.5 sec 5 sec 10 sec
Alarm Outputs Delay Major alarm 2 0 sec 2.5 sec 5 sec 10 sec
Alarm Outputs Delay Minor alarm 1 0 sec 2.5 sec 5 sec 10 sec
Alarm Outputs Delay Minor alarm 2 0 sec 2.5 sec 5 sec 10 sec
TABLE 23 – ALARMS PARAMETERS – DUAL TONE
6.6.7 Saving the configuration
Save the configuration (refer to the § Configuring the File menu in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE - DIP DUAL TONE ANALOG chapter).
6.7 Final status of the configuration step
At the end of the configuration step:
• The passwords are created.
• The configuration file is saved and ready to be sent to the DIP unit.
DIP/EN CM/B23
Commissioning
Page 32/44 e-terragridcom DIP
7. TESTS AND FAULT ISOLATION
The objective of this step consists in checking:
• compliance of the configuration file saved with the equipment,
• the operational status of the DIP equipment.
7.1 Initial status
The configuration file is saved and ready to be sent to the DIP.
7.2 Checking procedure
• Send the configuration to the DIP which is reset
For more information on the digital HMI, refer to the § Sending a configuration file in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE-DIP DIGITAL chapter.
For more information on the analog HMI, refer to the § Sending a configuration file in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE-DIP Analog chapter.
• Check the status of LEDs after the reset and lack of alarms.
If LEDs report an alarm status:
• Read the alarms.
For more information on the digital HMI, refer to the § Reading alarms in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE-DIP DIGITAL chapter.
For more information on the analog HMI, refer to the § Reading alarms in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE-DIP ANALOG chapter.
Once the alarm identified, apply the corresponding resolution procedure of the § TESTS AND FAULT ISOLATION in the MAINTENANCE chapter.
Commissioning
DIP/EN CM/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 33/44
7.3 Final status
At the end of this step, the DIP equipment is configured and ready to be used.
Start
Send the
configuration
Alarm state OK
after reset ?
State of hardware
alarms OK ?
Read the alarms and
record the nature of
the fault displayed.
Repair
(See § Tests and
troubleshooting)
End
No
Yes
Yes
No
D0613FRa
FIGURE 7 - TESTS AND FAULT ISOLATION
DIP/EN CM/B23
Commissioning
Page 34/44 e-terragridcom DIP
8. OPERATING CHECKS
8.1 Initial status
The DIP equipment is ready to be used, but not connected.
8.2 Procedure
This procedure consists in:
− Checking user connections (rear panel) and the jumpers 1-2 ‘Terminal block presence’.
− Set the date and time on the unit.
− Save the configuration file.
− Clear the event and alarm log.
− Perform self-checks.
− Perform online checks.
Start
Check ‘user’ connections
(rear connectors)
Set the time on the unit
Menu <Date/Write/Local>
Save the configuration
in a backup file Menu <Read/Local>
Command <Configuration>Menu <File><File/Save>
Clear the alarms and
events log
Check locally
Check on line
End
D0614FRa
FIGURE 7 – FINAL CHECKS AND CONFIGURATION
Commissioning
DIP/EN CM/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 35/44
8.3 Self-checks
8.3.1 Alarms forcing
Alarm forcing allows to check the operational status of alarms.
To force an alarm:
For more information on the digital HMI, refer to the § Forcing alarms in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE-DIP DIGITAL chapter.
For more information on the analog HMI, refer to the § Forcing alarms in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE-DIP ANALOG chapter.
8.3.2 Maintenance forcing commands
When the DIP equipment is not connected to the transmission medium, apply the maintenance forcing commands and check the results.
For more information on the digital HMI, refer to the § Maintenance in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE-DIP DIGITAL chapter.
For more information on the analog HMI, refer to the § DIP Maintenance Menu in the HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE-DIP ANALOG chapter.
8.3.3 Forcing PLC commands
Only when a PLC is present, use the PLC forcing commands and check the results. Refer to the § Forcing PLC commands in the Human Machine Interface–DIP Analog.
8.4 Online checks
When two DIPs are linked, no alarm must appear. Otherwise, refer to the maintenance manual
8.5 Final status
The DIP unit is fully operational.
DIP/EN CM/B23
Commissioning
Page 36/44 e-terragridcom DIP
9. APPENDIX A
9.1 Implantation diagram of the UT148 / UT148D board
IR 1xx communication
interface board
Optional
IRIG-BIR184 board
Timer
D0131 Frd
Lo
ca
tio
n o
f o
ptional
ME
50
bo
ard
Status of the lamps in normal operation:
V1 Green on
V8 Green fast flashing
V7 Off
The IR1xx communication interface board may be absent in case of optical transmission.
Commissioning
DIP/EN CM/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 37/44
9.2 Implantation diagram of the SR11x board and jumper settings
D0132XXa
K5
K6
K7
K8
K9
K10
K11
K12
K4
K3
K2
K1
1
2
3
S 2
12
3
S 3
1
23
S 4
1
2
3
S 5V 5
V 6
V 7
V 8
V 1
V 2
V 3
V 4
P1
P2
P3
MAX
7000
S1
U4
Position of the jumpers
The jumpers S2 to S5 allow selecting the range of voltage values according to the level of the input command.
Position SR114 SR114D SR115 SR116
1 - 2 220 V –250 Vdc 220 V –250 Vdc 48 V -127 Vdc 110 V -127 Vdc
2 - 3 48 V -127 Vdc 48 V -127 Vdc 24 Vdc 48 V -60 Vdc
DIP/EN CM/B23
Commissioning
Page 38/44 e-terragridcom DIP
9.3 Implantation diagram of the SR200 board and jumper settings
Position of the jumpers
The jumpers JP1, JP3, JP5 and JP7 allow selecting the range of voltage values according to the level of the input command.
Position SR200 Minimum Maximum
1 - 2 24Vdc 18 Vdc 30 Vdc
3 - 4 48 V -60 Vdc 36 Vdc 75 Vdc
5 - 6 110-127 Vdc 83 Vdc 158 Vdc
7 - 8 220-250 Vdc 165 Vdc 312 Vdc
If the daughter board FI005 is present on the SR200 board, the jumpers must be set to 1-2, in which case acquisition of the command is ensured by dry loop.
The position of the FI005 board is marked by its outline in the figure above.
Commissioning
DIP/EN CM/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 39/44
The jumpers JP9 to JP32 allow to fit (or not) the static relay in addition to the mechanical relay.
Position 1 – 2 Position 2 – 3 Command
JP9 – JP10 Command output
on mechanical relay and static relay in parallel
Command output on mechanical
relay only
1 or 5
JP11 – JP12 2 or 6
JP13 – JP14 3 or 7
JP15 – JP16 4 or 8
JP17 – JP18
Command copy output on
mechanical relay and static relay in
parallel
Command copy output on
mechanical relay only
the allocation of the copy outputs is detailed in the INSTALLATION
part
JP19 – JP20
JP21 – JP22
JP23 – JP24
JP25 – JP26
JP27 – JP28
JP29 – JP30
JP31 – JP32
DIP/EN CM/B23
Commissioning
Page 40/44 e-terragridcom DIP
9.4 Implantation diagram of the AL137 and AL140 board
The +5v and 0v test points allow to check the voltage delivered by the board.
The S1 switch allows power on the DIP.
F1 : Protection fuse : 800mA , T, 250V,20/5
9.5 Implantation diagram of the AL139 board
There are two versions of AL139 board, which differ only by the CONV.1 converter.
The +5v and 0v test points allow to check the voltage delivered by the board.
The INT.1 switch allows to power on the DIP.
F1 : Protection fuse : 3,15A , T, 250V,20/5
Commissioning
DIP/EN CM/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 41/44
9.6 Implantation diagram of the IR183 board
E1
E6
E4
E5
E2
S6
S5
C4
C1
C2
C7
C5
C8
C1
1
C1
2
C1
6
C10
S4
S2
U7
C4
0 +
C1
5
+ C
9C4
1
U9
U1
3
C1
4
U5
U3
C3
9
R3
U6
C3
4C
31
U8 C
32
C2
0C
28
C3
0R
32
R2
4
U1
4
Q5
Q7
Q6
Q1
D7
D9
D8
R15 R
13
R1
4
R1
9R
17
R2
1
R1
8U
10
R2
0
Impedance of the BF output
1 – 2
By default 2 - 3
S5 600 Ω High impedance
S6
P9-P10 = transmission measurement points.
P11-P12 = reception measurement points.
DIP/EN CM/B23
Commissioning
Page 42/44 e-terragridcom DIP
9.7 Implantation diagram of the FI002 board and jumper settings
Each filter is programmed via 3 jumpers J1x, J2x and J3x. Each jumper is identified on the board. The jumper positions are indicated in the figure below:
Command 4 filter
Command 3 filter
Command 2 filter
Command 1 filter
D0495FRa
Each filter can be configured for the nominal voltage of the input command, as specified in the table below.
Input command voltage J1 J2 J3
48 Vdc Closed Open Open
110 - 127 Vdc Open Closed Closed
220 Vdc Open Closed Open
Commissioning
DIP/EN CM/B23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 43/44
9.8 Implantation diagram of the IR185 board and jumper settings
Tx LED
Rx LED
J1
3
45
2
10
6
78
9
U2
U10
U9U8
D0496 Frb
J3
U11
U4U3
D1
D2
32
1
32
1
32
1
JP3 JP2 JP132
1
JP5
JTAG
J2
SP1
Green LED on
Red FGPA not loaded LED
Rotating switch
Test jumperPower supply jumper
Rotating switch J1 JP1 /JP2 /JP3 Speed
Test mode N = 0 1-2 N/A – The test mode is used in the factory to test the board without DIP connection
Normal maintenance
N = 1 to 8 2-3 Nx64 kbps
DIP/EN CM/B23
Commissioning
Page 44/44 e-terragridcom DIP
9.9 Implantation diagram of the IR187 board and jumper settings
D0646FRa
J3
SP1
D1
D2
JTAG/RS232J2
SFP module cage
J1
3
45
2
10
6
78
9
TP2
TP4
TP8
TP3
TP1
TP9
GND
TP12 TP11
TP7 TP6
GND +5V
GND
GND
TP5
+2.5V
TR
AC
O
PO
WE
R
TP10
JP2 JP1
3
2
1
32
1
The two jumpers JP1 and JP2 and position of the rotating switch allow to configure the board as follow:
Coding wheel J1 JP1 JP2 Speed
IR182 mode N = 1 1-2 2-3 256 kbps
C37.94 Mode N = 1 to 8 2-3 1-2 Nx64 kbps
Maintenance
DIP/EN MT/A23 e-terragridcom DIP
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance
DIP/EN MT/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 1/40
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 5
2. INTRODUCTION 6
3. MONITORING 7
3.1 Monitoring LEDs 7
3.2 Messages 9
3.3 LED – Relay information 9
3.4 Push buttons 10
4. HMI MAINTENANCE FEATURES 11
4.1 Snapshot window 11
4.2 Maintenance test commands 11
4.3 Instant reading of alarms – DIGITAL DIP HMI 11
4.4 Reading an alarms list DIP DIGITAL 12
4.5 Reading alarms DIP IHM ANALOG 12
4.6 Reading an alarms list DIP ANALOG 13
5. TESTS AND FAULT ISOLATION 14
5.1 Checks before repair 14
5.2 Fault isolation procedure 14
5.3 Troubleshooting procedures 14
5.4 Warning and error messages 33
6. CLASSIFICATION OF FAULTS 35
7. UPDATE OF THE DIP FIRMWARE 37
7.1 Overview 37
7.2 Prior conditions 37
7.3 Installing files on the PC 37
7.4 Transferring update files 38
7.5 Connecting the DIP 40
DIP/EN MT/A23
Maintenance
Page 2/40 e-terragridcom DIP
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1 – INDICATION LED AND PUSH BUTTONS 7
FIGURE 2 – POWER ON ALARMS 16
FIGURE 3 – POWER ON ALARMS – COMMUNICATION INTERFACE FAULT 17
FIGURE 4 – POWER ON ALARMS – SRXXX COHERENCE FAULT 17
FIGURE 5 – POWER ON ALARMS – IRIG-B COHERENCE FAULT 18
FIGURE 6 – POWER ON ALARMS – CONFIGURATION CHECKSUM FAULT 19
FIGURE 7 – POWER ON ALARMS – LOCAL LOOPBACK TEST FAULT 19
FIGURE 8 – HARDWARE STATUS 20
FIGURE 9 – HARDWARE STATUS - SRXXX MODULE TEST FAULT 21
FIGURE 10 – HARDWARE STATUS - TERMINAL BLOCK PRESENCE FAULT 22
FIGURE 11 – HARDWARE STATUS - AL13X OE AL14X SUPPLY VOLTAGE FAULT 23
FIGURE 12 – HARDWARE STATUS - TIME-STAMP BATTERY VOLTAGE FAULT 23
FIGURE 13 – HARDWARE STATUS - LINK TEST ALARM 24
FIGURE 14 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – DIGITAL VERSION 25
FIGURE 15 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – DIGITAL VERSION – BIT ERROR RATE 26
FIGURE 16 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – DIGITAL VERSION – SYNCH LOSS 27
FIGURE 17 – REMOTE ALARMS 28
FIGURE 18 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – DIGITAL VERSION – COMMUNICATION INTERFACE 28
FIGURE 19 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – DIGITAL VERSION – TRANSMISSION TIME 29
FIGURE 20 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – DIGITAL VERSION – TX COMMAND TIME 29
FIGURE 21 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – ANALOG VERSION 30
FIGURE 22 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – ANALOG VERSION – NO GUARD / LOW LEVEL / NOISE - BLOCKING 31
FIGURE 23 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – ANALOG VERSION – EXTERNAL ALARM 32
FIGURE 24 – MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGES 33
FIGURE 25 – MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGES (CONT’D) 34
Maintenance
DIP/EN MT/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 3/40
MODIFICATIONS PAGE
VERSION DATE COMMENTS
A 28/12/2000 Original issue
B 24/04/2001 Added the optical interface
C 05/11/2004 ALSTOM logo and addition of analog version
D 14/11/2007 New structure. New writing. Added a paragraph on updating the firmware, creation of the test and fault isolation procedure.
E 29/02/2008 Minor correction
A22 20/07/2009 Version 2.2
B22 23/12/2009 Minor corrections, added SR200 I/O and IR187 optical interface.
A23 04/01/2011 Version 2.3
DIP/EN MT/A23
Maintenance
Page 4/40 e-terragridcom DIP
BLANK PAGE
Maintenance
DIP/EN MT/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 5/40
1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY SECTION DIP5K/EN SS/A11 OR LATER ISSUE, THE TECHNICAL DATA SECTION AND THE RATING ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.
THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED RS232C(1)
SERIAL PORT IS AN EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. WHEN THE TELEPROTECTION IS ENERGIZED, THE TERMINALS OF THIS PORT SHOULD NOT BE TOUCHED SINCE IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF A SINGLE FAULT CONDITION THERE WOULD BE A VERY LOW PROBABILITY OF AN ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS DESIGNED TO BE USED FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, THAT IS MONITORING AND SOFTWARE DOWNLOADS; IT IS NOT INTENDED TO BE PERMANENTLY CONNECTED.
THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED RJ45(1)
SERIAL PORT IS AN EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS INTENDED TO BE USED FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, I.E. MONITORING AND DOWNLOADING THE SOFTWARE.
(1) As per the option chosen
DIP/EN MT/A23
Maintenance
Page 6/40 e-terragridcom DIP
2. INTRODUCTION
This section includes two parts:
• Tests and repair: this part presents a classification of faults, describes the maintenance tools and indicates the repair procedures.
• Firmware updating procedure.
Maintenance
DIP/EN MT/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 7/40
3. MONITORING
The monitoring resources available with the DIP equipment are the following:
• Monitoring information by LEDs and relays,
• Notification messages,
3.1 Monitoring LEDs
The LEDs, located on the front face of the DIP equipment display monitoring information (refer to table 1 - Indication of the LEDs).
The system’s operation is monitored by these LEDs, as well as by four alarm relays (two dedicated to major alarms and two others to minor alarms).
Alarms requiring maintenance action are notified by the status of these LEDs are relays.
Opt . link
Optical interface
indicator lights
MAIN POWER
MAJO R ALARM
MINOR ALARM
Power supply indicator lights
AUX . POWER
D0136 FRb
FIGURE 1 – INDICATION LED AND PUSH BUTTONS
The following tables indicate the information notified by the LEDs.
The information of the V2, V4 and V6 LEDs depend on the ANALOG or DIGITAL version, the appropriate lines are displayed in grey in the table.
DIP/EN MT/A23
Maintenance
Page 8/40 e-terragridcom DIP
Description UT148
Main power supply
Auxiliary power supply
Activity Lamp Color Comment
GE
NE
RA
L
Power supply voltage present x x
Voltage present
Voltage absent
Green
Off
Fixed
Major alarm x
Normal
Alarm
Off
Red
Fixed
Minor alarm x
Normal
Alarm
Off
Red
Fixed
Local loop back x
Normal
Loopback
V3 Off
Yellow
Fixed
Battery fault x
Normal
Fault
V9 Off
Red
Fixed
Command outputs x
Normal
Blocked
V5 Off
Yellow
Fixed
DIG
ITA
L
Remote loopback
x
Normal
Remote loopback equipment
V2 Off
Yellow
Fixed
Receiver synchronization x
Synchronized
Non synchronized
V4 Green
Off
Fixed
Remote alarm x
Normal
Remote alarm
V6 Off
Red
Fixed
AN
AL
OG
Rx / Guard level
x
Normal
No guard signal / Low level
V4 Green
Off
Fixed
x
Normal
No guard signal / Low level
V6 Off
Red
Fixed
Link test x
Test message emission
Link test fault V2
Orange
Orange
Fixed for 2s
Fixed
TABLE 1 – LED INDICATION
Maintenance
DIP/EN MT/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 9/40
Teledetection status UT148 lamp
V1 (STATUS) UT148 lamp V8 (STATUS)
UT148 lamp V7 (STATUS)
Normal operation Green on Green fast flashing Off
Normal operation after cold start
Green on Yellow fast flashing Off
Initializing Green on Red fast flashing Off
Alarm on power on test Red fast flashing Red fast flashing Off
Configuration writing in Flash EPROM
Red slow flashing Red slow flashing Off
Storage status (time stamp battery isolated)
Fast toggling from green to yellow then red
Fast toggling from green to yellow then red
Maintenance Green on Fast green flashing or fast yellow flashing
Yellow on
Remote equipment loopback Green on Fast green flashing or fast yellow flashing
Yellow fast flashing
Waiting for code transfer for Flash memory
Yellow slow flashing Yellow slow flashing Yellow fast flashing
Transferring code Green at 0 s rate of data transmitted
Green at 1 s rate of data transmitted
Yellow fast flashing
Writing code in Flash memory
Red slow flashing Red slow flashing Yellow fast flashing
TABLE 2 – INDICATION OF ‘STATUS’ AND ‘MAINTENANCE’ LEDS
Mode LED Signaling Status
All TX Green on Normal emission
IR187 TX /RX Alternate orange flashing No SFP module
IR182
Or
IR187
RX Green on Normal reception
TX Slow yellow flashing No signal from UT148
TX Fast red flashing Transmitter fault
RX Slow yellow flashing No Signal received activity
RX Fast red flashing Low optical power level (LOS)
IR185
Or
IR187
TX Yellow on Yellow Bit
TX Red on No signal from UT148
RX Red on No optical signal received (LOS)
RX Yellow on AIS reception
RX Red flashing Frame loss (LOF)
TABLE 3 – INDICATION OF LEDS ON OPTICAL INTERFACE
3.2 Messages
Notification messages are displayed to notify the user in case of error and risk of untimely commands. They also provide instructions for fault resolving.
3.3 LED – Relay information
The information of the ‘MAJOR ALARM’ and ‘MINOR ALARM’ LEDs (see Figure 1) is associated with the alarm status of the relays.
DIP/EN MT/A23
Maintenance
Page 10/40 e-terragridcom DIP
Each alarm is associated with two independent contacts, with a closing time (0 s, 2.5 s, 5 s or 10 s) which can be configured with the HMI (refer to the chapter ‘Human Machine Interface’).
These contacts are normally open in standard or normally closed with the AL142 and AL143 boards.
3.4 Push buttons
The S1 and S2 push buttons are accessible when the door is open (see Figure 1).
The S1 button allows to reset the DIP unit.
The S2 button:
• is not used in the digital version of the equipment (factory test),
• is used to launch a link test in the analog version.
Maintenance
DIP/EN MT/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 11/40
4. HMI MAINTENANCE FEATURES
The RS232C communication port fitted on the front panel is an ultra low voltage circuit (ULV) ensuring basic isolation against electric shock. When powering on the teleprotection, the terminals of this port must not be touched to prevent any risk of electric shock in case of fault. This port is designed to be used for maintenance, i.e. monitoring and downloading software, it must not be connected permanently.
The front panel mounted RJ45(1)
communication port is an extra low voltage circuit ensuring basic insulation against electric shock. This port is designed to be used for maintenance, i.e. monitoring and downloading software.
(1) As per the option chosen
4.1 Snapshot window
The HMI software allows monitoring alarms via an instant status window and reading event and alarm files.
Events and alarms are saved in a file, accessible via the History menu.
The alarms monitored depend on the type of DIP, DIGITAL or ANALOG.
The corresponding alarm windows and files are described separately, in the following paragraphs. According to the version of the DIP, refer to the appropriate paragraphs.
4.2 Maintenance test commands
The maintenance instructions, used to analyze malfunctions and launch tests, are available via the HMI:
• Locking to lock / unlock either the link between units or the link with the protection relay connected to the unit.
• Loop to launch a loop between the transmitter and receiver.
• Forcing commands to check availability of features.
• Interface forcing (only on DIP DIGITAL).
• Reset.
For more information on the use of these MAINTENANCE functions, refer to the § Maintenance Menu in the DIP HMI chapter for the DIGITAL or ANALOG version.
4.3 Instant reading of alarms – DIGITAL DIP HMI
Refer to the § Instant reading of alarms in the HMI-DIP DIGITAL chapter.
The alarms monitored are:
Power on alarms
• Flash EPROM check
• DSP internal RAM check
• External RAM check
• CRC configuration
• Communication interface
• SR board missing
• Failed IRIG-B loopback test
• Failed loopback test
DIP/EN MT/A23
Maintenance
Page 12/40 e-terragridcom DIP
Alarms on the status of the equipment
• Test fault I/O board no.1
• Fault terminal block no.1
• Test fault I/O board no.2
• Fault terminal block no.2
• Main power supply fault
• Auxiliary power supply fault
• Battery voltage fault
• Command timeout
Alarms on communication
• Bit error rate / MAJAL
• Bit error rate / MINAL
• Loss of synchronization
• Remote major alarm
• Remote minor alarm
• Transmission time
For more information, refer to the HMI-DIP DIGITAL chapter.
4.4 Reading an alarms list DIP DIGITAL
Refer to the § Reading the list of alarms in the HMI-DIP DIGITAL chapter.
4.5 Reading alarms DIP IHM ANALOG
Refer to the § Instant reading of alarms in the HMI-DIP ANALOG chapter.
The alarms monitored are:
Power on alarms
• Failed Flash memory test
• Failed internal DSP RAM test
• Failed external DSP RAM test
• CRC error configuration database
• Communication interface error
• I/O power supply board missing
• Missing IRIG-B
• Failed loopback test
Maintenance
DIP/EN MT/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 13/40
Alarms on the status of the equipment
• Failed test I/O board no.1
• Missing terminal block no.1
• Failed test I/O board no.2
• No terminal block no.2
• Main power supply fault
• Auxiliary source fault
• Battery voltage fault
• Link test alarm
Alarms on communication
• Low level alarm
• Blocking
• External alarm
• Noise
• Tx command time alarm
4.6 Reading an alarms list DIP ANALOG
Refer to the § Reading the list of alarms in the HMI-DIP ANALOG chapter.
DIP/EN MT/A23
Maintenance
Page 14/40 e-terragridcom DIP
5. TESTS AND FAULT ISOLATION
5.1 Checks before repair
In case of malfunction, check the following points before applying the fault isolation procedure:
• Proper application of the power supply voltage to the DIP (power supply LED not lit).
• Wiring.
• External connection and circuit to which the DIP is connected (protection side, transmission medium, power supply, external alarm).
• Aspect of the mother board.
If communication between the PC HMI and the DIP cannot be set up, check the cable’s connection on the DIP side and PC side. Open the front panel of the DIP and check, if required, the internal connection between the RS 232 connector and the UT 148 board.
5.2 Fault isolation procedure
Most faults are notified by the LEDs (see § 3.1).
If a LED reports an alarm:
1. Determine the cause of the alarm using table 1.
2. Connect the PC and launch the HMI.
3. Read the alarm instant and notification messages.
4. Apply the repair procedure associated with the alarm (refer to the next paragraph Startup procedure).
Note: When replacing a board, apply the startup procedure (refer to the COMMISSIONING chapter).
In case of complex fault which cannot be resolved by a repair procedure (several simultaneous faults or failures with multiples impacts), use the maintenance commands and test tools (see § 4.2) to analyze or process the fault (a reset command may be useful).
5.3 Troubleshooting procedures
How to use this paragraph:
In case of alarm notification, refer to the associated figures:
• Figures 2 to 7 – Power on alarms (Digital and Analog)
• Figures 8 to 13 – Equipment status (Digital and Analog)
• Figures 14 to 21 – Communication alarms - Digital version
• Figures 22 to 24 – Communication alarms – Analog version
Note: In the following figures, the indications of the LEDs have been
translated. However, the actual indications on the front panel are shown in figure 1.
Maintenance
DIP/EN MT/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 15/40
PRECAUTIONS
INSERTING ELECTRONIC MODULES AND BOARDS:
THE ELECTRONIC MODULES AND BOARDS MUST BE NEITHER INSERTED NOR REMOVED FROM LIVE EQUIPMENT UNDER PAIN OF DAMAGE.
WHEN CHANGING A BOARD, CHECK THE HARDWARE CONFIGURATION OF THE SPARE BOARD, WHICH MUST BE IDENTICAL.
BEFORE ANY INTERVENTION ON THE OPTICAL INTERFACE BOARD, REMOVE ITS FASTENING SCREWS ON THE REAR PANEL.
THE OPTICAL BOARDS MUST BE FASTENED WITH THEIR SCREWS BEFORE CONNECTING THE OPTICAL FIBERS.
DIP/EN MT/A23
Maintenance
Page 16/40 e-terragridcom DIP
Power on alarms
Alarms at power on
Flash EPROM
DSP RAMRAM timer
Communication interface fault
IRIG-B coherence fault
Configuration checksum fault
Local loopback test fault
All these faults are
irreversible major faults
SUPPLY 1
MAJOR ALARM
Replaces the UT148 module148
I/O board coherence fault
See figure 3
D0137 FRd
Maintenance
Verr B.L SYNC AL. STATUT BAT.Maint
Lien
B.D/T
Maintenance
Verr B.L SYNC AL. STATUT BAT.Maint
Lien
B.D/T
SUPPLY 2
MINOR ALARM
Fault:
See figure 4
See figure 5
See figure 6
See figure 3
FIGURE 2 – POWER ON ALARMS
Maintenance
DIP/EN MT/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 17/40
Communication interface fault
Check that the Irxxx board is present
Is the board
present ?
Configuration
correct ?
Check the coherence / configuration
of the interface board
Fault of one of the modules
Change the UT148 board
and Irxxx board
The processor does not
recognise the communication
interface board
Insert the Irxxx board in its slot
Change the configuration
or the Irxxx module
Fault of the UT148
or Irxxx board
Yes
Yes
No
No
D0138 FRb
FIGURE 3 – POWER ON ALARMS – COMMUNICATION INTERFACE FAULT
SRxxx coherence fault
Check that the number of SRxxx
defined in the configuration
matches the number of
boards present.
Coherence correct ?
Fault of one of the modules
Change the faulty module
The configuration does
not correspond to
the number of boards present.
Change the configuration or
install a 2nd SRxxx board
Fault of the UT148 or SRxxx
boards or FB180 mother board
Yes
No
D0139FRe
FIGURE 4 – POWER ON ALARMS – SRXXX COHERENCE FAULT
DIP/EN MT/A23
Maintenance
Page 18/40 e-terragridcom DIP
IRIG-B coherence fault
Check that the IRIG-B interface
board is present
Is the board
present ?
Config
OK ?
Fault of one of the modules
Change the UT148 board
and/or IRIG-B board
Insert the IRIG-B board in its slot
Fault of the UT148
and/or IRIG-B board
Change the configuration
or IRIG-B board
Check the coherence / configuration
of the IRIG-B board
The processor does not
recognise the IRIG-B
interface board
Yes
Yes
No
No
D0140 FRa
FIGURE 5 – POWER ON ALARMS – IRIG-B COHERENCE FAULT
Maintenance
DIP/EN MT/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 19/40
Checksum fault
END
Reload the configuration
from the HMI
Fault cleared ?
Fault of the UT148 module
Change the UT148 module
The configuration
saved in the
Flash Eprom is corrupted
Faulty component on
the UT148 board
Yes
No
D0141FRb
FIGURE 6 – POWER ON ALARMS – CONFIGURATION CHECKSUM FAULT
Local loopback test fault
Fault on the Irxx communication
interface board or
the UT148 board
Change the Irxx board
Fault cleared ?
Fault of the UT148 module
Change the UT148 module
The local loopback test
on the communication
interface board has failed
Yes
Yes
END
D0142 FRb
FIGURE 7 – POWER ON ALARMS – LOCAL LOOPBACK TEST FAULT
DIP/EN MT/A23
Maintenance
Page 20/40 e-terragridcom DIP
Hardware related alarms
Hardware alarms
SR11x test fault
see figure 9
Major alarm
Operating terminal
block present
AL1xx power supply voltage
Battery voltage
Link test
(analog version only)
MAIN POWER SUPPLY
MAJOR ALARM
MINOR ALARM
MAIN POWER SUPPLY
MAJOR ALARM
MINOR ALARM
MAIN POWER SUPPLY
MAJOR ALARM
MINOR ALARM
MTN VERR BOUCLE SYNC AL DIST ETAT BAT
see figure 10
see figure 12
see figure 11
see figure 13
D0143FRd
FIGURE 8 – HARDWARE STATUS
Maintenance
DIP/EN MT/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 21/40
SRxxx module test fault
Record the number of
the faulty board
Read the version of the SRxxx
programmable logic
Board no. ?
EPLD SRxxx(1) =ZZ341x-yy
(X: version and yy: revision)
Firmware version
correct ?
Version firmware correcte ?
Change board
SRxxx no.1 (high)
EPLD of SRxxx no.1
not programmed
EPLD SRxxx(2) =ZZ341x-yy
(X: version and yy: revision)
Change board
SRxxx no.2 (low)
EPLD of SRxxx no.2
not programmed
No No
Yes Yes
Board no.1: high position
Board no.2: low position
(4 commands and 8 commands option)
Read / Local / Version
Firmware version
correct ?
D0144 FRc
No.1 No.2
FIGURE 9 – HARDWARE STATUS - SRXXX MODULE TEST FAULT
DIP/EN MT/A23
Maintenance
Page 22/40 e-terragridcom DIP
Terminal block
presence fault
Are terminal blocks
P10 to P13 present
at the back ?
Are the presence
‘bridges’ fitted onto
terminal blocks
P10 to P13 ?
Fault of one of the modules
Change the faulty module
Connect terminal blocks
P10 to P13
See User Manual
Install the presence ‘bridges’ on
connectors P10 to P13
Fault of the UT148 and/ or SRxxx
and or FB mother boards
No
No
Yes
Yes
D0145 FRc
FIGURE 10 – HARDWARE STATUS - TERMINAL BLOCK PRESENCE FAULT
Maintenance
DIP/EN MT/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 23/40
AL13x / AL14x power supply fault
Record the number of
the faulty board
Is the supply
indicator of the faulty
board lit ?
Is the faulty board
powered on
(ON/OFF switch) ?
Check the fuse
Fuse OK ?
Change the faulty AL13x /
AL14x module
Only in case of redundant power supplies: one of
the two AL13x / AL14x modules does not work
Board no.1: left
Board no.2: right
Change the faulty
AL13x / AL14x module
Power on the board
Change the fuse on
the faulty board
Faulty AL13x / AL14x module
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
D0146FRc
FIGURE 11 – HARDWARE STATUS - AL13X OE AL14X SUPPLY VOLTAGE FAULT
Battery voltage fault
Change the UT148 board Power cap battery faulty
D0147 FRb
FIGURE 12 – HARDWARE STATUS - TIME-STAMP BATTERY VOLTAGE FAULT
DIP/EN MT/A23
Maintenance
Page 24/40 e-terragridcom DIP
Link test fault
Fault on the IR183/UT148
boards of the local or remote DIP
Change the IR183 board on the
local DIP and restart the link test
Fault cleared ?
Change the UT148 board on the
local DIP and restart the link test
Fault cleared ?
Change the UT148 and/or
IR183 board on the remote DIP
Problem with the transmission
medium or threshold not
adapted to the flow
Check the transmission
medium
END
END
OR
D0148 FRb
FIGURE 13 – HARDWARE STATUS - LINK TEST ALARM
NOTE: Before performing the diagnostic, use the HMI to reset the local
equipment, then read the alarms again.
Maintenance
DIP/EN MT/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 25/40
Alarms on communication – DIP Digital
Minor/major alarm programmable by HMI
Communication alarms
(digital version)
Bit error rate alarm
Synch loss alarm
Major or minor
remote alarm
Communication
interface alarm
Transmission
time alarm
Tx command time alarm
See figure 15
See figure 16
See figure 17
See figure 18
See figure 19
See figure 20
D0149 FRd
MAIN POWER
MAJOR ALARM
AUX.POWER
MINOR ALARM
Maintenance
LCK LOOP SYNC STATUS BAT.MTN
LinkLoc . Dist.
REM AL.
FIGURE 14 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – DIGITAL VERSION
DIP/EN MT/A23
Maintenance
Page 26/40 e-terragridcom DIP
Bit error rate / MAJOR AL. Bit error rate / MINOR AL.
Problem in the transmission
medium or connection
Check quality of
the transmission medium
Check the connections
between the DIP and the ETCD
D0150 FRa
FIGURE 15 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – DIGITAL VERSION – BIT ERROR RATE
Maintenance
DIP/EN MT/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 27/40
Loss of synch
Check that the configuration of
the two link devices is compliant,
as well as the link
Number of
commands OK ?
Number of boards
OK ?
Logical address OK ?
Clock config. OK ?
Fault on IRxxx or UT148
Change the IRxxx module
Fault cleared ?
Change the UT148 module
Change the configuration
END END
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Master / slave OK ?
Yes
No
D0151 FRb
FIGURE 16 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – DIGITAL VERSION – SYNCH LOSS
DIP/EN MT/A23
Maintenance
Page 28/40 e-terragridcom DIP
Major remote alarm Minor remote alarm
Record the nature of the
fault on the remote unit
Repair the remote unit
Menu: <Read>
<Remote>
<Instant alarms>
ENDD0152 FRa
FIGURE 17 – REMOTE ALARMS
Communication interface alarm
No reception signal ?
Lack of rhythm ?
UT148 board or IRxx board fault
Change the UT148 board
and IRxx board
Check the ETCD signal
Lack of rhythm, only with V11
interface and G703.1
codirectional interface
Breach of HDB3 code,
with G703.6 interface
(2 Mbps)
Check the ETCD
clock signal
Yes
Yes
No
No
D0153 FRa
FIGURE 18 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – DIGITAL VERSION – COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
Maintenance
DIP/EN MT/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 29/40
Transmission time alarm
Increase the detection
threshold of the
transmission time alarm
Problem with the transmission
medium or threshold
not adapted to the flow
Check the transmission
mediumOR
D0154FRa
FIGURE 19 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – DIGITAL VERSION – TRANSMISSION TIME
Tx command time alarm fault
At least 1
input active ?
Voltage on at
least 1 input ?
Local reading of the Input /
Output condition
Check the input wiring
Change the SRxxx module
for the active input
Change the UT148 moduleNo
No
Yes
Yes
D0155FRc
FIGURE 20 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – DIGITAL VERSION – TX COMMAND TIME
NOTE: Before performing the diagnostic, use the HMI to reset the local
equipment, then read the alarms again.
DIP/EN MT/A23
Maintenance
Page 30/40 e-terragridcom DIP
Alarms on communication – DIP Analog
Communication alarms(analog version)
No guard or
low level alarm
External alarm
Tx command time alarm
See figure 22
Major/minor alarm
programmable by HMI
Noise alarm (DT)
Locking alarm (DT)
Minor alarm
See figure 23
See figure 24
See figure 22
See figure 22
Minor alarm
Major/minor alarm
programmable by HMI
D0156FRd
SUPPLY 1
MAJOR ALARM
SUPPLY 2
MINOR ALARM
Maintenance
Verr B.L SYNC AL. STATUT BAT.Maint
Lien
B.D/T
SUPPLY 1
MAJOR ALARM
SUPPLY 2
MINOR ALARM
SUPPLY 1
MAJOR ALARM
SUPPLY 2
MINOR ALARM
SUPPLY 1
MAJOR ALARM
SUPPLY 2
MINOR ALARM
FIGURE 21 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – ANALOG VERSION
Maintenance
DIP/EN MT/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 31/40
No guard or low level alarm
Check that the configuration
of both link units is compliant,
as the link
Number of
commands OK ?
Number of boards
OK ?
No
No
Yes
Fault on IR183 or
UT148
Change the IR183 module
Change the UT148 module
Fault cleared ?
Noise alarm (DT) Locking alarm (DT)
Change the configuration
Yes
No
End EndD0157FRc
Yes
FIGURE 22 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – ANALOG VERSION – NO GUARD / LOW LEVEL / NOISE - BLOCKING
DIP/EN MT/A23
Maintenance
Page 32/40 e-terragridcom DIP
External alarm
Check the EN (A/B)
input on the line communication port
Fault cleared ?
Change the IR183 module
Fault cleared ?
Change the UT148 module
END
ENDYes
Yes
No
No
D0158 FRa
FIGURE 23 – COMMUNICATION ALARMS – ANALOG VERSION – EXTERNAL ALARM
Maintenance
DIP/EN MT/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 33/40
5.4 Warning and error messages
These messages are displayed to notify the user in case of error and risk of untimely commands, or supply instructions allowing to resolve a fault.
Miscellaneous messages
or warnings
Teleprotection not ready
(local or remote)
Checksum error
Too many
transmission errors
PC disconnected
Transmission timeout
Database checksum
fault
The DIP is processing
a higher priority even
(e.g. command restitution)
An error occurred during
communication over the V24 link
Repeat the operation.
Fault in the V24 dialogue box.
Restart the HMI or reset
teleprotection manually.
The PC < - - > Teleprotection
connecting conductor has been
disconnected or damaged.
The unit has not responded within
the time set. Establish
a new connection.
An error occurred during
data transfer. Repeat the operation.
Cont’d
D0159 FRa
FIGURE 24 – MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGES
DIP/EN MT/A23
Maintenance
Page 34/40 e-terragridcom DIP
Miscellaneous messages
or warnings (cont’d)
The command will be
transmitted online.
Switch the local unit to
the ‘Line locking’mode
The local commands
are activated.
Switch the local unit to
the ‘Relay locking’ mode
The local commands
are activated
The action started may
generate an untimely
command on the remote unit.
OR
OR
Switch the remote unit
in the ‘Relay locking’
mode
Disconnect the
output connectors
from the local unit.
Risk associated to
remote unit loopback
The action started may
generate an untimely
command on the local unit.
Disconnect the remote
unit output connectors.
ENDD0160 FRa
FIGURE 25 – MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGES (CONT’D)
Maintenance
DIP/EN MT/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 35/40
6. CLASSIFICATION OF FAULTS
Faults are distributed into two classes: major and minor
Major faults
A major fault is a fault whose appearance inhibits the normal operation of the equipment or causes a risk for operation. In all cases, it results in the command restitution relays being set to idle. The relays are held in this status until the fault disappears.
Minor faults
A minor fault is a fault whose appearance does not cause risks for operation. In this case, normal operation of the equipment is ensured.
Faults are distributed into two types: reversible and irreversible
Reversible faults
Reversible faults indicate an abnormal operating condition at a given time. Teleprotection returns to a normal operating mode once the fault disappears.
Irreversible faults
Irreversible faults indicate permanent non operation of the link or equipment. Manual intervention (including powering back on or resetting) is required.
Faults are distributed into 3 categories: power on / hardware / communication
DIP/EN MT/A23
Maintenance
Page 36/40 e-terragridcom DIP
The following table summarizes the faults classified per category with information related to the class and type of fault:
FAULTS CLASS TYPE VERSION**
‘Power on’ faults
Time stamp RAM test MAJ IRREV
DSP RAM test MAJ IRREV
Flash EPROM test MAJ IRREV
Communication interface present MAJ IRREV
Loopback test MAJ IRREV
Configuration checksum MAJ IRREV
SRxxx coherence test MAJ IRREV
IRIG-B coherence test MAJ IRREV
IR183 coherence test MAJ IRREV A
‘Hardware’ faults
Presence of SRxxx modules MAJ REV
AL1XX fault MIN REV
Presence of operating terminal blocks MIN REV
Battery fault (time stamp) MIN IRREV
I/O test MAJ IRREV
UT power supply voltage test MAJ REV
Link test MAJ IRREV A
‘Communication’ faults
Transmission time alarm MIN/MAJ* REV D
No signal received MAJ REV D
No Rx pace MAJ REV D
No Tx pace MAJ REV D
Loss of synchronization MAJ REV D
Bit error rate / MAJ ALARM MAJ REV D
Bit error rate / MIN ALARM MIN REV D
Remote major alarm MAJ REV D
Remote minor alarm MIN REV D
Extended Tx command alarm MIN/MAJ* REV
No guard MAJ REV A
Low level MAJ REV A
Blocking MAJ REV Dual tone***
Noise MAJ REV Dual tone
External alarm MIN/MAJ* REV A
* configuration with HMI
** In the Version column, the letter D indicates that the fault concerns only the digital version of the DIP. The letter A indicates the fault concerns only the analog version. The lack of letter in this column means that the fault concerns both versions.
Faults of the remote equipment are reported locally. They are considered as reversible regardless of their nature. Resolving the remote fault results in the local alarm disappearing.
Maintenance
DIP/EN MT/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 37/40
7. UPDATE OF THE DIP FIRMWARE
Software updates always come with a risk. In case of blocking, the UT148 board must be returned to the factory to reset the memories.
7.1 Overview
The update procedure includes four steps:
• Prior conditions.
• Installing files on the PC.
• Transferring update files.
During this step, the files are written in flash memory UT148 (a file is copied in 30 seconds).
• Connecting the DIP.
7.2 Prior conditions
During the update procedure, the equipment must be disconnected to prevent any untimely command.
Before applying the update procedure:
• Power off the DIP unit.
• Disconnect the I/O connectors P11 to P13.
• Disconnect connector P18 providing access to the transmission line.
• Disconnect the optical connector of the IR 182 module if connected.
• Power on the DIP unit.
7.3 Installing files on the PC
The update is supplied on a compressed file containing 2 files: Diptsoft.dat and Lisezmoi.txt.
• Create a temporary directory on the PC HD (e.g. C:\diptemp).
• Copy the update zip file into the directory created.
• Use Winzip to extract the dipsoft.dat and lisezmoi.txt files into the directory created.
• Open the lisezmoi.txt file using a text editor.
DIP/EN MT/A23
Maintenance
Page 38/40 e-terragridcom DIP
• Copy the update password for later use:
• Copy the dipsoft.dat file into the installation directory of the HMI application on the PC (by default: C:\ Program Files \ ALSTOM \ IHM DIP\). If another dipsoft.dat file is already present, a message asks whether you wish to replace it, answer YES.
7.4 Transferring update files
Once the update procedure launched, do not interrupt it by resetting, nor powering off the DIP nor disconnecting the serial link. If this rule is not applied, the unit may be damaged, requiring a return to the factory.
1. Check the step on prior conditions (disconnect the DIP).
2. Power on the DIP unit.
3. Connect the RS 232 serial communication cable between the PC and the DIP.
4. Start the HMI application.
5. Connect the HMI from the DIP Tools \ connect:
6. Select the menu Tools \ Password.
7. Enter the 15-character password copied in the lisezmoi.txt file (the password can be copied/pasted from this file):
Maintenance
DIP/EN MT/A23
e-terragridcom DIP Page 39/40
8. Click the button. The following window opens:
This window indicates the current DSP and EPLD version, as well as the versions to download.
9. Click the button.
10. Notification messages appear with information on the file transfer:
When all files have been transferred successfully, the DIP is reset.
11. Reset the list of events and alarms upon the update from the previous digital version to the ZZ339A-05 version or the analog version ZZ350A-03.
12. Check that the DIP version complies with the update version by selecting the menu Read\local\version.
13. Remove the C:\ diptemp directory, then the dipsoft.dat file from the HMI directory.
Note: In case of communication problem between the PC HMI and the DIP, a message indicating a transmission problem and a prompt to restart the procedure may appear: Continue the update file transfer procedure from step 4.
DIP/EN MT/A23
Maintenance
Page 40/40 e-terragridcom DIP
14. At the end of the procedure, the DIP unit resets automatically, and the following message may be displayed. Ignore it.
7.5 Connecting the DIP
1. Power off the DIP unit.
2. Connect the connectors.
3. Power on the DIP unit.
4. Reset the lists of events, alarms and counters.
5. Log onto the DIP with the HMI matching the new version.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23SINGLE TONE e-terragridcom DIP
HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE
PART 1: DIP - ANALOG SINGLE TONE
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
SINGLE TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 1/68
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 7
2. HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL 8
2.1 Information presentation 8
2.2 Example in a paragraph 8
3. OVERVIEW 9
3.1 Foreword 9
3.2 System Required 9
3.3 Installing the HMI 9
4. USER LEVELS AND PASSWORDS 10
4.1 User level structure 10
4.2 Menus 11
5. DIP PASSWORD MANAGEMENT 12
5.1 Rules for Password Creation 12
5.2 Accessing the Password Manager Menus with the <Password> Menu 12
5.3 Modifying the Password Manager password with the Password Menu 13
5.4 Creating User Password with the <Create> Menu 14
5.5 Managing the Password listing with the Menu <List passwords> 14
5.6 Exiting the Password Manager 14
6. INTERFACE DESCRIPTION 15
6.1 Main screen 15
6.2 Header bar 15
6.3 Menu bar 16
6.4 Toolbar 16
6.5 Status bars 16
6.6 Work and dialog zone 17
7. FUNCTIONALITIES DESCRIPTION 18
7.1 <Tools> Menu 18
7.2 <File> Menu 18
7.3 <DIP> Menu 19
7.4 <History> Menu 19
7.5 <Test> Menu 19
8. OPERATING THE HMI DIP – SINGLE TONE 20
8.1 Launching the HMI 20
8.2 Logging into the DIP 20
8.3 <Tools> Menu 21
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 2/68 e-terragridcom DIP
8.3.1 Entering a password 21
8.3.2 Returning to level 0 21
8.3.3 Disconnecting the HMI 22
8.3.4 Exit the HMI. 22
8.4 <File> Menu 23
8.5 Creating a configuration File>New> 23
8.5.1 Description of the configuration window 24
8.5.2 Configuration window toolbar 25
8.6 Configuring General Parameters 25
8.6.1 Configuring the number of commands 26
8.6.2 Configuring the version 26
8.6.3 Configuring IRIG-B 27
8.6.4 Configuring HMI speed 27
8.6.5 Configuring Logical Address 27
8.6.6 Entering comments 27
8.6.7 Configuring the link test 28
8.6.8 Sending the general parameters configuration to the DIP equipment 28
8.7 Configuring Sender Parameters 29
8.7.1 Configuring the Guard source 29
8.7.2 Configuring the sender band used 30
8.7.3 Configuring sender transmission levels 30
8.7.4 Configuring Command transmission parameters 31
8.7.5 Sender Transmission parameter configuration procedure 33
8.7.6 Sending the general parameters configuration to the DIP equipment 34
8.8 Configuring Receiver Parameters 35
8.8.1 Configuring LF band 35
8.8.2 Configuring Receiver Input Level 36
8.8.3 Configuring Receiver Protection Scheme 36
8.8.4 Configuring the status of the output relay upon the alarm 37
8.8.5 Receiver holding delay configuration 37
8.8.6 Configuring unblocking parameters 38
8.8.7 Sending Receiver Parameter Configuration 38
8.9 Configuring Input/output Parameters 39
8.9.1 Configuring the I/O board 39
8.9.2 Configuring Input Filter Delay 40
8.9.3 Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs 40
8.9.4 Sending Input/Output Configuration 41
8.10 Configuring alarm parameters 42
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
SINGLE TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 3/68
8.10.1 Configuring Alarm on External Input 42
8.10.2 Configuring Input Duration Command Alarm 43
8.10.3 Configuring Loss of Signal Alarm 43
8.10.4 Configuring the Alarm outputs delay parameter 44
8.10.5 Sending the alarms configuration 44
8.11 <Configuration> File Menu 45
8.11.1 Editing a configuration file 45
8.11.2 Saving a configuration file 46
8.11.3 Sending a configuration file 46
8.11.4 Closing a configuration file 46
8.12 <DIP> Menu 46
8.12.1 Reading the configuration 47
8.12.2 Reading the hardware configuration 48
8.12.3 Reading the versions 48
8.12.4 Instant alarm reading 49
8.12.5 Read input / output statuses 49
8.13 DIP>Maintenance menu 50
8.13.1 Switching from the Maintenance mode to the Normal mode and vice-versa 51
8.13.2 Maintenance status bar 52
8.13.3 Reading the input levels measurement 52
8.13.4 Configuring the output levels setting 53
8.13.5 Configuring the reception level 53
8.13.6 Maintenance - Forcing 55
8.14 Date setup 60
8.15 Resetting the DIP 61
8.16 <History> Menu 61
8.16.1 Events reading 62
8.16.2 Alarms reading 63
8.16.3 Reading the local command counters 64
8.16.4 Deleting events 64
8.16.5 Deleting alarms 65
8.17 <Test> Menu 66
8.18 <Factory> Menu 66
8.19 <Help> Menu 66
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 4/68 e-terragridcom DIP
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1 – MAIN SCREEN BEFORE PC/TELEPROTECTION CONNECTION 15
FIGURE 3 – MENU BAR 16
FIGURE 4 – TOOLBAR 16
FIGURE 5 – STATUS BAR 16
FIGURE 6 – EXAMPLE OF DIALOG BOX WITH LIST DISPLAY 17
FIGURE 7 – TOOLS MENU 21
FIGURE 8 – MAIN CONFIGURATION WINDOW 24
FIGURE 9 – TOOLBAR 25
FIGURE 10 – CONFIGURATION SYNTHESIS WINDOW 25
FIGURE 11 – CONFIGURATION – GENERAL TAB PAGE 26
FIGURE 12 – CONFIGURATION – SENDER TAB PAGE 29
FIGURE 13 – CONFIGURATION – RECEIVER TAB PAGE 35
FIGURE 14 – CONFIGURATION - INPUT/OUTPUT TAB PAGE 39
FIGURE 15 – CONFIGURATION – ALARMS TAB PAGE 42
FIGURE 16 – CONFIGURATION EXIT MENU 45
FIGURE 17 – HARDWARE CONFIGURATION WINDOW 48
FIGURE 18 – VERSION WINDOW 48
FIGURE 19 – INSTANT ALARMS WINDOW 49
FIGURE 20 – INPUT / OUTPUT WINDOW 49
FIGURE 21 – MAINTENANCE LEVELS 51
FIGURE 22 – MAINTENANCE MENU 51
FIGURE 23 – MAINTENANCE STATUS BAR 52
FIGURE 24 – MAINTENANCE - FORCING 55
FIGURE 25 – EXAMPLE OF READ EVENTS LIST 62
FIGURE 26 – EXAMPLE OF READ ALARMS LIST 63
FIGURE 27 – EXAMPLE OF READ OF COUNTER STATUS 64
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
SINGLE TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 5/68
MODIFICATIONS PAGE
VERSION DATE COMMENTS
A 04/01/2001 Original issue
B 23/08/2004 ALSTOM logo and addition of analog version
C 12/07/2006 New features and additional technical explanations
D 14/11/2007 New chapter. Task oriented writing. HMI chapter separated in three sections: digital, single tone analog and double tone analog.
E 11/02/2008 Minor corrections
A22 20/02/2009 Minor corrections
B22 01/06/2010 Minor corrections
A23 13/01/2011 New version 2.3
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 6/68 e-terragridcom DIP
GENERAL
This manual describes the Human-Machine interface of the DIP, i.e. the software application which enables commissioning, operational use and maintenance of this unit.
DEFINITIONS
HMI Tool for using the DIP (Human-Machine Interface).
Configuration All the characteristics (fixed components) and parameters (customization components) of a teleprotection.
Configuration File Micro-computer file containing all the configuration components of a teleprotection.
Input password Password for accessing the ‘Password Manager’ utility.
User level All the authorized operations corresponding to the level of responsibility of a given operator.
Level password Password for accessing a user level.
NOTE: Windows and PC are registered trademarks.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
SINGLE TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 7/68
1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY SECTION DIP5K/EN SS/A11 OR LATER ISSUE, THE TECHNICAL DATA SECTION AND THE RATING ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.
THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED RS232C(1)
SERIAL PORT IS AN EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. WHEN THE TELEPROTECTION IS ENERGIZED, THE TERMINALS OF THIS PORT SHOULD NOT BE TOUCHED SINCE IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF A SINGLE FAULT CONDITION THERE WOULD BE A VERY LOW PROBABILITY OF AN ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS DESIGNED TO BE USED FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, THAT IS MONITORING AND SOFTWARE DOWNLOADS; IT IS NOT INTENDED TO BE PERMANENTLY CONNECTED.
THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED RJ45(1)
SERIAL PORT IS AN EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS INTENDED TO BE USED FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, I.E. MONITORING AND DOWNLOADING THE SOFTWARE.
(1) As per the option chosen
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 8/68 e-terragridcom DIP
2. HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL
• The firmware or software version numbers which may appear in illustrations in this manual may not reflect the latest implemented in the unit; the information is nonetheless current.
2.1 Information presentation
• Menu Path are indicated: Menu_level_entry1 >Menu_level_entry2>.
Example: select File >New.
• In the text Menu names are between <> example: Example: <DIP> menu.
• In the text window names are between <>. Example: <Entry>.
• A screen shot shows a button. Example: represents the OK button.
2.2 Example in a paragraph
<HISTORY> MENU NAME BETWEEN <>
To clear events:
Select History>Clear>Clear events
A <Confirmation> window opens:
Answer
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
SINGLE TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 9/68
3. OVERVIEW
3.1 Foreword
As it is powerful and easy to use, the DIP Analog teleprotection HMI enables local:
• complete commissioning of the unit and control of its levels, without the need for other tools,
• level adjustment without measuring apparatus,
• filing of configurations (=>rationalization of commissioning actions),
• time-stamped recording of unit information (=> analysis and statistics),
• interactive and user-friendly maintenance,
• printing of unit parameters.
3.2 System Required
The HMI runs on PCs fitted equipped with Pentium III microprocessors and higher, operating under Windows 2000 Service Pack 4 or Windows XP Service Pack 2. The PC must feature at minimum:
• 40 MB free space on the HD,
• 256 MB RAM.
IMPORTANT: HAVING SEVERAL TASKS RUNNING CONCURRENTLY (DESKTOP OR OTHER TOOLS) MAY CAUSE PC-HMI TRANSMISSION FAULTS. THEREFORE, ALL OTHER APPLICATIONS SHOULD BE CLOSED BEFORE USING THIS HMI.
When the PC has no serial port, use a PCMCIA converter. Experience shows that USB converters offer lesser compatibility.
3.3 Installing the HMI
Installation:
• Insert the CD-ROM supplied in the drive.
• Run the setup.exe file from the <Run> menu in the Program manager: D\:setup.
• Follow the instructions.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 10/68 e-terragridcom DIP
4. USER LEVELS AND PASSWORDS
4.1 User level structure
The DIP places operations in hierarchical command: some actions have no impact on unit operation, others, due to their impact on security and operation, require specific responsibility on the part of the operator.
The HMI is therefore structured in user levels; there are 2 of them, 0 and 2.
Level 0 is the default level on start-up. To enforce this hierarchical arrangement, the command menus are displayed according to user level.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
SINGLE TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 11/68
4.2 Menus
Level
Menus 0 2
File new x x
open x x
Tools Identification x x
Returning to level 0 x x
connect x x
disconnect x x
exit x x
DIP * configuration x x
hardware configuration x x
version x x
alarms snapshot x x
input/output x x
reset x
DIP / Date * read x x
write x
DIP / Maintenance * input level measure x x
output levels setting, adjustment receiving alignment and automatic alignment
x
switch to maintenance mode x
unlocking line (security) x
unlocking relay (security) x
local loop back x
transmitter forcing x
commands output forcing x
alarms forcing x
Test * link test x
History * event list x x
alarm list x x
counter list x x
clear event file x
clear alarm file x
Help x x
TABLE 1 – MENU ACCESSIBILITY ACCORDING TO USER LEVEL
* To access these menus, you need to be connected.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 12/68 e-terragridcom DIP
5. DIP PASSWORD MANAGEMENT
The DIP Security Password Manager application, associated to the HMI application, is used to create, modify, read and delete the passwords.
To launch the application, click the desktop icon “DIP Security” icon or open the DIP group of programs and select it.
For security reasons, access to the Password Manager is password protected.
5.1 Rules for Password Creation
Passwords are case sensitive (Upper or lower) and include 1 to 15 characters to be chosen exclusively from the following:
• upper case (A to Z)
• lower case (a to z)
• numbers (0 to 9)
• ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ¨ | ~
5.2 Accessing the Password Manager Menus with the <Password> Menu
The <Password> menu enables you to access the Password manager menus: <Create> and < List passwords >.
To access the Password Manager menus:
1. Launch the DIP Security application by clicking the desktop icon. The <DIP password management > window opens:
2. Select Password > Input, the < Password Input> window opens:
3. Enter "DIP5000" upper case without the quotes in both windows (only upon first login).
Note: Modifying the Password Manager password is recommended upon the first use (see the next paragraph).
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
SINGLE TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 13/68
4. Click the button.
The following window opens:
The <Create> and <List Passwords> menus are available.
5.3 Modifying the Password Manager password with the Password Menu
The password Manager menu allows you to modify the password manager password.
Upon first use, use the DIP password (upper case). We recommend to then modify this password.
1. Access the Manager menu (see § 5.2)
2. Select Password > Modify. The following window opens:
3. Enter the new password in compliance with the rules for Password Creation (see § 5.1).
Carefully note the new password. If you lose it the application must be reinstalled.
1. Click the button. The following window opens:
2. Confirm the new password by re-entering it.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 14/68 e-terragridcom DIP
5.4 Creating User Password with the <Create> Menu
Several passwords may be created.
1. To create user passwords, select < Create password >.
The <Create password > window below opens:
2. Enter the new password in the < Input password > window, in compliance with the rules
for Password Creation (see § 5.1). Enter the password again in the field ‘Confirm password’.
3. Click the button.
4. If required, you may enter other passwords to be defined in the <Enter password> window.
5.5 Managing the Password listing with the Menu <List passwords>
To access the Password List, click the Menu <List Passwords> in the Password Manager
The list of passwords is displayed.
1. To Remove a password, select the password line in the list and click the button. A confirmation message is then displayed, Answer yes.
5.6 Exiting the Password Manager
To exit the password manager and return to the WINDOWS environment select Password>Exit.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
SINGLE TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 15/68
6. INTERFACE DESCRIPTION
The HMI has an integrated environment, using standard WINDOWS tools and processes.
As only the operating modes specific to the HMI will be mentioned in the following, it is recommended that operators not familiar with WINDOWS refer to the user manual for this environment.
6.1 Main screen
The main screen is composed of functional zones (see the following figures)
FIGURE 1 – MAIN SCREEN BEFORE PC/TELEPROTECTION CONNECTION
FIGURE 2 – EXAMPLE OF MAIN SCREEN AFTER PC/ DIP CONNECTION
6.2 Header bar
The header bar displays the HMI name at the top part of the window.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 16/68 e-terragridcom DIP
6.3 Menu bar
The operator launches commands via the standard WINDOWS menus, displayed according to the current user level (password dependent).
FIGURE 3 – MENU BAR
6.4 Toolbar
The operator can launch commands and read information locally via the toolbar shortcuts
Rolling the mouse over a tool displays information on its function.
FIGURE 4 – TOOLBAR
6.5 Status bars
Depending on the user level and the type of operation in progress, status bars can appear displaying the following information.
The bottom bar displays:
• the connection status (HMI) (connect/disconnect icon)
• the link address
• the transmission speed of serial port (HMI connection)
• the current operating mode (Operation/Maintenance)
• any alarm present (clicking in this zone opens a window displaying the faults that have triggered this alarm)
• the user level granted (from 0 to 2 depending on the password)
• a green led indicating the connection status (OK when flashing)
• the DSP firmware version
FIGURE 5 – STATUS BAR
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
SINGLE TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 17/68
6.6 Work and dialog zone
Most commands are also issued using dialogue boxes (see figure 6 below). Six standard Windows tools are used:
• optional button groups
• tick boxes
• command buttons
• text boxes
• lists
• scroll bars
FIGURE 6 – EXAMPLE OF DIALOG BOX WITH LIST DISPLAY
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 18/68 e-terragridcom DIP
7. FUNCTIONALITIES DESCRIPTION
7.1 <Tools> Menu
Identification: this menu is used to open a window to enter the password and access the corresponding user level. Access to the upper level is protected by password.
Back to level 0: this menu allows to return to level 0, the lowest level of privilege.
Disconnect: this menu disconnects the HMI from the DIP.
Exit: this menu closes the DIP HMI application.
7.2 <File> Menu
New: Creates a configuration file from a default configuration in a DIP version (Single tone or Dual tone). When selected a pop-up window opens asking you to choose DIP version (Single tone or Dual tone)
Open: Selecting this menu allows the following to be opened:
• Events files (*.events),
• Alarm files (*.alarms),
• Counters files (*.cnter),
• Config files: Configuration Files.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
SINGLE TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 19/68
7.3 <DIP> Menu
This menu enables you to read the following parameters on the local unit:
• Configuration: Read and modify all configuration parameters,
• Hardware configuration: Read hardware configuration parameters,
• Maintenance: Used to launch measures, adjust levels and for forcing.
• Alarms preview: provides a view of the current alarm status,
• Inputs / Outputs: read input and output status.
• Versions: read firmware versions.
• Date Setup: read and write the date and time on the unit.
• Reset: performs hardware and software resets on the unit.
7.4 <History> Menu
• Events: read and display event list.
• Alarms: read and display alarms list.
• Counters: display the status of input/output commands counters. Counter Information can be saved and printed.
• Erase: via two sub menus <Erase Events> and <Erase Alarms>, allows event and alarm logs to be deleted from the unit.
7.5 <Test> Menu
This menu enables you to perform a link test on the equipment.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 20/68 e-terragridcom DIP
8. OPERATING THE HMI DIP – SINGLE TONE
8.1 Launching the HMI
To launch the HMI, click:
Start>Programs>HMIDIP5K>HMIDIP5K>
or by clicking the Desktop HMIDIP5K shortcut.
Launching the DIP HMI allows to:
• log into a DIP
• create a configuration
• modify an existing configuration saved in the PC.
8.2 Logging into the DIP
To log in, click the Connect icon or open the <Tools> menu:
and select <Local connect> to open the <Login> window.
You can choose among the ports found automatically by the HMI or the favorites defined beforehand. To create a new favorite, right-click the location where you wish to place the favorite.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
SINGLE TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 21/68
8.3 <Tools> Menu
Once logged in, the <Tools> menu is used to:
• grant a level to a user according to a password,
• reset the user level to 0,
• disconnect the HMI from the DIP,
• exit the HMI.
FIGURE 7 – TOOLS MENU
8.3.1 Entering a password
When the HMI is opened without entering a password the level user granted is 0.
To access the higher level 2, the user must enter a password. For more details about user level and password management see § 4. and § 5.
To enter a password:
1. Select Tools>Identification. The following window opens:
2. Enter the password. If the DIP has a password, only this password allows to raise the
HMI to user level 2.
3. Check the level granted (according to the password) in the status bar.
8.3.2 Returning to level 0
The user may return to level 0 at any time.
To set the user level to 0:
1. Select Tools>Return to level 0.
2. Check the user level in the bottom bar.
The DIP can, optionally, have an embedded password.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 22/68 e-terragridcom DIP
If you are already a level 2 user, the menu is:
You can also change the embedded password by using this menu option. Please note that if you forget the embedded password, it may be reset only by returning the motherboard (UT148) to the plant.
8.3.3 Disconnecting the HMI
1. Select Tools>Disconnect
2. The HMI is disconnected, the <DIP>, <History> menu disappears. The following icons in the upper bar are grayed out and inaccessible:
Information is no longer displayed in the bottom status bar (only is visible).
8.3.4 Exit the HMI.
To exit the HMI:
Select Tools>Exit.
A confirmation messages appears.
Answer .
The HMI closes.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
SINGLE TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 23/68
8.4 <File> Menu
The <File> menu provides access to the configuration files.
This menu allows a new configuration to be created or a saved configuration file to be opened.
4 types of file can be opened:
• *.rtf -> existing configuration file, this selection will open a window (see Figure 10 for the window display).
• *.alarms -> alarm list file for consultation (see figure 27 for the window display)
• *.events -> event list file for consultation (see figure 26 for the window display)
• *.cnter -> counter statement for consultation ( see figure 28 for the window display)
The configuration of new unit or reconfiguration of an existing unit involves creating a configuration file:
• Select File>New or File>Open,
• Select the DIP Single Tone version in the <Version selection> window after clicking File>New.
• Modify the configuration displayed or create a new configuration,
• Save the changed configuration (File>Save).
Configuration creation is available regardless of PC/DIP connection status, and from level 0. As this availability enables off-site creation and the preparation of configuration libraries, it optimizes commissioning and maintenance operations.
The configuration of the unit can be modified by reading the configuration:
• Select DIP>Configuration.
• Modify the displayed configuration.
• Save the changed configuration (File>Save).
8.5 Creating a configuration File>New>
This menu allows a new configuration to be created on the basis of a default configuration. This configuration can be modified, saved for later use (even at level 0), or sent to the unit (level2).
1. Selecting the File>New menu opens the <Version selection> asking for the DIP version.
2. Select Single tone in the scroll-down window and click OK.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 24/68 e-terragridcom DIP
Once the DIP version selected, a default configuration window opens.
FIGURE 8 – MAIN CONFIGURATION WINDOW
8.5.1 Description of the configuration window
The configuration parameters are divided in 5 tabs:
• General
• Sender
• Receiver
• Input/Output
• Alarms
This configuration window is used access to the following parameters:
• Number of commands
• Version (Normal / Enhanced)
• Comments
• HMI Speed
• Link test
• Logical address
• IRIG-B State
• Sender parameters
• Receiver parameters
• Input/Output parameters
• Alarms
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
SINGLE TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 25/68
8.5.2 Configuration window toolbar
FIGURE 9 – TOOLBAR
Clicking the button opens a Synthesis Window displaying the DIP Configuration parameters in text format:
FIGURE 10 – CONFIGURATION SYNTHESIS WINDOW
8.6 Configuring General Parameters
To configure the general parameters:
Open the <Configuration> window (see § 8.4).
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 26/68 e-terragridcom DIP
FIGURE 11 – CONFIGURATION – GENERAL TAB PAGE
8.6.1 Configuring the number of commands
Select the value matching the configuration by checking the corresponding button.
8.6.2 Configuring the version
Select the version:
• Normal: power available for a signal command cannot be modified in this mode, as it depends on the number of commands. The total power available is distributed evenly among the number of commands.
• Enhanced: the power available for a signal command is adjusted automatically, according to the number of commands to be sent at a given time, and power authorized on the medium. Indeed, all the power available for an command is allocated according to variable conditions.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
SINGLE TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 27/68
8.6.3 Configuring IRIG-B
In case of IRIG-B module presence, check On.
Connect the GPS equipment to the P20 connector.
Synchronize the DIP date to the external source (one synchronization signal every 30 seconds).
8.6.4 Configuring HMI speed
Select the 600, 1200, 2400, 4800 or 9600 bps value by checking the corresponding button.
8.6.5 Configuring Logical Address
Range value 0 to 255.
8.6.6 Entering comments
Enter the Source Station, the Destination Station, and your comments in compliance with the following rules:
• Source and destination stations: 20 characters maximum.
• Comments: 70 characters maximum.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 28/68 e-terragridcom DIP
8.6.7 Configuring the link test
The Link Test feature is used to automatically and periodically check the transmission medium between the sender and the receiver, by sending a message in a loop.
To schedule transmission test:
Select the test periodicity by checking the corresponding button:
• Daily: in this case enter the hour and minutes using the scroll-down window.
• Hourly: in this case enter the minutes using the scroll-down window.
8.6.8 Sending the general parameters configuration to the DIP equipment
When you have completed General Parameters configuration as described above:
Click the button. The following window opens:
The DIP resets.
Check the condition of the LEDs after reset. Please note that after each configuration transfer to the DIP, the user is returned to password level 0. a password is then required to return to level 2.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
SINGLE TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 29/68
8.7 Configuring Sender Parameters
To configure the Sender parameters:
Open the <Configuration> window (see § 8.4).
Click the Sender Tab. The following window opens:
FIGURE 12 – CONFIGURATION – SENDER TAB PAGE
8.7.1 Configuring the Guard source
Select the Guard source:
• Internal: the source is the DIP equipment.
• External: the source comes from an external unit (PLC or other).
Note: The Useful LF Band Guard parameter depends on the Guard Source parameter. Therefore, the Guard Source parameter must be configured first.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 30/68 e-terragridcom DIP
8.7.2 Configuring the sender band used
The Bandwidth is a technical characteristic of the medium used corresponding to its signal transmission capacity.
Depending on the characteristics of the medium, select the appropriate bandwidth via the Bandwidth scroll-down window.
Possible values are:
• 300 - 2000
• 300 - 2400
• 300 - 3400
Select the Guard parameter in the appropriate scrolling menu.
The Guard parameter depends on the <Bandwidth> parameter:
• 3680 for the 300-3400 bandwidth
• 2600 for the 300-2400 bandwidth
• 2400 or 3680 for the 300-2000 bandwidth
8.7.3 Configuring sender transmission levels
The Transmission level corresponds to the signal power allocated to a Frequency and to the Guard.
The value range is -30 dBm to 6 dBm, the display accuracy is 0,1 dBm.
To configure Transmission levels For Guard and Frequency 1 to 4:
Select, using the scrolling button, the Transmission level in compliance with the following rule:
The difference between sending frequency transmission levels must not exceed 16 dBm. If this rule is not applied, a warning message appears when attempting to save the configuration file.
If this warning message appears, modify the transmission levels in consequence.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
SINGLE TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 31/68
8.7.4 Configuring Command transmission parameters
The transmission of an input command requires the following parameters to be configured:
• Holding Delay
• Mode pulsed or not
• Input Holding delay validation
• Protection scheme
8.7.4.1 Receiver holding delay configuration
Holding delay Parameter description
The Holding Delay parameter corresponds to the minimum transmission time of a validated command. However, if the corresponding pulsed mode box is checked, this time is a maximum, as shown above.
The transmission time is the maximum value between the Holding Delay and the input signal command duration.
Example:
Holding delay: 100 ms.
A first input signal command duration is 5ms.
Holding delay 100 ms > Command duration 5 ms: The command will be transmitted during 100 ms.
A second input command duration is 120 ms.
Input signal command duration 120 ms > Holding delay 100 ms: The command will be transmitted during 120 ms.
Parameter Values
Parameter values are in ms.
Range value 0 to 500 ms.
Procedure
For each command, select the Holding Delay by positioning the scrolling button.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 32/68 e-terragridcom DIP
8.7.4.2 Configuring Sender Input Valid delay
Input Valid Delay Parameter description
At the receipt end the restitution of a command requires a processing time that varies according to the chosen protection scheme. To be rebuilt an input command must be transmitted during a time at least equal to the processing time.
The Input Holding Valid Delay corresponds to a threshold applied to an input signal command duration conditioning the activation of the Input Holding Delay.
• Input signal commands whose duration is inferior to the Input Holding Valid Delay are validated and transmitted without any prolongation.
Restitution at the receipt end of input commands sent in such condition is not guaranteed because the transmission time may be less than the processing time required by the Protection Scheme.
• Input signal commands whose duration is greater than the Holding Valid Delay, are validated and transmitted for a minimum duration corresponding to the Holding Delay parameter.
When the Holding Delay parameter is greater than the processing reception duration, reception of input command sent in such condition is guaranteed to be lossless.
Parameter Values
Parameter values are in ms.
Range value 0 to 5 ms.
Example
E.g. holding delay 50ms, input validation delay 5ms:
1. Input signal command 3ms, duration less than the Holding Delay: the Holding delay is not considered, the command is sent without prolongation.
2. Input command 6ms, command acquisition duration less than the Holding Delay validation. The Holding delay is taken into account and the command is transmitted for the Holding Delay: 50 ms.
3. Input command 60 ms: command acquisition duration more than the Holding Delay validation parameter. Input command more than the Holding Delay. The command is transmitted during 60 ms.
Procedure
For each command, select the Holding Delay validation by positioning the scrolling button.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
SINGLE TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 33/68
8.7.4.2.1 Configuring Sender Protection Schemes
Parameter Description
3 protection schemes are available: stage acceleration, locking and direct trigger.
Permissive tripping commands are always monitored by a protection relay. The circuit breaker is tripped when receipt of the command coincides with operation of the protection relay at the receiving end responding to a system fault. The intention of these schemes is to speed up tripping for faults occurring within the protected zone.
Blocking commands are initiated by a protection element that detects faults external to the protected zone. Detection of an external fault at the local end of a protected circuit results in a blocking signal being transmitted to the remote end. At the remote end, receipt of the blocking signal prevents the remote end protection operating if it had detected the external fault. The risk of a spurious trip is higher.
Direct tripping: remote triggering signals sent directly to the main trigger relay. Reception of the command triggers trips the circuit breaker. The method of communication must be reliable and secure because any signal detected at the receiving end will cause a trip of the circuit at that end.
Procedure
For each command select the protection scheme by selecting the value with the scroll down window.
8.7.5 Sender Transmission parameter configuration procedure
Depending on user needs and of the characteristics of input signals applied to the DIP, notably their duration, two procedures are available.
8.7.5.1 Procedure without Input Valid Delay
For each command
1. Using the scroll-down window select a protection scheme.
Option:
2. Using the scroll-down window select a Holding Delay.
3. Click the button.
4. Give a path for the saved file and name it.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 34/68 e-terragridcom DIP
8.7.5.2 Procedure without Input Valid Delay
For each command
1. Using the scroll-down window select a protection scheme.
2. Select the valid input delay by positioning the scrolling button.
3. Click the button.
Note: The Holding Delay parameter is automatically set to a minimum value compatible with the application scheme.
4. Give a path for the saved file and name it.
Holding delay, Holding delay validation, and protection schemes parameters are dependent.
If the procedure indicated is not applied (e.g. Holding time selected before the protection schemes), incompatibilities may occur.
In case of incompatibility when selecting the protection schemes, warning messages are displayed.
More particularly, if the holding time is incompatible, a warning message is displayed:
In this case, the minimum value for holding time is adjusted automatically to a value compatible with the protection scheme.
8.7.6 Sending the general parameters configuration to the DIP equipment
When you have completed Sender Parameters configuration as described above:
Click the button. The following window opens:
The DIP resets.
Check the condition of the LEDs after reset.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
SINGLE TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 35/68
8.8 Configuring Receiver Parameters
To configure the Receiver parameters:
Open the <Configuration> window (see § 8.4).
Click the Receiver Tab. The following window opens:
FIGURE 13 – CONFIGURATION – RECEIVER TAB PAGE
8.8.1 Configuring LF band
The Bandwidth is a technical characteristic of the medium used corresponding to its signal transmission capacity.
Depending on the characteristics of the medium, select the appropriate bandwidth via the Bandwidth scroll-down window.
Possible values are:
• 300-2000,
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 36/68 e-terragridcom DIP
• 300-2400,
• 300-3400.
The Guard parameter depends on the bandwidth. It is defined automatically according to the Bandwidth parameter:
• 2100-2300 for the frequency 300-2000,
• 2400-2600 for the frequency 2400-2660,
• 3500-3800 for the frequency 300-3400.
8.8.2 Configuring Receiver Input Level
Guard Signal
This parameter defines the Guard Signal level.
Parameter values are in dBm.
Value Range -40 to 0 dBm.
Select the Guard Signal input level using the scrolling button.
Commands vs Guard gain
This parameter corresponds to the relative level between signal commands level and Guard Signal.
Parameter values are in dB.
Two ranges of values are possible according to the version selected: Normal or Enhanced.
0 - 6 dB for the normal version,
0 - 16 dB for the enhanced version.
Select Commands vs Guard Gain using the scrolling button.
Note: The Receiver Input level can also be set from the Maintenance window, manually or automatically (see § 8.12).
8.8.3 Configuring Receiver Protection Scheme
Parameter Description
Three protection values are possible: stage acceleration, locking and direct trigger.
For each command, select the Type using the scrolling window.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
SINGLE TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 37/68
8.8.4 Configuring the status of the output relay upon the alarm
Parameter Description
Idle: the restitution relay is set to the idle state in case of alarm.
Former state: the restitution relay contact remains open or closed, even in case of alarm. The alarm has no impact on the status of the switch.
For each command
Select the Relay state on alarm parameter using the scrolling window.
8.8.5 Receiver holding delay configuration
Range value 0 to 500 ms by 1 ms steps.
For each command
Using the scroll-down window select the value for Holding Delay.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 38/68 e-terragridcom DIP
8.8.6 Configuring unblocking parameters
Unblocking
Only command which type is Permissive tripping can be unblocked. Each command can be unblocked, independently of the others.
For each command to unblock:
Check the appropriate box.
Unblocking threshold
Parameter values are in dB. The value range is -20 to -10 dB. Display accuracy is ± 0.1dB.
Select the unblocking threshold using the scrolling button.
Unblocking Delay
Parameter values are in ms. Range value 5 to 80 ms. Display accuracy is ± 0.1 ms.
Select the unblocking delay value using the scrolling button.
8.8.7 Sending Receiver Parameter Configuration
When you have completed Receiver Parameters configuration as described above:
Click the button, give a path for the configuration file and name it.
Click the button. The following window opens:
The DIP resets.
Check the correct status of LEDs after the reset and the absence of alarms.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
SINGLE TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 39/68
8.9 Configuring Input/output Parameters
To configure Input/Output parameters:
Open the <Configuration> window (see § 8.4).
Click the Input / Output tab. The following window opens:
FIGURE 14 – CONFIGURATION - INPUT/OUTPUT TAB PAGE
8.9.1 Configuring the I/O board
Select the I/O Boards parameter corresponding to your hardware configuration by checking the corresponding box.
For 2 commands select 1 board.
For more than 2 commands, 1 or two boards can be selected.
Note: If two boards are selected, a Combinatorial Logic on Inputs part is displayed.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 40/68 e-terragridcom DIP
8.9.2 Configuring Input Filter Delay
Parameter Description
The Input Filter Delay parameter is a threshold applied to the input command signal. It is used to exclude high noise-level signals which could be taken as input commands.
Signal commands with a duration less than the Input Filter Delay duration are not transmitted.
Signal commands with a duration greater than the Input Filter Delay duration are validated and transmitted. The propagation time of the command transmitted via the Input Filter Delay increases of the Input Filter Delay.
Parameter value
Range 0 to 3 ms in 1 ms steps.
Procedure
For each command to which an input filter delay is to be applied:
Select the value using the scrolling button.
8.9.3 Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs
This panel is only available having configured 4 commands/2 boards.
It is used to allocate commands with logical associations between input signals.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
SINGLE TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 41/68
For each command the possible choices are:
• IN1: The command is allocated to the input signal connected to the INT2 input (P10 connector)
• IN2: The command is allocated to the input signal connected to the IN2 input (P10 connector)
• IN1 or IN2: The command is allocated to the result of the OR operator applied to the input signal connected on the IN1 input (P10 connector) and the IN2 input (P10 connector)
• IN1 and IN2: The command is allocated to the result of the AND operator applied to the input signal connected to the IN1 input (P10 connector) and the IN2 input (P10 connector)
For command 2 same explanation replacing IN1 by IN3 and IN2 by IN4.
For command 3 same explanation replacing IN1 by IN5, IN2 by IN6 and P10 connector by P12 connector.
For command 4 same explanation replacing IN1 by IN7, IN2 by IN8 and P10 connector by P12 connector.
8.9.4 Sending Input/Output Configuration
When you have completed Input/Output Parameters configuration as described above:
Click the button, give a path for the configuration file and name it.
Click the button. The following window opens:
The DIP resets.
Check the status of LEDs after the reset and the absence of alarms.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 42/68 e-terragridcom DIP
8.10 Configuring alarm parameters
To configure alarm parameters:
Open the <Configuration> window (see § 8.4).
Click the Alarms tab.
FIGURE 15 – CONFIGURATION – ALARMS TAB PAGE
8.10.1 Configuring Alarm on External Input
The External alarm input comes from an external unit (PLC or other).
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
SINGLE TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 43/68
The external unit and the DIP must be interconnected with a special connection cable supporting alarm wires.
Parameter values are in seconds. The value range is 0 to 2.5 s. The display accuracy is ± 0.1s.
To configure Alarm on External Input:
1. Check the Alarm on external input box,
2. Check the button for level Minor or Major button.
8.10.2 Configuring Input Duration Command Alarm
This alarm is set if the input command signal duration is more than the parameter value.
Parameter values are in seconds. The value range is 0.5 to 10 s. The display accuracy is ± 0.1s.
To configure Input Command Duration Alarm:
1. Check the Input Command Duration Alarm box,
2. Select the value using the scrolling button.
3. Select the alarm level, Minor or Major.
8.10.3 Configuring Loss of Signal Alarm
This alarm occurs if the Signal level, measured through internal digital filter, is under a Threshold during a Delay.
Threshold
Defines the level under which an alarm is triggered.
Parameter values are in dBr. The value range is -16 to -6 dBr. The display accuracy is ± 0.1 dBr.
Delay
Defines the low level signal delay from which an alarm is triggered.
Parameter values are in seconds. The value range is 1 to 10 s. The display accuracy is ± 0.1s.
To configure the Signal Loss Alarm parameters:
1. Select the threshold level using the scrolling button.
2. Select the delay using the scrolling button.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 44/68 e-terragridcom DIP
8.10.4 Configuring the Alarm outputs delay parameter
Alarm outputs delay:
Closing of the contact relay can be delayed. Possible values are:
0
2.5 s
5 s
10 s
For each relay 1 and 2, a major alarm and a minor alarm are possible:
Select the delay by positioning the scrolling button.
8.10.5 Sending the alarms configuration
When you have completed the Alarms parameters configuration as described above:
Click the button, give a path for the configuration file and name it.
Click the button. The following window opens:
The DIP resets.
Check the correct status of LEDs after the reset and the absence of alarms.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
SINGLE TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 45/68
8.11 <Configuration> File Menu
FIGURE 16 – CONFIGURATION EXIT MENU
This menu allows configuration files to be edited, saved, sent and closed.
8.11.1 Editing a configuration file
The Edit menu is used to display a synthesis Parameter values window.
To edit a configuration file in the <Configuration> window:
Select File > Edit.
Click the button. The following window opens:
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 46/68 e-terragridcom DIP
8.11.2 Saving a configuration file
Save: this menu opens a standard Windowsdialog box allowing the displayed configuration to be saved in a file.
To save a configuration file:
Select File>Save.
Give a path for the saved file and name it.
8.11.3 Sending a configuration file
Send: This menu, accessible from user level 2, is used to send the HMI displayed configuration to the unit. After receiving the configuration file, the unit resets. When the unit restarts, the sent configuration is taken into account.
A configuration window is opened in the HMI using the menus File > New > or File > Open > or DIP > Configuration >.
Once modified, the configuration file can be sent to the unit using the menu File >Send or the Send button.
To send a configuration file:
Select File > Send or click the button.
The following window opens:
The DIP resets.
Check the correct status of LEDs after the reset and the absence of alarms.
8.11.4 Closing a configuration file
Exit: This menu closes the configuration window.
To close a configuration window select File > Exit
Select File>Exit.
8.12 <DIP> Menu
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
SINGLE TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 47/68
The <DIP> menu allows to display:
• Configuration
• Hardware configuration
• Maintenance
• Alarms snapshot
• Input/Output
• Versions
• Date Setup
The DIP menu also allows to launch the Reset command (user level 2).
8.12.1 Reading the configuration
To read the configuration parameters:
Select DIP>Configuration. A <Configuration> window opens:
When opening the <Configuration> window, the user can modify the configuration parameters (see § 8.5 and next).
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 48/68 e-terragridcom DIP
8.12.2 Reading the hardware configuration
To read the hardware configuration:
Select DIP>Hardware Config.
The <Hardware> window opens:
FIGURE 17 – HARDWARE CONFIGURATION WINDOW
This window shows the hardware configuration. The units installed are accessible and the appropriate box checked. Units not installed are grayed out and not legible.
8.12.3 Reading the versions
This menu allows to read the version of the EPLD and DSP firmware.
To read the version:
Select DIP>Versions.
The following window opens:
FIGURE 18 – VERSION WINDOW
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
SINGLE TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 49/68
8.12.4 Instant alarm reading
To read the alarms statuses in Instant alarms:
Select DIP> Alarms Snapshot.
FIGURE 19 – INSTANT ALARMS WINDOW
8.12.5 Read input / output statuses
To read input / output statuses:
Select DIP>Input / Output.
The following Input / Output Statuses window opens:
FIGURE 20 – INPUT / OUTPUT WINDOW
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 50/68 e-terragridcom DIP
The Input / Output Statuses parameter represents the status of commands acquired and rendered. Two statuses are possible: Active and Inactive.
− Inactive command = Inputs in black and Outputs in blue
− Active command = Inputs and Outputs in red
Example of active command:
A signal command is active on IN1, the matching input is red.
The signal is transmitted, Tx C1 in red,
The status of the R1 command restitution is active and red.
8.13 DIP>Maintenance menu
The DIP>Maintenance menu allows performing the following operations:
• Switch to maintenance or normal mode
• Unlockingline or relay
• Local loopback
• Forcing transmission, reception or an alarm
• Reset events or alarms (local)
To access the Maintenance menus:
Select DIP>Maintenance, the following window opens:
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
SINGLE TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 51/68
FIGURE 21 – MAINTENANCE LEVELS
Only reading of the input level is accessible when accessing level 0 of the Maintenance menu.
In this case, only the Level tab page is accessible.
Access to the user 2 level allows manual or automatic setting of the output level parameters. An additional Forcing tab page provides access to the forcing and loopback functions. At first, the user is in the ‘normal’ mode ; a level 2 user can switch to the ‘maintenance’ mode and vice-versa via the ‘mode’ menu
8.13.1 Switching from the Maintenance mode to the Normal mode and vice-versa
FIGURE 22 – MAINTENANCE MENU
To switch from the Maintenance mode to the Normal mode:
Select Mode>Normal mode.
Only the Levels tab page is available.
To switch from the Normal mode to the Maintenance mode:
Select Mode>Maintenance.
In the Maintenance mode, the <Force/lock/Loop> tab page is available.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 52/68 e-terragridcom DIP
8.13.2 Maintenance status bar
The Maintenance status bar displays the following elements:
• Line status (locked / unlocked)
• Relay status (locked / unlocked)
• Loopback status on / off.
FIGURE 23 – MAINTENANCE STATUS BAR
8.13.3 Reading the input levels measurement
This screen, accessible from the user level 0, allows reading the input levels in the graphic form.
The digital values are also displayed in the upper part of the screen.
The value range is -45 to 15 dBr, nominal value for receiver alignment being 0 dBr. The display accuracy is ± 0.1 dBr.
Click the button to display the values to be refreshed.
Click the Automatic refresh button to display the values to be refreshed regularly.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
SINGLE TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 53/68
8.13.4 Configuring the output levels setting
This screen, accessible from the user level 2, allows defining the DIP frequencies, as well as the guard output levels.
The value range is -30 dBm to 6 dBm, the display accuracy is 0,1 dBm.
Procedure
For the guard frequency and command frequency 1 to 4:
Select the output level using the scrolling button.
Once the operation has been completed, click the button.
8.13.5 Configuring the reception level
8.13.5.1 Manually
This screen, accessible on level 2, allows to adjust the level of reception.
Guard frequency
The level of reception of guard frequencies is expressed directly in dBm.
This level can be set between -45 dBm and +15 dBm.
Display accuracy is ± 0.1dBm.
Command / Guard relative level
The Commands / Guard relative level is expressed in dB.
This level is adjustable between 0 and +6dB in the normal mode and between 0 and +16dB in the enhanced mode.
Settings are made while considering the level of output and attenuation of the medium.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 54/68 e-terragridcom DIP
Display accuracy is ± 0.1dBm.
Settings of the Guard and Commands / Guard relative level parameters are independent, and must be sent separately.
Procedure
Select the Guard level of reception using the scrolling button.
Click the button.
Select the Commands / Guard relative level parameter using the scrolling button.
Click the button.
To save the settings after a reset, refer to § 8.12.5.3.
8.13.5.2 Align automatically
The button is accessible on the user 2 level.
This command launches receiver alignment.
This alignment is automatic and performed according to the reception level of the guard frequency. At the end of the alignment, the reception level of the guard frequency changes.
To launch automatic alignment:
Click the button.
The following window opens, indicating that automatic alignment has started:
Once the alignment is complete, the following message is displayed:
Click the button.
To save the settings after a reset, refer to the next paragraph.
8.13.5.3 Saving the settings for output level and reception level
The settings of the output level and reception level (manual or automatic) are lost after a reset.
Once the settings are complete, close the Maintenance window to maintain them:
A pop-up window opens:
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
SINGLE TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 55/68
Answer.
A message appears, notifying that the DIP has been reset. The settings are stored in flash memory, and remain active after the reset.
8.13.6 Maintenance - Forcing
This tab page is accessible on the user 2 level and in the Maintenance mode.
To access the Forcing / Blocking / Loopback window, open the Maintenance window (see § 8.12) and select the Force / Lock / Loop tab.
FIGURE 24 – MAINTENANCE - FORCING
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 56/68 e-terragridcom DIP
8.13.6.1 Configuring the Unlocking / Loopback parameters
Loop
In this mode, the transmission is looped back to reception even if access to the sending medium is blocked.
Procedure
To activate / deactivate loopback: select Active / Inactive by clicking the appropriate button.
Unlock
The AF line and contact statuses are:
• Unlocked
• Locked
Unlock AF line: this status is used to connect the teleprotection transmitter to the transmission line. This operating mode introduces the risk of untimely command transmission, as the operator can simulate the acquisition of a command.
Lock AF line: this status is used to disconnect the teleprotection transmitter from the transmission line. The operator can then simulate safely a command acquisition.
Contact Relay unlocking: when this status is activated, the status of the output relays complies with the command conditions present in the reception line. This operating mode introduces the risk of untimely command transmission, in case of loopback.
Contact Relay locking: when this status is activated, the status of the output relays are forced to the idle status, regardless of the command conditions present in the reception line.
Procedure
To unblock a AF line:
Check the AF Line box.
To block a AF line:
Uncheck the AF Line box.
To unblock a relay:
Check the Relay box.
To block a relay:
Uncheck the Relay box.
When the Loopback and Locking parameters are configured:
Click the button.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
SINGLE TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 57/68
Check the condition for updating the settings in the bottom bar:
8.13.6.1.1 Forcing the transmitter
The HMI does not operate as a simulator. More particularly, forcing triggers actual command transmissions and rendering.
Therefore, untimely use of these commands may have a severe impact on the operation.
This screen is used to send frequencies corresponding to different statuses over unlocked lines: standby, command or test message. To use this feature, the copy relays must be unlocked at all times.
To force a frequency:
Check the appropriate box.
Click the button.
The forced frequency becomes red:
To interrupt forcing, click the button.
8.13.6.1.2 Forcing output relays
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 58/68 e-terragridcom DIP
This screen is used to force the status of command rendering relays on the local unit. The command output relays will be activated only if the relays are unlocked. The copy relays must be unlocked at all times.
To force an output relay:
Check the appropriate box.
Click the button.
The forced command becomes red:
To interrupt forcing, click the button.
8.13.6.2 Forcing PLC commands
Forcing Transmission Reception
When commands are sent to received via the PLC, transmission / reception of the other signals can be blocked to ensure all power is available for these orders. Transmission and reception signals are sent with the commands to activate the blocking feature.
Forcing PLC commands allows activating the transmission / reception blocking feature, to check its operational status.
To check PLC Emission blocking:
Check the Active box under Transmission.
Click the button.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
SINGLE TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 59/68
Transmission is displayed in red:
Use a multimeter to check that the contact relay of terminals 3-10 of connector P18 is closed.
To interrupt forcing, click the button.
To check PLC Reception blocking:
Check the Active box under Reception.
Click the button.
Reception is displayed in red:
Use a multimeter to check that the contact relay of terminal 5 of connector P18 is closed.
To interrupt forcing, click the button.
Active Inactive forcing
When a DIP becomes inactive, the relay of terminals 7-14 of connector P18 closes to inform the PLC. Inactive forcing allows simulating the inactive status of the DIP.
To force the inactive status of the DIP:
Check the Inactive box
It is displayed in red:
Click the button.
Use a multimeter to check that the contact relay of terminals 5-12 of connector P18 is closed.
IN command
This part allows to check the presence of an external alarm between terminals 6-13 of connector P18.
In case of an external alarm, Active is displayed in yellow:
In case of lack of external alarm, Inactive is displayed in green: .
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 60/68 e-terragridcom DIP
8.13.6.3 Alarms forcing
To force the alarms:
Check the Minor or Major box, or both.
Click the button.
The other parts of the window are grayed out and inaccessible.
Check the alarm status LEDs.
To interrupt forcing, click the button.
8.14 Date setup
The DIP>Set date menu allows to read or define the date of the DIP.
To set the date, select DIP>Date Setup. The following window opens:
Set the date in the PC Time / Date section of the window.
Once the information related with the date have been entered,
click the button to copy the settings in the DIP section.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
SINGLE TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 61/68
Note: the date can also be displayed and set by clicking the button in the upper tool bar.
8.15 Resetting the DIP
To reset the DIP from the DIP menu:
Select DIP>Reset.
A confirmation message is then displayed, in a pop-up window:
Answer .
The following window opens, indicating that resetting is in progress.
After restarting the DIP, check the status of LEDs and lack of alarms.
8.16 <History> Menu
There are two types of history:
• Non time-stamped (counters)
• Time-stamped by the internal clock (events / alarms)
The <History> menu allows to display the following information:
• Events log
• Alarms log
• Counters
The <History> also allows to clear events and alarms histories.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 62/68 e-terragridcom DIP
WARNING: ONCE THE HISTORIES HAVE BEEN CLEARED, THE INFORMATION CAN NO LONGER BE RETRIEVED
8.16.1 Events reading
To read events:
Select History>Events. The following message is displayed when loading events:
The Event window opens.
FIGURE 25 – EXAMPLE OF READ EVENTS LIST
The File menu is used to save and print events files (*.event), but also exit the events file:
The Save and Print buttons allow to save and print the files respectively.
The Refresh button refreshes the events list.
The File menu in the main window allows opening the events files (*.event):
The events time-stamped by the internal clock in a list limited to 1785 events. Once the memory is full, any new event replaces the older event saved.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
SINGLE TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 63/68
8.16.2 Alarms reading
To read the alarms list:
Select History>Alarms. The following message is displayed when loading alarms:
The Alarms window opens.
FIGURE 26 – EXAMPLE OF READ ALARMS LIST
Alarms time-stamped by the internal clock are saved in a list limited to 1785 alarms. Once the memory is full, any new alarm replaces the first alarm saved.
The File menu is used to save and print alarms files (*.alarms), but also exit the alarms file:
The Save and Print buttons allow to save and print the files respectively.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 64/68 e-terragridcom DIP
The Refresh button refreshes the alarms list.
The File menu in the main window allows opening the alarms files (*.alarms):
8.16.3 Reading the local command counters
To read the local command counters:
Select History>Counters.
The following window opens:
FIGURE 27 – EXAMPLE OF READ OF COUNTER STATUS
The File menu is used to save and print counter files (*.cnter), but also exit the counter file:
The Save and Print buttons allow to save and print the counters respectively.
The File menu in the main window allows opening the counter files (*.cnter):
The memorization capacity of the counters is limited to 65535.
8.16.4 Deleting events
The Erase the events option allows deleting all events displayed in the list.
Note: This option fully deletes system events and its action cannot be cancelled. To display the events at a later date, use the File>Save
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
SINGLE TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 65/68
option to save a copy of the events list before using the Erase>Events option.
To delete the events list currently displayed.
Select History>Erase >Erase events.
A confirmation window opens:
Answer .
Check that the events file is empty by selecting History>Events.
8.16.5 Deleting alarms
The Delete the alarms option allows deleting all alarms displayed in the list.
Note: This option fully deletes system alarms and its action cannot be cancelled. To display the alarms at a later date, use the File>Save option to save a copy of the alarms list before using the Erase>Alarms option.
To delete the alarms list currently displayed:
Select History>Erase>Erase the events.
The following pop-up window opens:
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 66/68 e-terragridcom DIP
Answer .
Check that the alarms file is empty by selecting History>Alarms.
8.17 <Test> Menu
The link test allows checking the ability of the DIP link to sent and receive commands in the bidirectional mode.
The automatic launching of the link test can also be planned daily or hourly (see § 8.5.7 for settings).
Command processing overrides the link test.
To launch the link test:
Select Test>Link test. In case of bad results, a DIP fault is declared.
8.18 <Factory> Menu
This menu offers a single choice
This menu disconnects the battery (the factory exit status).
8.19 <Help> Menu
This menu provides access to the help file and allows to read the software version of the HMI.
Access to the help files
To access the User Manual, select Help>User Manual.
Reading the software version of the HMI
O read the software version of the HMI:
Select Help>About, the following window opens:
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
SINGLE TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 67/68
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
SINGLE TONE
Page 68/68 e-terragridcom DIP
BLANK PAGE
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23DUAL TONE e-terragridcom DIP
HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE
PART 2: DIP ANALOG DUAL TONE
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 1/74
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 10
2. HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL 11
2.1 Information presentation 11
2.2 Example in a paragraph 11
3. OVERVIEW 12
3.1 Foreword 12
3.2 System Required 12
3.3 Installing the HMI 12
3.4 First use 12
3.5 Installing the documentation 13
4. USER LEVELS AND PASSWORDS 14
4.1 User level structure 14
4.2 Menus 14
5. DIP PASSWORD MANAGEMENT 15
5.1 Rules for Password Creation 15
5.2 Accessing the Password Manager Menus with the <Password> Menu 15
5.3 Modifying the Password Manager password with the Password Menu 16
5.4 Creating User Password with the <Create> Menu 17
5.5 Managing the Password listing with the Menu <List passwords> 17
5.6 Exiting the Password Manager 17
6. INTERFACE DESCRIPTION 18
6.1 Main screen 18
6.2 Header bar 18
6.3 Menu bar 19
6.4 Toolbar 19
6.5 Status bars 19
6.6 Work and dialog zone 20
7. FUNCTIONALITIES DESCRIPTION 21
7.1 <Tools> Menu 21
7.2 <File> Menu 21
7.3 <DIP> Menu 22
7.4 <History> Menu 22
7.5 <Test> Menu 22
8. OPERATING THE HMI DIP – DUAL TONE 23
8.1 Launching the HMI 23
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 2/74 e-terragridcom DIP
8.2 Logging into the DIP 23
8.3 <Tools> Menu 24
8.3.1 Entering a password 24
8.3.2 Returning to level 0 24
8.3.3 Disconnecting the HMI 25
8.3.4 Exit the HMI. 25
8.4 <File> Menu 25
8.5 General Configuration Procedure 26
8.6 Creating a configuration File> New 27
8.6.1 Description of the Configuration window 28
8.6.2 Configuration window toolbar 28
8.7 Configuring General Parameters 29
8.7.1 Configuring IRIG-B 29
8.7.2 Configuring HMI speed 29
8.7.3 Configuring Logical Address 29
8.7.4 Configuring on Link test failure 30
8.7.5 Limiting events 31
8.7.6 Entering comments 31
8.8 Configuring Sender Parameters 32
8.8.1 Configuring LF band 33
8.8.2 Configuring sender transmission levels 33
8.8.3 Configuring Command transmission parameters 34
8.8.4 Sender Transmission parameter configuration procedure 37
8.8.5 Sending the general parameters configuration to the DIP equipment 39
8.9 Configuring Receiver Parameters 39
8.9.1 Configuring LF band 40
8.9.2 Configuring Receiver Input Level 40
8.9.3 Configuring Receiver Protection Schemes 41
8.9.4 Configuring the status of the restitution relays upon the alarm. 41
8.9.5 Receiver holding delay configuration 41
8.9.6 Configuring unblocking parameters 42
8.9.7 Sending Receiver Parameter Configuration 42
8.10 Configuring Input/output Parameters 43
8.10.1 Configuring I/O Boards 44
8.10.2 Configuring Input Filter Delay 44
8.10.3 Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs 45
8.10.4 Sending Input/Output Configuration 46
8.11 Configuring alarm parameters 46
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 3/74
8.11.1 Configuring the Alarm on external input parameter 47
8.11.2 Configuring Input Duration Command Alarm 47
8.11.3 Configuring Alarm on Signal loss. 48
8.11.4 Configuring Noise Alarm 48
8.11.5 Configuring on Link test failure 49
8.11.6 Configuring the Locking alarm 49
8.11.7 Configuring alarm output delay 50
8.11.8 Sending the alarms configuration 50
8.12 File Configuration Menu 51
8.12.1 Editing a configuration file 51
8.12.2 Saving a configuration file 51
8.12.3 Sending a configuration file 52
8.12.4 Closing a configuration file 52
8.13 <DIP> Menu 52
8.13.1 Reading the configuration 53
8.13.2 Reading the hardware configuration 53
8.13.3 Reading the versions 54
8.13.4 Instant alarm reading 55
8.13.5 Read input / output statuses 55
8.14 DIP Maintenance Menus 56
8.14.1 Switch to Maintenance / Normal mode 57
8.14.2 Maintenance status bar 58
8.14.3 Reading the input level measurement 58
8.14.4 Configuring the output levels setting 59
8.14.5 Configuring the reception level 59
8.14.6 Align automatically 60
8.14.7 Saving level settings. 61
8.14.8 Configuring forcing and loopback 61
8.14.9 Unlocking feature 62
8.14.10 Configuring input/output loopback 63
8.14.11 Forcing the transmitter 63
8.14.12 Forcing output relays 64
8.14.13 Forcing PLC commands 64
8.14.14 Alarms forcing 65
8.15 Date setup 66
8.16 Resetting the DIP 66
8.17 <History> Menu 67
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 4/74 e-terragridcom DIP
8.17.1 Events reading 67
8.17.2 Alarms reading 69
8.17.3 Reading counters 70
8.17.4 Deleting events 71
8.17.5 Deleting alarms 72
8.18 <Test> Menu 73
8.19 <Factory> Menu 73
8.20 <Help> Menu 73
8.20.1 Access to the help files 73
8.20.2 Reading the software version of the HMI 74
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1 – MAIN SCREEN BEFORE PC/TELEPROTECTION CONNECTION 18
FIGURE 2 – EXAMPLE OF MAIN SCREEN AFTER PC/ DIP CONNECTION 18
FIGURE 3 – MENU BAR 19
FIGURE 4 – TOOLBAR 19
FIGURE 5 – STATUS BAR 19
FIGURE 6 – EXAMPLE OF DIALOG BOX WITH LIST DISPLAY 20
FIGURE 7 – TOOLS MENU 24
FIGURE 9 – VERSION SELECTION WINDOW 27
FIGURE 10 – CONFIGURATION – GENERAL TAB PAGE 27
FIGURE 11 – TOOLBAR 28
FIGURE 12 – CONFIGURATION SYNTHESIS WINDOW 28
FIGURE 13 – CONFIGURATION – SENDER TAB PAGE 32
FIGURE 14 – CONFIGURATION – RECEIVER TAB PAGE 39
FIGURE 15 – INPUT/OUTPUT TAB PAGE 43
FIGURE 16 – I/O BOARDS 44
FIGURE 17 – INPUT FILTER DELAY 44
FIGURE 18 – COMBINATORIAL LOGIC ON INPUTS 45
FIGURE 19 – CONFIGURATION – ALARMS TAB PAGE 46
FIGURE 20 – CONFIGURATION MENU 51
FIGURE 21 – HARDWARE CONFIGURATION WINDOW 54
FIGURE 22 – INPUT / OUTPUT WINDOW 55
FIGURE 23 – MAINTENANCE LEVELS 57
FIGURE 24 – MAINTENANCE – FORCING 61
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 5/74
FIGURE 25 – HISTORY MENU 67
FIGURE 26 – EVENT WINDOW – DUAL TONE 68
FIGURE 27 – ALARMS WINDOW 69
FIGURE 28 – LOCAL COMMAND COUNTERS WINDOW 70
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 6/74 e-terragridcom DIP
BLANK PAGE
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 7/74
MODIFICATIONS PAGE
VERSION DATE COMMENTS
A 24/01/2001 Original issue
B 23/08/2004 ALSTOM logo and addition of analog version
C11 12/07/2006 New features and additional technical explanations
D11 14/11/2007 New chapter. Task oriented writing. HMI chapter separated in three sections: digital, Dual Tone analog and dual tone analog
E11 11/02/2008 Minor corrections
A22 20/02/2009 Version 2.2
B22 01/06/2010 Minor corrections
A23 13/01/2011 Version 2.3
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 8/74 e-terragridcom DIP
BLANK PAGE
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 9/74
GENERAL
This manual describes the Human-Machine interface of the DIP, i.e. the software application which enables commissioning, operational use and maintenance of this unit.
DEFINITIONS
HMI Tool for using the DIP (Human-Machine Interface).
Configuration All the characteristics (fixed components) and parameters (customization components) of a teleprotection.
Configuration File Micro-computer file containing all the configuration components of a teleprotection.
Input password Password for accessing the ‘Password Manager’ utility.
User level All the authorized operations corresponding to the level of responsibility of a given operator.
Level password Password for accessing a user level.
NOTE: Windows and PC are registered trademarks.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 10/74 e-terragridcom DIP
1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY SECTION DIP5K/EN SS/A11 OR LATER ISSUE, THE TECHNICAL DATA SECTION AND THE RATING ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.
THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED RS232C(1)
SERIAL PORT IS AN EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. WHEN THE TELEPROTECTION IS ENERGIZED, THE TERMINALS OF THIS PORT SHOULD NOT BE TOUCHED SINCE IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF A SINGLE FAULT CONDITION THERE WOULD BE A VERY LOW PROBABILITY OF AN ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS DESIGNED TO BE USED FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, THAT IS MONITORING AND SOFTWARE DOWNLOADS; IT IS NOT INTENDED TO BE PERMANENTLY CONNECTED.
THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED RJ45(1)
SERIAL PORT IS AN EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS INTENDED TO BE USED FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, I.E. MONITORING AND DOWNLOADING THE SOFTWARE.
(1) As per the option chosen
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 11/74
2. HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL
The firmware or software version numbers which may appear in illustrations in this manual may not reflect the latest implemented in the unit; the information is nonetheless current.
2.1 Information presentation
Menu Path are indicated: Menu_level_entry1 >Menu_level_entry2>.
Example: select File >New.
In the text Menu names are between <> example: Example: <DIP> menu.
In the text window names are between <>. Example: <Entry>.
A screen shot shows a button. Example: represents the OK button.
2.2 Example in a paragraph
<HISTORY> MENU NAME BETWEEN <>
To clear events:
Select History>Erase >Erase events
A <Confirmation> window opens:
Answer to delete
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 12/74 e-terragridcom DIP
3. OVERVIEW
3.1 Foreword
As it is powerful and easy to use, the DIP Analog teleprotection HMI enables local:
− complete commissioning of the unit and control of its levels, without the need for other tools,
− level adjustment without measuring apparatus,
− filing of configurations (=>rationalization of commissioning actions),
− time-stamped recording of unit information (=> analysis and statistics),
− interactive and user-friendly maintenance,
− printing of unit parameters.
3.2 System Required
The HMI runs on PCs fitted equipped with Pentium III microprocessors and higher, operating under Windows 2000 Service Pack 4 or Windows XP Service Pack 2. The PC must feature at minimum:
− 40 MB free space on the HD,
− 256 MB RAM.
IMPORTANT: HAVING SEVERAL TASKS RUNNING CONCURRENTLY (DESKTOP OR OTHER TOOLS) MAY CAUSE PC-HMI TRANSMISSION FAULTS. THEREFORE, ALL OTHER APPLICATIONS SHOULD BE CLOSED BEFORE USING THIS HMI.
When the PC has no serial port, use a PCMCIA converter rather than a USB converter.
3.3 Installing the HMI
For safety purposes, we recommend installing the HMI from a copy of the disc supplied.
Installation:
− Insert the CD-ROM supplied in the drive.
− Run the setup.exe file from the <Run> menu in the Program manager: D\:set up.
− Follow the instructions.
3.4 First use
The language of use of the HMI must be configured the first use.
To launch the application, click the desktop icon “DIP HMI” icon or open the DIP group of programs and select it.
The following window opens:
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 13/74
Click OK to open a scrolling menu to select the language.
Select the language required
Click OK, to open the following window
Restart the application.
3.5 Installing the documentation
The user manuals may be accessible from the HMI. (refer to $7.7)
− Run the batch.exe file from the CD_ROM menu in the Documentation directory.
− Follow the instructions.
This procedure may also be used to update the documentation.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 14/74 e-terragridcom DIP
4. USER LEVELS AND PASSWORDS
4.1 User level structure
The DIP places operations in hierarchical command: some actions have no impact on unit operation, others, due to their impact on security and operation, require specific responsibility on the part of the operator.
The HMI is therefore structured in user levels; there are 2 of them, 0 and 2.
Level 0 is the default level on start-up. To enforce this hierarchical arrangement, the command menus are displayed according to user level.
4.2 Menus
Level
Menus 0 2
File new x x
open x x
Tools Identification x x
Returning to level 0 x x
connect x x
disconnect x x
exit x x
DIP * configuration x x
hardware configuration x x
version x x
alarms snapshot x x
input/output x x
reset x
DIP / Date * read x x
write x
DIP / Maintenance * input level measure x x
output levels setting, adjustment receiving alignment and automatic alignment
x
switch to maintenance mode x
unlocking line (security) x
unlocking relay (security) x
local loop back x
transmitter forcing x
commands output forcing x
alarms forcing x
Test * link test x
History * event list x x
alarm list x x
counter list x x
clear event file x
clear alarm file x
Help x x
TABLE 1 – MENU ACCESSIBILITY ACCORDING TO USER LEVEL
* To access these menus, you need to be connected.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 15/74
5. DIP PASSWORD MANAGEMENT
The DIP Security Password Manager application, associated to the HMI application, is used to create, modify, read and delete the passwords.
To launch the application, click the desktop icon “DIP Security” icon or open the DIP group of programs and select it.
For security reasons, access to the Password Manager is password protected.
5.1 Rules for Password Creation
Passwords are case sensitive (Upper or lower) and include 1 to 15 characters to be chosen exclusively from the following:
1. upper case (A to Z)
2. lower case (a to z)
3. numbers (0 to 9)
4. ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ¨ | ~
5.2 Accessing the Password Manager Menus with the <Password> Menu
The <Password> menu enables you to access the Password manager menus: <Create> and < List passwords >.
To access the Password Manager menus:
1. Launch the DIP Security application by clicking the desktop icon. The <DIP password management > window opens:
2. Select Password > Input, the < Password Input> window opens:
3. Enter "DIP5000" upper case without the quotes in both windows (only upon first login).
Note: Modifying the Password Manager password is recommended upon the first use (see the next paragraph).
4. Click the button.
The following window opens:
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 16/74 e-terragridcom DIP
The <Create> and <List Passwords> menus are available.
5.3 Modifying the Password Manager password with the Password Menu
The password Manager menu allows you to modify the password manager password.
Upon first use, use the DIP password (upper case). We recommend to then modify this password.
1. Access the Manager menu (see § 5.2)
2. Select Password > Modify. The following window opens:
3. Enter the new password in compliance with the rules for Password Creation (see § 5.1).
Carefully note the new password. If you lose it the application must be reinstalled.
1. Click the button. The following window opens:
2. Confirm the new password by re-entering it.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 17/74
5.4 Creating User Password with the <Create> Menu
Several passwords may be created.
1. To create user passwords, select < Create password >.
The <Create password > window below opens:
2. Enter the new password in the < Input password > window, in compliance with the rules
for Password Creation (see § 5.1). Enter the password again in the field ‘Confirm password’.
3. Click the button.
4. If required, you may enter other passwords to be defined in the <Enter password> window.
5.5 Managing the Password listing with the Menu <List passwords>
To access the Password List, click the Menu <List Passwords> in the Password Manager
The list of passwords is displayed.
1. To Remove a password, select the password line in the list and click the button. A confirmation message is then displayed, Answer yes.
5.6 Exiting the Password Manager
To exit the password manager and return to the WINDOWS environment select Password>Exit.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 18/74 e-terragridcom DIP
6. INTERFACE DESCRIPTION
The HMI has an integrated environment, using standard WINDOWS tools and processes.
As only the operating modes specific to the HMI will be mentioned in the following, it is recommended that operators not familiar with WINDOWS refer to the user manual for this environment.
6.1 Main screen
The main screen is composed of functional zones (see the following figures)
FIGURE 1 – MAIN SCREEN BEFORE PC/TELEPROTECTION CONNECTION
FIGURE 2 – EXAMPLE OF MAIN SCREEN AFTER PC/ DIP CONNECTION
6.2 Header bar
The header bar displays the HMI name at the top part of the window.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 19/74
6.3 Menu bar
The operator launches commands via the standard WINDOWS menus, displayed according to the current user level (password dependent).
FIGURE 3 – MENU BAR
6.4 Toolbar
The operator can launch commands and read information locally via the toolbar shortcuts
Rolling the mouse over a tool displays information on its function.
FIGURE 4 – TOOLBAR
6.5 Status bars
Depending on the user level and the type of operation in progress, status bars can appear displaying the following information.
The bottom bar displays:
5. the connection status (HMI) (connect/disconnect icon)
6. the link address
7. the transmission speed of serial port (HMI connection)
8. the current operating mode (Operation/Maintenance)
9. any alarm present (clicking in this zone opens a window displaying the faults that have triggered this alarm)
10. the user level granted (from 0 to 2 depending on the password)
11. a green led indicating the connection status (OK when flashing)
12. the DSP firmware version
FIGURE 5 – STATUS BAR
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 20/74 e-terragridcom DIP
6.6 Work and dialog zone
Most commands are also issued using dialogue boxes (see figure 6 below). Six standard Windows tools are used:
13. optional button groups
14. tick boxes
15. command buttons
16. text boxes
17. lists
18. scroll bars
FIGURE 6 – EXAMPLE OF DIALOG BOX WITH LIST DISPLAY
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 21/74
7. FUNCTIONALITIES DESCRIPTION
7.1 <Tools> Menu
Identification: this menu is used to open a window to enter the password and access the corresponding user level. Access to the upper level is protected by password.
Back to level 0: this menu allows to return to level 0, the lowest level of privilege.
Disconnect: this menu disconnects the HMI from the DIP.
Exit: this menu closes the DIP HMI application.
7.2 <File> Menu
New: Creates a configuration file from a default configuration in a DIP version (Dual Tone or Dual tone). When selected a pop-up window opens asking you to choose DIP version (Dual Tone or Dual tone)
Open: Selecting this menu allows the following to be opened:
19. Events files (*.events),
20. Alarm files (*.alarms),
21. Counters files (*.cnter),
22. Config files: Configuration Files.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 22/74 e-terragridcom DIP
7.3 <DIP> Menu
This menu enables you to read the following parameters on the local unit:
23. Configuration: Read and modify all configuration parameters,
24. Hardware configuration: Read hardware configuration parameters,
25. Maintenance: Used to launch measures, adjust levels and for forcing.
26. Alarms preview: provides a view of the current alarm status,
27. Inputs / Outputs: read input and output status.
28. Versions: read firmware versions.
29. Date Setup: read and write the date and time on the unit.
30. Reset: performs hardware and software resets on the unit.
7.4 <History> Menu
31. Events: read and display event list.
32. Alarms: read and display alarms list.
33. Counters: display the status of input/output commands counters. Counter Information can be saved and printed.
34. Erase: via two sub menus <Erase Events> and <Erase Alarms>, allows event and alarm logs to be deleted from the unit.
7.5 <Test> Menu
This menu enables you to perform a link test on the equipment.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 23/74
8. OPERATING THE HMI DIP – DUAL TONE
8.1 Launching the HMI
To launch the HMI, click:
Start>Programs>HMIDIP5K>HMIDIP5K>
or by clicking the Desktop HMIDIP5K shortcut.
Launching the DIP HMI allows to:
• log into a DIP
• create a configuration
• modify an existing configuration saved in the PC.
8.2 Logging into the DIP
To log in, click the Connect icon or open the <Tools> menu:
and select <Local connect> to open the <Login> window.
You can choose among the ports found automatically by the HMI or the favorites defined beforehand. To create a new favorite, right-click the location where you wish to place the favorite.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 24/74 e-terragridcom DIP
8.3 <Tools> Menu
Once logged in, the <Tools> menu is used to:
35. grant a level to a user according to a password,
36. reset the user level to 0,
37. disconnect the HMI from the DIP,
38. exit the HMI.
FIGURE 7 – TOOLS MENU
8.3.1 Entering a password
When the HMI is opened without entering a password the level user granted is 0.
To access the higher level 2, the user must enter a password. For more details about user level and password management see § 4. and § 5.
To enter a password:
1. Select Tools>Identification. The following window opens:
2. Enter the password. If the DIP has a password, only this password allows to raise the
HMI to user level 2.
3. Check the level granted (according to the password) in the status bar.
8.3.2 Returning to level 0
The user may return to level 0 at any time.
To set the user level to 0:
1. Select Tools>Return to level 0.
2. Check the user level in the bottom bar.
The DIP can, optionally, have an embedded password.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 25/74
If you are already a level 2 user, the menu is:
You can also change the embedded password by using this menu option. Please note that if you forget the embedded password, it may be reset only by returning the motherboard (UT148) to the plant.
8.3.3 Disconnecting the HMI
1. Select Tools>Disconnect
2. The HMI is disconnected, the <DIP>, <History> menu disappears. The following icons in the upper bar are grayed out and inaccessible:
Information is no longer displayed in the bottom status bar (only is visible).
8.3.4 Exit the HMI.
To exit the HMI:
Select Tools>Exit.
A confirmation messages appears.
Answer .
The HMI closes.
8.4 <File> Menu
The <File> menu provides access to the configuration files.
This menu allows a new configuration to be created or a saved configuration file to be opened.
4 types of file can be opened:
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 26/74 e-terragridcom DIP
• *.rtf -> existing configuration file, this selection will open a window (see Figure 9 – configuration – general tab page for the window display).
• *.alarms -> alarm list file for consultation (see Figure 18 – configuration – alarms tab page for the window display)
• *.events -> event list file for consultation
• *.counter -> counter statement for consultation
The configuration of new unit or reconfiguration of an existing unit involves creating a configuration file:
Select File>New or File>Open,
• Select the DIP Dual Tone version in the <Version selection> window after clicking File>New.
• Modify the configuration displayed or create a new configuration,
• Save the changed configuration (File>Save).
Configuration creation is available regardless of PC/DIP connection status, and from level 0. As this availability enables off-site creation and the preparation of configuration libraries, it optimizes commissioning and maintenance operations.
The configuration of the unit can be modified by reading the configuration:
• Select DIP>Configuration.
• Modify the displayed configuration.
• Save the changed configuration (File>Save).
8.5 General Configuration Procedure
The configuration of new unit or reconfiguration of an existing unit involves creating a configuration file:
− Select File>New or File>Open.
− Select the DIP Dual Tone version in the <Version selection> window after clicking File>New.
− Modify the configuration displayed or create a new configuration,
− Save the changed configuration (File>Save).
Configuration creation is available regardless of PC/DIP connection status, and from level 0. As this availability enables off-site creation and the preparation of configuration libraries, it optimizes commissioning and maintenance operations.
The configuration of the unit can be modified by reading the configuration:
− Select DIP>Configuration.
− Modify the displayed configuration.
− Save the changed configuration (File>Save).
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 27/74
8.6 Creating a configuration File> New
This menu allows a new configuration to be created on the basis of a default configuration. This configuration can be modified, saved for later use (even at level 0), or sent to the unit (level2).
Selecting the File>New menu opens a pop up window asking for the DIP version. Select Dual tone in the scroll-down window.
A warning message indicates the minimum version no. from which this type of configuration is accepted, click YES.
FIGURE 8 – VERSION SELECTION WINDOW
After Selecting ‘Dual tone’ in the scroll-down window the <Configuration> window appears.
FIGURE 9 – CONFIGURATION – GENERAL TAB PAGE
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 28/74 e-terragridcom DIP
8.6.1 Description of the Configuration window
The configuration parameters are divided in 5 tabs:
− General
− Sender
− Receiver
− Input/Output
− Alarms
8.6.2 Configuration window toolbar
FIGURE 10 – TOOLBAR
Clicking the button opens a Synthesis Window displaying the DIP Configuration parameters in text format:
FIGURE 11 – CONFIGURATION SYNTHESIS WINDOW
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 29/74
8.7 Configuring General Parameters
8.7.1 Configuring IRIG-B
In case of IRIG-B module presence, check On.
Connect the GPS equipment to the P20 connector.
Synchronize the DIP date to the external source (one synchronization signal every 30 seconds).
8.7.2 Configuring HMI speed
It is the communication flow between the HMI and the DIP.
Select the 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200 bps value by checking the corresponding button.
The HMI will attempt to connect at the speed defined, in case of bad link, it will attempt to connect at lower speeds.
8.7.3 Configuring Logical Address
Range value 0 to 255.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 30/74 e-terragridcom DIP
8.7.4 Configuring on Link test failure
The Link Test feature is used to automatically and periodically check the transmission medium between the sender and the receiver, by sending a message in a loop.
For Link testing, the frequencies combination F3 and F7, reserved exclusively for test purpose, is used.
To schedule transmission test:
− Select the test periodicity by checking the corresponding button:
Daily: in this case enter the hour and minutes using the scroll-down window.
.
Hourly: in this case enter the minutes using the scroll-down window.
In case of failure of the link test, if no intervention of an operator is considered necessary, the DIP stays in alarm until the next test. If the link is then restored, the equipment will be standardized.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 31/74
8.7.5 Limiting events
Limits lists stored in the DIP to 255 events and 255 alarms instead of 1785 each.
This may be useful in case of remote access to a network to shorten the information download time.
During an intervention on running equipment, to ensure proper operation of this feature, delete the lists of events and alarms already saved in the DIPs. A warning message appears when checking or unchecking the limitation.
8.7.6 Entering comments
Enter the Source Station, the Destination Station, and your comments in compliance with the following rules:
− Source and destination stations: 20 characters maximum.
− Comments: 70 characters maximum.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 32/74 e-terragridcom DIP
8.8 Configuring Sender Parameters
To configure the Sender parameters:
− Open the <Configuration> window (see § 8.6).
− Click the Sender Tab page.
FIGURE 12 – CONFIGURATION – SENDER TAB PAGE
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 33/74
8.8.1 Configuring LF band
The Bandwidth is a technical characteristic of the medium used corresponding to its signal transmission capacity.
The useful band is the part of the medium bandwidth used to send signals.
Depending on the characteristics of the medium, select the appropriate bandwidth via the Bandwidth scroll-down window.
Possible values are:
− 300-1900
− 400-2000
− 670-2260
− 850-2450
− 1040-2630
− 1220-2810
− 1400-3000
− 1590-3180
− 2000-3600
8.8.2 Configuring sender transmission levels
The Transmission levels correspond to the signal power allocated to different frequencies composing the guard or a command.
The value range is -30 dBm to 6 dBm, the display accuracy is 0,1 dBm.
To configure the Guard transmission levels and Frequency 1 to 7, select, using the scrolling button, the Transmission levels in compliance with the following rule:
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 34/74 e-terragridcom DIP
The difference between sending frequency transmission levels must not exceed 16 dBm. If this rule is not applied, a warning message appears when attempting to save the configuration file.
If this warning message appears, modify the transmission levels in consequence.
8.8.3 Configuring Command transmission parameters
The following parameters must be configured when transmitting an input command:
− Holding Delay
− Mode pulsed or not
− Holding delay validation
− Type of application (protection scheme).
8.8.3.1 Sender holding delay configuration
Holding delay Parameter description
The Holding Delay parameter corresponds to the minimum transmission time of a validated command. However, if the corresponding pulsed mode box is checked, this time is a maximum, as shown above.
− Box corresponding to the pulsed mode not checked:
In this case, the transmission time is the maximum value between the holding delay defined and the input signal command duration.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 35/74
Example 1: Holding delay: 100 ms.
− The presence time of the first input signal command is 5ms.
As the 100 ms holding time exceeds the command time of 5 ms: The command will be transmitted during 100 ms.
− The presence time of the second input signal command is 120 ms.
As the 120 ms command time exceeds the holding time of 100 ms: The command will be transmitted during 120 ms.
Parameter Values
Parameter values are in ms.
Range value 0 to 500 ms.
− Box corresponding to the pulsed mode checked:
In this case, the transmission time is the minimum value between the holding delay defined and the input signal command duration.
Example 2: Holding delay: 150 ms.
− The presence time of the third input signal command is 5ms.
As the 150 ms holding time exceeds the command time of 5 ms: The command will be transmitted in 5 ms only.
− The presence time of the fourth input signal command is 200 ms.
As the 200 ms command time exceeds the Holding time of 150 ms: The command will be transmitted during a pulsed time of 150 ms.
Parameter Values
Parameter values are in ms.
Range value 20 to 500 ms.
Procedure
For each command, select the Holding Delay by positioning the scrolling button.
NOTE: For more information on this parameter, refer to document PTC-DIP5K-TS008
8.8.3.2 Configuring Sender input validation delay.
This configuration is particular to certain specific applications. It is the validation delay parameter applicable to holding time activation. It does not apply when the pulsed mode box is checked.
Valid Hold Time Parameter description
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 36/74 e-terragridcom DIP
At the receipt end the restitution of a command requires a processing time that varies according to the chosen protection scheme. To be rebuilt an input command must be transmitted during a time at least equal to the processing time.
The Holding Valid Delay corresponds to a threshold applied to an input signal command duration conditioning the activation of the Holding Delay.
The commands present at the input for a time less than the Validation delay of the holding time parameter are transmitted without considering the holding time programmed.
This means that a command which is too short will be transmitted but we accept that restitution is not guaranteed as it is of a time shorter than the processing time required by the application.
The commands present at the input whose duration is greater than the Holding Delay, are validated and transmitted for a minimum duration corresponding to the Holding Delay parameter.
When the Holding Delay parameter is greater than the processing reception duration, reception of input command sent in such condition is guaranteed to be lossless.
Parameter Values
Parameter values are in ms.
Range value 0 to 5 ms.
Example
E.g. holding delay 50ms, input validation delay 5ms:
Command present at input for 3ms, a duration less than Holding Delay validation: the <Holding delay> is not considered, the command is sent within 3 ms without prolongation.
Command present at input for 6 ms, a command acquisition duration exceeding that of the Holding Delay validation parameter: The <Holding delay> is taken into account and the command is transmitted for the Holding Delay: 50 ms.
Input command 60 ms: command acquisition duration more than the Holding Delay validation parameter. Input command more than the Holding Delay. The command is transmitted during 60 ms.
Procedure
For each command, select the Holding Delay validation by positioning the scrolling button.
NOTE: For more information on this parameter, refer to document PTC-DIP5K-TS008
8.8.3.3 Configuring the type of application of the sender
This parameter depends on the protection schemes teleprotections will operate.
Parameter Description
Permissive tripping commands are always monitored by a protection relay. The circuit breaker is tripped when receipt of a teleprotection command coincides with operation of the
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 37/74
protection relay at the receiving end responding to a system fault. The intention of these schemes is to speed up tripping for faults occurring within the protected zone.
Blocking commands are initiated by a protection element that detects faults external to the protected zone. Detection of an external fault at the local end of a protected circuit results in a blocking signal being transmitted to the remote end. At the remote end, receipt of the blocking signal prevents the remote end protection operating if it had detected the external fault. The risk of a spurious trip is higher.
Direct tripping: remote triggering signals sent directly to the main trigger relay. Reception of the command triggers trips the circuit breaker. The method of communication must be reliable and secure because any signal detected at the receiving end will cause a trip of the circuit at that end.
Teleprotection includes two groups of protection classes, one standard and the other secured. Secured versions are more reliable, but slower.
During configuration, only one or the other of these two groups can be chosen
Procedure
For each command, select the type of application by selecting the value with the scroll down window.
When selecting parameters from two groups by error, an error message appears.
8.8.4 Sender Transmission parameter configuration procedure
Depending on user needs and of the characteristics of input signals applied to the DIP, notably their duration, two procedures are available.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 38/74 e-terragridcom DIP
8.8.4.1 Procedure without validation delay
For each command
1. Using the scroll-down window select a type of application.
Option:
2. Using the scroll-down window select a Holding Delay and check the Pulsed mode or not.
3. Click the button.
4. Give a path for the saved file and name it.
8.8.4.2 Procedure without validation delay
For each command
1. Using the scroll-down window select a type of application.
2. Using the scroll-down window select the value for Holding Delay.
3. Click the button.
Note: The <Holding Delay> parameter is automatically set to a minimum value compatible with the application scheme.
4. Give a path for the saved file and name it.
Holding delay, Holding delay validation, and Type of application parameters are dependent.
If the procedure indicated is not applied (e.g. Holding time selected before the types of application, incompatibilities may occur.
In case of incompatibility when selecting the protection schemes, warning messages are displayed.
More particularly, if the holding time is incompatible, the following warning message is displayed:
In this case, the minimum value for holding time is adjusted automatically to a value compatible with the protection scheme.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 39/74
8.8.5 Sending the general parameters configuration to the DIP equipment
When you have completed Sender Parameters configuration as described above:
Click the button. The following window opens:
The DIP resets.
8.9 Configuring Receiver Parameters
FIGURE 13 – CONFIGURATION – RECEIVER TAB PAGE
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 40/74 e-terragridcom DIP
8.9.1 Configuring LF band
The Bandwidth is a technical characteristic of the medium used corresponding to its signal transmission capacity.
The useful band is the part of the medium bandwidth used to send signals. This may be different from the useful band chosen for the transmitter.
Depending on the characteristics of the medium, select the appropriate bandwidth via the Bandwidth scroll-down window.
Possible values are:
− 300-1900
− 400-2000
− 670-2260
− 850-2450
− 1040-2630
− 1220-2810
− 1400-3000
− 1590-3180
− 2000-3600
8.9.2 Configuring Receiver Input Level
Guard Signal
This parameter defines the Guard Signal reception level.
Parameter values are in dBm.
Value Range -40 to 0 dBm.
Select the Guard Signal input level using the scrolling button.
Command / Guard relative frequency level.
This parameter corresponds to the relative level between command frequencies reception level and Guard Signal. For example, it is used to compensate the effect of a boosting upon a transmission by PLC.
Parameter values are in dB.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 41/74
Value Range -6 + 6 dB
Select Commands / Guard Gain using the scrolling button.
Note: The Receiver Input level can also be set from the Maintenance window, manually or automatically.
8.9.3 Configuring Receiver Protection Schemes
Parameter Description
There are a six types of application, the principle is identical as when configuring the transmitter. For more detail, refer to § 0 Configuring the types of transmitter application
When allocating a type of protection to commands, check that all types chosen belong to the same group (standard or reinforced)
Procedure
For each command
− Select the Type in the scrolling window.
Note: Check that the type of protection selected belongs to the same range.
8.9.4 Configuring the status of the restitution relays upon the alarm.
Parameter Description
Inactive: the command restitution relay switches to inactive in case of alarm.
Former State : the restitution relay switch remains open or closed, even in case of alarm. The alarm has no impact on the status of the switch.
For each command
− Select the Output relay status upon alarm parameter using the scrolling window.
8.9.5 Receiver holding delay configuration
This parameter defines the minimum holding delay of command reception switches.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 42/74 e-terragridcom DIP
Range value 0 to 3000 ms by 1 ms steps.
Using the scroll-down window select the value for Holding Delay.
NOTE: For more information on this parameter, refer to document PTC-DIP5K-TS008.
8.9.6 Configuring unblocking parameters
Unblocking
This function, commonly admitted under the name unblocking, is used to send a pulsed command in case of loss or drop in guard signal reception.
Only command which type is Permissive tripping can be unblocked. Each command can be unblocked, independently of the others.
For each command to unblock, check the corresponding box.
Unblocking threshold
It is the level of drop in guard signal reception from which the order is unblocked.
Parameter values are in dB. The value range is -20 to -10 dB. Display accuracy is ± 0.1dB.
Select the unblocking threshold using the scrolling button or enter the value of the corresponding window.
Unblocking delay
It is the time during which the unblocking condition is present before it becomes effective.
Parameter values are in ms. Range value 5 to 100 ms. Display accuracy is ± 0.1 ms.
Select the unblocking threshold using the scrolling button or enter the value of the corresponding window.
Command delay
Parameter values are in ms. Range value 30 to 500 ms. Display accuracy is ± 0.1 ms.
Select the unblocking threshold time using the scrolling button or enter the value of the corresponding window.
8.9.7 Sending Receiver Parameter Configuration
When you have completed Receiver Parameters configuration as described above:
Click the button, give a path for the configuration file and name it.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 43/74
Click the button. The following window opens:
The DIP resets.
Check the correct status of LEDs after the reset and the absence of alarms.
8.10 Configuring Input/output Parameters
To configure Input/Output parameters:
− Open the <Configuration> window (see § 8.6).
FIGURE 14 – INPUT/OUTPUT TAB PAGE
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 44/74 e-terragridcom DIP
8.10.1 Configuring I/O Boards
An input-output board allows managing up to 4 commands. A second board provides access to the Input combination logic menu.
FIGURE 15 – I/O BOARDS
Select the I/O Boards parameter corresponding to your hardware configuration by checking the corresponding box.
8.10.2 Configuring Input Filter Delay
FIGURE 16 – INPUT FILTER DELAY
Parameter Description
The Input Filter on inputs is a threshold applied to the input command signal. In case of disturbance, it allows to exclude a noise peak which may be considered as being a command.
Commands with a duration less than the Input Filter Delay duration are not transmitted.
Commands with a duration more than the Input Filter Delay duration are validated and transmitted.
Therefore, the propagation time of the transmitted command measured between the appearance of the signal at the input and restitution will be increased by the delay of the Input Filter parameter.
Parameter value
Range 0 to 100 ms in 1 ms steps.
Procedure
For each command to which an input filter delay is to be applied:
Select the value using the scrolling button or enter the parameter directly.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 45/74
8.10.3 Configuring Combinatorial Logic on Inputs
This panel is only available having configured 2 I/O boards.
FIGURE 17 – COMBINATORIAL LOGIC ON INPUTS
It is used to allocate commands with logical associations between input signals.
For each command the possible choices are:
− IN1: command 1 is allocated to the signal connected to the EN1 input (P10 connector)
− IN2: command 1 is allocated to the signal connected to the EN1 input (P10 connector)
− EN1 or EN2: command 1 is allocated to the result of the OR operator applied to the signal connected on the EN1 input (P10 connector) and EN2 input (P10 connector) i.e. command 1 will be transmitted upon a signal already present on the EN1 or EN2 inputs
− EN1 and EN2: command 1 is allocated to the result of the AND operator applied to the input signal connected to the EN1 input (P10 connector) and EN2 input (P10 connector). i.e. command 1 will be transmitted upon signals already present on the EN1 and EN2 inputs
For command 2 same explanation replacing EN1 by EN3 and EN2 by EN4.
For command 3 same explanation replacing EN1 by EN5, EN2 by EN6 and P10 connector by P12 connector.
For command 4 same explanation replacing EN1 by EN7, EN2 by EN8 and P10 connector by P12 connector.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 46/74 e-terragridcom DIP
8.10.4 Sending Input/Output Configuration
When you have completed Input/Output Parameters configuration as described above:
Click the button, give a path for the configuration file and name it.
Click the button. The following window opens:
The DIP resets.
Check the status of LEDs after the reset and lack of alarms.
8.11 Configuring alarm parameters
To configure alarm parameters:
Open the Configuration window (see § 8.6).
Click the Alarms tab page.
FIGURE 18 – CONFIGURATION – ALARMS TAB PAGE
NOTE: A minor alarm indicates a problem but teleprotection continues operating.
A major alarm blocks teleprotection.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 47/74
8.11.1 Configuring the Alarm on external input parameter
The External alarm input comes from the transmission equipment whose DIP is connected (PLC or other). It allows to block teleprotection, after a time defined in this window, when the transmission equipment is in alarm.
The transmission equipment and DIP must be interconnected with a special connection cable supporting these alarm wires. The wiring is indicated in the installation manual.
Parameter values are in seconds. The value range is 0 to 2.5 s. The display accuracy is ± 0.1s.
To configure Alarm on External Input:
− Check the Alarm on external input box,
− Select the delay value using the scrolling button or enter it directly.
− Check the button for level Minor or Major button.
8.11.2 Configuring Input Duration Command Alarm
This alarm is set if the input command duration is more than the parameter value.
Parameter values are in seconds. The value range is 0.5 to 10 s. The display accuracy is ± 0.1s.
To configure Input Command Duration Alarm:
− Check the Input Command Duration Alarm box,
− Select the delay value using the scrolling button or enter it directly.
− Select the alarm level, Minor or Major.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 48/74 e-terragridcom DIP
8.11.3 Configuring Alarm on Signal loss.
Alarm on Signal loss
This alarm occurs if the Signal reception level at the input of the receiver, and measured through internal digital filter, is under the threshold during a Delay.
The reference level is that configured on § 8.9.2 Configuring the input level of the receiver.
The alarm is displayed in the Alarms preview window and the major alarm LED is lit
Threshold
Defines the relative level under which an alarm is triggered.
Parameter values are in dBr. The value range is -16 to -6 dBr. The display accuracy is ± 0.1 dBr.
Delay
Defines the low level signal delay from which an alarm is triggered.
Parameter values are in seconds. The value range is 1 to 10 s. The display accuracy is ± 0.1s.
To configure the Signal Loss Alarm parameters:
− Select the threshold level using the scrolling button or enter it directly.
− Select the delay using the scrolling button or enter it directly.
8.11.4 Configuring Noise Alarm
Noise alarm
This alarm occurs if the noise level, measured through internal digital filter, is above a Threshold during a Delay.
The reference level is that configured on § 8.9.2 Configuring the input level of the receiver.
The alarm is displayed in the Alarms preview window and the major alarm LED is lit
Threshold
Defines the difference between noise measured and the reference level of the guard signal at the input of the receiver. The alarm is triggered when this gap is less or equal to the threshold.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 49/74
Parameter values are in dBr. The value range is -12 to -6 dBr. The display accuracy is ± 0.1 dBr.
Delay
Parameter values are in s. The value range is 1 to 10 s. Display accuracy is ± 0.1 s.
To configure Noise Alarm:
− Select the threshold level using the scrolling button or enter it directly.
− Select the delay using the scrolling button or enter it directly.
8.11.5 Configuring on Link test failure
The Link test can be periodical (Daily or Hourly) launched (for settings, see § 8.7.4 Configuring the link test).
A punctual link test can also be launched from the toolbar (Menu Test > Link Test).
In case of failed test, the latter may be repeated 3 times in a row. If the failure persists, an alarm is triggered. An alarm status is displayed in the Alarm Snapshot window.
To configure this parameter, select the Minor or Major alarm level by checking the corresponding box.
When a minor alarm has been defined, a new punctual test or the next programmed can be performed. The alarm will be cleared or not, according to the result.
If a major alarm has been defined, the equipment will be blocked and an intervention required.
8.11.6 Configuring the Locking alarm
This alarm is triggered when the transmission medium is highly disturbed and excessive signals present at the input of the receiver over a given time may cause a risk for security or reliability of the protection scheme.
If these conditions lasts for a time exceeding that defined by the user, the alarm is displayed in the Alarms preview window and the major alarm LED is lit The equipment is blocked until the medium is normalized.
Parameter values are expressed in s. The value range is 1 to 10 s.
To configure this parameter:
Check the Locking alarm box.
Select the parameter value using the scrolling button or enter it directly.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 50/74 e-terragridcom DIP
8.11.7 Configuring alarm output delay
Alarm outputs delay:
Closing of the contact relays can be delayed.
Possible values are:
− 0
− 2.5 s
− 5 s
− 10 s
There are 4 relays, two are dedicated to major alarms and the other two to minor alarms.
Select the delay by positioning the scrolling button.
8.11.8 Sending the alarms configuration
When you have completed the Alarms parameters configuration as described above:
Click the button, give a path for the configuration file and name it.
Click the button. The following window opens:
The DIP resets.
Check the correct status of LEDs after the reset and the absence of alarms.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 51/74
8.12 File Configuration Menu
FIGURE 19 – CONFIGURATION MENU
This menu allows configuration files to be edited, saved, sent and closed.
8.12.1 Editing a configuration file
The Edit menu is used to display a synthesis Parameter values window.
To edit a configuration file in the Configuration window:
Select File > Edit.
Click the button. The following window opens:
8.12.2 Saving a configuration file
Save: this menu opens a standard Windowsdialog box allowing the displayed configuration to be saved in a file.
To save a configuration file:
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 52/74 e-terragridcom DIP
Select File > Save.
Give a path for the saved file and name it.
8.12.3 Sending a configuration file
Send: This menu, accessible from user level 2, is used to send the HMI displayed configuration to the unit. After receiving the configuration file, the unit resets. When the unit restarts, the sent configuration is taken into account.
A configuration window is opened in the HMI using the menus File > New or File > Open or DIP > Configuration.
Once modified, the configuration file can be sent to the unit using the menu File >Send or
the button.
To send a configuration file:
Select File > Send or click on the button.
The following window opens:
The DIP resets.
Check the correct status of LEDs after the reset and the absence of alarms.
8.12.4 Closing a configuration file
Exit: This menu closes the configuration window.
To close a configuration window select File > Exit
8.13 <DIP> Menu
The <DIP> menu allows to display:
− Configuration
− Hardware configuration
− Alarms snapshot
− Inputs / Outputs
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 53/74
− Versions
− Date Setup
Refer to section 8.14 for more details.
The DIP menu allows to launch the commands:
− Reset.
− Save environment
8.13.1 Reading the configuration
To read the configuration parameters:
Select DIP> Configuration. The Configuration window opens:
When opening the Configuration window, the user can modify the configuration parameters (see § 8.5 and next).
8.13.2 Reading the hardware configuration
To read the hardware configuration:
Select DIP> Hardware configuration.
The Hardware window opens:
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 54/74 e-terragridcom DIP
FIGURE 20 – HARDWARE CONFIGURATION WINDOW
This window shows the hardware configuration. The units installed are accessible and the appropriate box checked. Units not installed are grayed out and not legible.
8.13.3 Reading the versions
This menu allows to read the version of the EPLD and DSP firmware.
To read the version:
Select DIP>Versions.
The following window opens:
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 55/74
8.13.4 Instant alarm reading
To read the alarms statuses in Alarms preview:
Select DIP> Preview alarms.
Check the <Auto update> box to refresh the values regularly.
8.13.5 Read input / output statuses
To read input / output statuses:
Select DIP> Input / Output.
The following Input / Output Statuses window opens:
FIGURE 21 – INPUT / OUTPUT WINDOW
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 56/74 e-terragridcom DIP
The Input / Output Statuses parameter represents the status of commands acquired and rendered. Two statuses are possible: <Active and Inactive>.
− Inactive command = Inputs in black and Outputs in blue
− Active command = Inputs and Outputs in red
Example of active command:
A signal command is active on EN1, the matching input is red.
The signal is transmitted, Tx C1 in red,
The status of the R1 command restitution is active and red.
8.14 DIP Maintenance Menus
The DIP>Maintenance menu allows performing the following operations:
− Switch to maintenance or normal mode
− Unblock line or relay
− Local loop back
− Forcing transmission, reception or an alarm
− Reset events or alarms (local or remote)
− To access the Maintenance menus:
− Select DIP>Maintenance, the following window opens (user 2 level):
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 57/74
FIGURE 22 – MAINTENANCE LEVELS
The maintenance features available depend on the user level:
− User level 0: only reading the input level is accessible.
− User level 2: access to the output level, reception level, and Forcing / Loopback / Blocking tab page is lost.
8.14.1 Switch to Maintenance / Normal mode
Switching to the maintenance mode is available from user 2 level.
To switch from the Maintenance mode to the Normal mode:
Select Mode>Normal mode.
In the normal mode, the <Level> tab page is available.
To switch from the Normal mode to the Maintenance mode:
Select Mode>Maintenance.
In the Maintenance mode, the <Forcing / Locking / Looping> tab page is available.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 58/74 e-terragridcom DIP
8.14.2 Maintenance status bar
The Maintenance status bar displays the following elements:
− Line status (blocked / unblocked)
− Relay status (blocked / unblocked)
− Loopback status on / off.
8.14.3 Reading the input level measurement
This screen, accessible from the user level 0, allows reading the input level in the graphic form.
The digital values are also displayed in the upper part of the screen.
The value range is -45 to 15 dBr, nominal value for receiver alignment being 0 dBr. The display accuracy is ± 0.1 dBr.
Click the button to display the values to be refreshed.
Click the Automatic refresh button to display the values to be refreshed regularly.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 59/74
8.14.4 Configuring the output levels setting
This screen, accessible from the user level 2, allows defining the guard signal output levels as well as those of the command frequencies.
The value range is -30 dBm to 6 dBm, the display accuracy is 0,1 dBm.
Procedure
For the guard frequency and frequency 1 to 7:
Select the output level using the scrolling button or enter it directly.
Once the operation has been completed, click the button.
Settings are active immediately, but will not be saved if the DIP is reset. For saving, refer to § 0
8.14.5 Configuring the reception level
This screen, accessible from user 2 level, allows to adjust the level of reception.
Guard frequency
The level of reception of guard frequencies is expressed directly in dBm.
This level can be set between -45 dBm and +15 dBm.
Display accuracy is ± 0.1dBm.
Command / Guard relative level
The Commands / Guard relative level is expressed in dB.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 60/74 e-terragridcom DIP
This level is adjustable between 0 and +6dB in the normal mode and between 0 and +16dB in the enhanced mode.
Settings are made while considering the level of output and attenuation of the medium.
Display accuracy is ± 0.1dBm.
Settings of the Guard and Commands / Guard relative level parameters are independent, and must be sent separately.
Procedure
Select the output level using the Guard scrolling button or enter it directly.
Click the button.
Select the Command / Guard relative level scrolling button or enter it directly.
Click the button.
Settings are active immediately, but will not be saved if the DIP is reset. For saving, refer to § 0
8.14.6 Align automatically
This procedure allows automatic adjustment of the alignment level of the receiver in respect of the guard signal received.
During the automatic setting procedure, check that the line and relays are properly locked (see §8.14.2.). Indeed, if the unblocking function is programmed, an unblocking error can be issued when the difference between the new setting and the previous exceeds the threshold programmed. (see § 8.9.6)
To launch automatic alignment:
The button is accessible on the user 2 level.
The following window opens, indicating that automatic alignment has started:
Once the alignment is complete, the following message is displayed:
Click the button.
Settings are active immediately, but will not be saved if the DIP is reset. For saving, refer to the next paragraph.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 61/74
8.14.7 Saving level settings.
The settings of the output level and reception level (manual or automatic) are active but lost after a reset.
Once the settings are complete, close the Maintenance window to save them:
A pop-up window opens:
Answer .
A message appears, confirming that the DIP has been reset.
The settings are stored in flash memory, and remain active after a potential reset.
8.14.8 Configuring forcing and loopback
This tab page is accessible on the user 2 level and in the Maintenance mode.
To access the Forcing / Blocking / Loopback window, open the Maintenance window and select the Forcing / Blocking / Loopback tab page.
FIGURE 23 – MAINTENANCE – FORCING
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 62/74 e-terragridcom DIP
8.14.9 Unlocking feature
This window is common to two features, unlocking and loopback ;
The AF line statuses and relays are:
− Unblocked
− Blocked
Unlock AF line: this status is used to connect the teleprotection transmitter to the transmission line. This operating mode allows sending the commands issued in the maintenance mode over the transmission link. During a maintenance operation, apply all precautions, considering the risk of untimely command transmission commands, as the operator can simulate the acquisition of a command.
Lock AF line: this status is used to disconnect the teleprotection transmitter from the transmission line. No maintenance operation will be transmitted online. The operator can then simulate safely a command acquisition.
Relay unlocking: when this status is activated, the output of the relays complies with the command conditions present in the reception line. Take all precautions required during maintenance operations, as this operating mode introduces the risk of untimely command reception in case of simulation of command restitution by the operator.
Relay locking: when this status is activated, the status of the output relays are forced to the inactive status, regardless of the command conditions present in the reception line.
Procedure
To unlock Line AF:
Check the Line AF box
To lock Line AF
Un –Check the line AF box
To unlock Contact Relay
Check the Contact Relay box
To lock Contact relay
Un –Check the Contact Relay box
Once the Loop and Unlock parameters are configured:
Click the button,
Check the update status of your settings in the bottom bar:
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 63/74
8.14.10 Configuring input/output loopback
Loopback
In this mode, the transmission is looped back to reception even if access to the sending medium is blocked.
Procedure
To activate loopback:
Select Active by checking the appropriate box.
To deactivate the loopback:
Select Inactive by checking the appropriate box.
Click the button.
Check the condition for updating the settings in the bottom bar:
8.14.11 Forcing the transmitter
Freq 8 corresponds to the guard frequency, Freq 1 to Freq 7 are used to code the commands.
As two frequencies are required to code commands, and the frequencies being forced separately, there is no risk of sending a command by frequency forcing.
This screen is used to send frequencies corresponding to different statuses over unblocked lines: inactivity, command or test message. To use this feature, the copy relays must be unblocked at all times.
To force a frequency:
Check the appropriate box.
Click the button.
The forced frequency becomes red:
To interrupt forcing, click the button.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 64/74 e-terragridcom DIP
8.14.12 Forcing output relays
This screen is used to force the status of command rendering relays on the local unit. The command output relays will be activated only if the relays are unblocked. The copy relays must be unblocked at all times.
To force an output relay:
Check the appropriate box.
Click the button.
The forced command becomes red:
To interrupt forcing, click the button.
8.14.13 Forcing PLC commands
Forcing Transmission Reception
When commands are sent or received via the PLC, transmission / reception of the other signals (telephony, data) can be blocked to ensure all power is available for these orders. Transmission and reception signals are sent with the commands to activate the blocking feature.
Forcing PLC commands allows activating the transmission / reception blocking feature, to check its operational status.
− Check PLC transmission blocking (BLE feature):
Check the Active box under Transmission.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 65/74
Click the button.
The active box turns red
Use a multimeter to check that the contact relay is activated, the contact between the terminals 3 and 10 of connector P18 is closed.
To interrupt forcing, click the button.
− Check PLC transmission blocking (BLR feature):
Check the Active box under Reception.
Click the button.
The active box turns red:
Use a multimeter to check that the contact relay of terminals 5-12 of connector P18 is closed.
To interrupt forcing, click the button.
− Active Inactive forcing
When a DIP becomes inactive (supply failure, major alarm), the relay of terminals 7-14 of connector P18 (presence circuit) closes to inform the PLC. Inactive forcing allows simulating the absence of the DIP.
To force the inactive status of the DIP:
Check the Inactive box
The Inactive box turns red:
Click the button.
Use a multimeter to check that the contact relay of terminals 7-14 of connector P18 is closed.
− EXT command
This part allows to check the presence of an external alarm between terminals 6-13 of connector P18. This contact allows the DIP to be informed of the presence of the equipment it is connected to (e.g. PLC)
In case of an external alarm, Active is displayed in yellow:
In case of lack of external alarm, Inactive is displayed in green: .
8.14.14 Alarms forcing
This function allows forcing the contacts of the major and minor alarms
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 66/74 e-terragridcom DIP
To force the alarms:
Check the Minor or Major box, or both.
Click the button.
The other parts of the window are grayed out and inaccessible.
Check the alarms status LEDs, check that the switches of corresponding alarms on connector P16 are closed.
To interrupt forcing, click the button.
8.15 Date setup
Set the date in the PC Time / Date section of the window.
By default, the PC parameters are proposed. For other choices, enter the information related with the date and time required,
Click the button to copy the settings in the DIP section.
Note: The date can also be displayed and set by clicking the button in the upper tool bar.
8.16 Resetting the DIP
To reset the DIP from the DIP menu:
Select DIP> Reset.
A confirmation message is then displayed, in a scroll down window:
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 67/74
Answer .
The following window opens, indicating that resetting is in progress.
After restarting the DIP, check the status of LEDs and lack of alarms.
8.17 <History> Menu
FIGURE 24 – HISTORY MENU
There are two types of history:
− Non time-stamped (counters)
− Time-stamped by the internal clock (events / alarms)
The <History> menu allows to display the following information:
− Events files
− Alarms files
− Counters
The <History> also allows to clear events and alarms histories.
CAUTION: ONCE THE HISTORIES HAVE BEEN CLEARED, THE INFORMATION CAN NO LONGER BE RETRIEVED
8.17.1 Events reading
To read events:
Select History>Events. The following message is displayed in a pop-up window when loading events:
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 68/74 e-terragridcom DIP
Note: Events reading is also possible by clicking the button in the upper tool bar.
The memory has a capacity of 1785 events, it may be limited to 255 per configuration (see § 8.7.5 Limiting events)
FIGURE 25 – EVENT WINDOW – DUAL TONE
The File menu is used to save and print events files (*.event), but also exit the events file:
The Save and Print buttons allow to save and print the files respectively.
The Refresh button refreshes the events list.
The File menu in the main window allows opening the events files (*.event):
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 69/74
The events time-stamped by the internal clock are saved in a list limited to 1785 events. Once the memory is full, any new event replaces the older event saved.
8.17.2 Alarms reading
To read the alarms:
Select History>Alarms. The following message is displayed in a pop-up window when loading alarms:
Note: Alarms reading is also possible by clicking the button in the upper tool bar.
FIGURE 26 – ALARMS WINDOW
The File menu is used to save and print alarms files (*.alarm), but also exit the alarms file:
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 70/74 e-terragridcom DIP
The Save and Print buttons allow to save and print the files respectively.
The Refresh button refreshes the alarms list.
The File menu in the main window allows the alarms files (*.alarm):
The alarms time-stamped by the internal clock are saved in a list limited to 1785 events. Once the memory is full, any new alarm replaces the first alarm saved.
8.17.3 Reading counters
To read information of the counters, select History > Counters. The following screen opens.
FIGURE 27 – LOCAL COMMAND COUNTERS WINDOW
The File menu is used to save and print counter files (*.cnter), but also exit the counter file:
The Save and Print and refresh buttons allow to save, print or update the files respectively.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 71/74
The File menu in the main window allows opening the counter files (*.cnter):
The memorization capacity of the counters is limited to 65535.
8.17.4 Deleting events
The Delete the events option allows deleting all events displayed in the list.
Note: This option fully deletes system events and its action cannot be cancelled. To display the events at a later date, use the File>Save option to save a copy of the events list before using the Delete>Events option.
To delete the events list currently displayed.
Select History>Delete >Delete events.
A confirmation window opens:
Answer .
Check that the events file is empty by selecting History>Events.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 72/74 e-terragridcom DIP
8.17.5 Deleting alarms
The Delete the alarms option allows deleting all alarms displayed in the list.
Note: This option fully deletes system alarms and its action cannot be cancelled. To display the alarms at a later date, use the File>Save option to save a copy of the alarms list before using the Delete>Alarms option.
To delete the alarms list currently displayed:
Select History>Delete >Delete alarms.
A confirmation window opens:
Answer .
Check that the alarms file is empty by selecting History>Alarms.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/A23
DUAL TONE
e-terragridcom DIP Page 73/74
8.18 <Test> Menu
The link test allows checking the ability of the DIP link to sent and receive commands in the bidirectional mode.
The automatic launching of the link test can also be planned daily or hourly (see § 8.5.7 for settings).
Command processing overrides the link test.
To launch the link test:
Select Test>Link test.
In case of bad results after 3 tests, a DIP fault is declared.
A minor or major alarm is defined, according to the alarm configuration (refer to § ).
When the alarm is defined as minor, the next link test, automatic or not, normalizes or maintains the alarm.
8.19 <Factory> Menu
This menu offers a single choice
This menu disconnects the battery (the factory exit status). The latter is restarted automatically once the date set. (see § 0)
8.20 <Help> Menu
This menu provides access to the help documentation and allows to read the software version of the HMI.
8.20.1 Access to the help files
To access the User Manual, select Help>User Manual.
Click the manual chosen, the corresponding pdf document opens.
DIP/EN HI/A23
Human Machine Interface
DUAL TONE
Page 74/74 e-terragridcom DIP
8.20.2 Reading the software version of the HMI
To read the software version of the HMI:
Select Help>About, the following window opens:
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/B23DIGITAL e-terragridcom DIP
HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE
PART 3: DIP – DIGITAL
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/B23
DIGITAL
e-terragridcom DIP Page 1/60
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 7
2. HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL 8
2.1 Information presentation 8
2.2 Example in a paragraph 8
3. OVERVIEW 9
3.1 Foreword 9
3.2 System Required 9
3.3 Installing the HMI 9
4. USER LEVELS AND PASSWORDS 10
4.1 User level structure 10
4.2 Menus 11
5. DIP SECURITY PASSWORD MANAGEMENT 12
5.1 Rules for Password Creation 12
5.2 Accessing the Password Manager Menus with the <Password> Menu 12
5.3 Modifying the Password Manager password with the Password Menu 13
5.4 Creating User Password with the <Create Passwords> Menu 14
5.5 Managing the Password listing with the Menu <List passwords> 15
5.6 Exiting the Password Manager 15
5.7 Viewing the software version of the Password Manager 15
6. INTERFACE DESCRIPTION 16
6.1 Main screen Description 16
6.2 Title bar 16
6.3 Menu bar 17
6.4 Toolbar 17
6.5 Pop-up menus 17
6.6 Status bars 18
6.7 Work and dialog zone. 19
7. FUNCTIONALITIES DESCRIPTION 20
7.1 <File> Menu 20
7.2 <Tools> Menu 20
7.3 <Read> Menu 21
7.4 <Date> Menu 21
7.5 <Maintenance> menu 21
7.6 <?> Menu 21
DIP/EN HI/B23
Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 2/60 e-terragridcom DIP
8. OPERATION OF THE HMI 22
8.1 Launching the HMI 22
8.2 Configuration procedure 22
8.2.1 Configuration procedure from the <File> menu 22
8.2.2 Configuration procedure from the <Read> menu 22
8.3 <Tools> Menu 22
8.3.1 User level selection 23
8.3.2 Returning to level 0 23
8.3.3 Modify the password 23
8.3.4 Connect the HMI from the DIP 24
8.3.5 Disconnecting the HMI 24
8.4 Configuration window 24
8.4.1 Access to the Configuration window 24
8.4.2 Configuration window - <File> menu 26
8.4.3 Configuration window - <Modify> menu 27
8.5 Configuring General Parameters 27
8.6 Configuring the parameters of the communication interface 29
8.7 Configuring the redundancy interface 31
8.8 Configuring Input/output Parameters 33
8.8.1 Input filter configuration 33
8.8.2 Input logic configuration 34
8.8.3 State of output on Communication Major Alarm 35
8.9 Application parameters configuration 36
8.9.1 Configuration of transmission holding delays 36
8.9.2 Configuration of the holding times for a command restitution 37
8.9.3 Teleprotection scheme configuration 37
8.10 Alarm parameters configuration 38
8.10.1 Configuration of the bit error rate threshold 39
8.10.2 Configuration of the prolonged command alarm 39
8.10.3 Configuration of the communication time alarm 39
8.10.4 Configuration of the command relay delay 40
8.11 Entering comments 40
8.12 Sending a configuration file 41
8.13 <Read> Menu 41
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/B23
DIGITAL
e-terragridcom DIP Page 3/60
8.13.1 Menu Description 41
8.13.2 Reading a configuration 43
8.13.3 Reading the hardware configuration 43
8.13.4 Reading the DIP firmware version 44
8.13.5 Read comments 44
8.13.6 Read an events list 45
8.13.7 Read an alarms list 46
8.13.8 Reading counters 47
8.13.9 Reading instant alarms 48
8.13.10 Read input / output statuses 49
8.14 <Date> Menu 49
8.14.1 Read the date 49
8.14.2 Writing the date 50
8.15 <Maintenance> menu 50
8.15.1 Switch to the maintenance / operating mode 51
8.15.2 Blocking / Unblocking 52
8.15.3 Loopback 52
8.15.4 Forcing 52
8.15.5 Transmitter forcing 53
8.15.6 Restitution forcing 54
8.15.7 Alarms forcing 54
8.15.8 Interface forcing 55
8.15.9 Reset 56
8.15.10 Resetting the DIP 56
8.16 Expert Menu 57
8.17 Reading the version of the HMI 57
8.18 Exit the HMI. 57
9. EXAMPLE OF REDUNDANCY CONFIGURATION 58
9.1 Example description 58
9.2 Prior conditions 58
DIP/EN HI/B23
Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 4/60 e-terragridcom DIP
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1 – MAIN SCREEN BEFORE PC/TELEPROTECTION CONNECTION 16
FIGURE 3 – MENU BAR 17
FIGURE 4 – TOOLBAR 17
FIGURE 5 – MAINTENANCE STATUS BAR 18
FIGURE 6 – EXAMPLE OF DIALOG BOX WITH LIST DISPLAY 19
FIGURE 7 – FILE MENU 20
FIGURE 8 – MAIN CONFIGURATION WINDOW 25
FIGURE 9 – CONFIGURATION WINDOW TOOLBAR 25
FIGURE 10 – CONFIGURATION FILE MENU 26
FIGURE 11 – CLOCK SOURCE SELECTION 30
FIGURE 12 – EXAMPLE OF READING THE EVENTS LIST 45
FIGURE 13 – EXAMPLE OF READING IN THE ALARMS LIST 46
FIGURE 14 – EXAMPLE OF LOCAL COMMAND COUNTERS 47
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/B23
DIGITAL
e-terragridcom DIP Page 5/60
MODIFICATIONS PAGE
VERSION DATE COMMENTS
A 04/01/2001 Original issue
B 23/08/2004 ALSTOM logo and addition of analog version
C 12/07/2006 New features and additional technical explanations
D 14/11/2007 New chapter. Task oriented writing. HMI chapter separated in three sections: digital, single tone analog and dual tone analog.
E 11/02/2008 Minor corrections
A22 15/04/2009 Version 2.2
B22 23/12/2009 Minor corrections, added I/O SR200 optical interface IR187
A23 13/01/2011 Version 2.3
B23 28/03/2011 State of output on Communication Major Alarm added
DIP/EN HI/B23
Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 6/60 e-terragridcom DIP
GENERAL
This manual describes the Human-Machine Interface of the e-terragridcom DIP, i.e. the microcomputing application which enables commissioning, operational use and maintenance of this unit.
DEFINITIONS
HMI Tool for using the DIP (Human-Machine Interface).
Configuration All the characteristics (fixed components) and parameters (customization components) of a teleprotection.
Configuration File Micro-computer file containing all the configuration components of a teleprotection.
Input password Password for accessing the ‘Password Manager’ utility.
User level All the authorized operations corresponding to the level of responsibility of a given operator.
Level password Password for accessing a user level.
NOTE: Windows and PC are registered trademarks.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/B23
DIGITAL
e-terragridcom DIP Page 7/60
1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE SAFETY SECTION DIP5K/EN SS/A11 OR LATER ISSUE, THE TECHNICAL DATA SECTION AND THE RATING ON THE EQUIPMENT RATING LABEL.
THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED RS232C(1)
SERIAL PORT IS AN EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. WHEN THE TELEPROTECTION IS ENERGIZED, THE TERMINALS OF THIS PORT SHOULD NOT BE TOUCHED SINCE IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF A SINGLE FAULT CONDITION THERE WOULD BE A VERY LOW PROBABILITY OF AN ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS DESIGNED TO BE USED FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, THAT IS MONITORING AND SOFTWARE DOWNLOADS; IT IS NOT INTENDED TO BE PERMANENTLY CONNECTED.
THE FRONT PANEL MOUNTED RJ45(1)
SERIAL PORT IS AN EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV) CIRCUIT WHICH PROVIDES BASIC INSULATION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. THIS PORT IS INTENDED TO BE USED FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES, I.E. MONITORING AND DOWNLOADING THE SOFTWARE.
(1) As per the option chosen
DIP/EN HI/B23
Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 8/60 e-terragridcom DIP
2. HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL
The firmware or software version numbers which may appear in illustrations in this manual may not reflect the latest implemented in the unit; the information is nonetheless current.
2.1 Information presentation
Menu Path are indicated: Menu_level_entry1>Menu_level_entry2>.
Example: select File>New.
In the text Menu names are between <> example: Example: <DIP> menu.
In the text window names are between <>. Example: <Entry>.
A screen shot shows a button. Example: represents the OK button.
2.2 Example in a paragraph
<HISTORY> MENU NAME BETWEEN <>
To clear events (requires level 2):
Select History>Erase>Erase Events INDICATES THE ACCESS PATH
A <CAUTION> confirmation window opens: NAME OF THE WINDOW BETWEEN <>
Answer .SHOWS THE BUTTON
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/B23
DIGITAL
e-terragridcom DIP Page 9/60
3. OVERVIEW
3.1 Foreword
Thanks to its power and easy use, the HMI of the DIP teleprotection allows, either locally or remotely:
− complete commissioning of the unit and control of its levels, without the need for other tools,
− filing of configurations (=>rationalization of commissioning actions),
− time-stamped recording of unit information (=> analysis and statistics),
− interactive and user-friendly maintenance,
− printing of unit parameters.
− This software has not been modified by adding new boards to the equipment:
− The SR200 board does not require programming,
− The IR187 board will be recognized automatically ; refer to chapter 8.6.
3.2 System Required
The HMI runs on PCs fitted equipped with Pentium III microprocessors and higher, operating under Windows 2000 Service Pack 4 or Windows XP Service Pack 2. The PC must feature at minimum:
− 40 MB free space on the HD,
− 256 MB RAM.
− A serial port, except if the DIP features the ME50 option which has an IP/RS232 converter
IMPORTANT: HAVING SEVERAL TASKS RUNNING CONCURRENTLY (DESKTOP OR OTHER TOOLS) MAY CAUSE PC-HMI TRANSMISSION FAULTS. THEREFORE, ALL OTHER APPLICATIONS SHOULD BE CLOSED BEFORE USING THIS HMI.
When the PC has no serial port, use a PCMCIA converter rather than a USB converter.
3.3 Installing the HMI
For safety purposes, we recommend installing the HMI from a copy of the disc supplied. Installation:
− Insert the CD-ROM supplied in the drive.
− Run the setup.exe file from the <Run> menu in the Program manager: D\:setup.
− Follow the instructions.
DIP/EN HI/B23
Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 10/60 e-terragridcom DIP
4. USER LEVELS AND PASSWORDS
4.1 User level structure
The DIP places operations in hierarchical order: some actions have no impact on unit operation, others, due to their impact on security and operation, require specific responsibility on the part of the operator.
The HMI is therefore structured in user levels; there are 2 of them, 0 and 2.
Level 0 is the default level on start-up. To enforce this hierarchical arrangement, the command menus are displayed according to user level.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/B23
DIGITAL
e-terragridcom DIP Page 11/60
4.2 Menus
Level
Menus 0 2
File New x x
Open x x
Exit x x
Tools User level selection x x
Returning to level 0 x x
Modify the password x x
Connect x x
Disconnect x x
Reading (local / remote) * Configuration x x
Hardware configuration x x
Version x x
Comments x x
Events file x x
Alarms file x x
Counters x x
Alarms snapshot x x
Input/Output x x
Remote reading Bit error rate
Date (local / remote) * read x x
write x
Maintenance * Maintenance mode/Operating mode x
unblocking line (security) line** x
unblocking line (security) relay** x
Local loop back** x
remote loop back** x
transmitter forcing** x
restitution forcing** x
alarms forcing** x
interface forcing**
Reset (local / remote) x
Reset (local / remote) x
Save environment x
TABLE 1 – MENU ACCESSIBILITY ACCORDING TO USER LEVEL
* To access these menus, you need to be connected.
** Accessible only in maintenance mode
*** Accessible only in case of optical/electrical redundancy
DIP/EN HI/B23
Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 12/60 e-terragridcom DIP
5. DIP SECURITY PASSWORD MANAGEMENT
The DIP Security Password Manager application, associated to the HMI application, is used to create, modify, read and delete the passwords.
To launch the application, click the desktop icon “DIP Security” icon or open the DIP group of programs and select it.
For security reasons, access to the Password Manager is password protected.
5.1 Rules for Password Creation
Passwords are case sensitive (Upper or lower) and include 1 to 15 characters to be chosen exclusively from the following:
− upper case (A to Z)
− lower case (a to z)
− numbers (0 to 9)
− ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ¨ | ~
5.2 Accessing the Password Manager Menus with the <Password> Menu
The <Password> menu enables you to access the Password manager menus: <Create> and <List>.
To access the Password Manager menus:
− Launch the DIP Security application by clicking the desktop icon. The <DIP password management> window opens:
− Select Password > Input, the <Password Input> window opens:
− Enter "DIP5000" upper case without the quotes in both windows (only upon first login).
Note: Modifying the Password Manager password is recommended after the first use (see the next paragraph).
− Click the button.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/B23
DIGITAL
e-terragridcom DIP Page 13/60
The following window opens:
The <Create> and <List Passwords> menus are available.
5.3 Modifying the Password Manager password with the Password Menu
The password Manager menu allows you to modify the password manager password.
Upon first use, use the ‘DIP5000’ password (upper case without the quotes). We recommend to then modify this password.
− Access the Manager menu (see § 5.2)
− Select Password > Modify. The following window opens:
− Enter the new password in compliance with the rules for Password Creation (see § 5.1).
Carefully note the new password. If you lose it the application must be reinstalled.
− Click the button. The following window opens:
DIP/EN HI/B23
Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 14/60 e-terragridcom DIP
− Confirm the new password by re-entering it. The following window opens:
− Click the button.
5.4 Creating User Password with the <Create Passwords> Menu
Several passwords may be created.
To create user passwords, select <Create Passwords>.
The <Enter password s> window below opens:
− Enter the new password in the <Input password> field, in compliance with the rules
for Password Creation (see § 5.1).
− Define the user level associated with the password by checking the Level 2 button.
− Click the button. A confirmation messages appears:
− Click the button.
− If required, you may enter other passwords to be defined in the <Password> window.
− Once the operation has been completed, click the button. Check the list of passwords (refer to the next paragraph).
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/B23
DIGITAL
e-terragridcom DIP Page 15/60
5.5 Managing the Password listing with the Menu <List passwords>
To access the Password List, click the Menu <List Passwords> of the Password Manager
The list of passwords is displayed.
− To Remove a password, select the password line in the list and click the
button. A confirmation message opens, answer
5.6 Exiting the Password Manager
To exit the password manager and return to the WINDOWS environment select Password>Exit.
5.7 Viewing the software version of the Password Manager
Select ?> About…. The following window opens:
DIP/EN HI/B23
Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 16/60 e-terragridcom DIP
6. INTERFACE DESCRIPTION
The HMI has an integrated environment, using standard WINDOWS tools and processes.
As only the operating modes specific to the HMI will be mentioned in the following, it is recommended that operators not familiar with WINDOWS refer to the user manual for this environment.
6.1 Main screen Description
The base screen includes 5 functional zones (figure 1 and figure 2 below):
FIGURE 1 – MAIN SCREEN BEFORE PC/TELEPROTECTION CONNECTION
FIGURE 2 – EXAMPLE OF MAIN SCREEN AFTER PC/ DIP CONNECTION
6.2 Title bar
The title bar displays the HMI name at the top part of the window.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/B23
DIGITAL
e-terragridcom DIP Page 17/60
6.3 Menu bar
The operator launches commands via the standard WINDOWS HMI menus, displayed according to the current user level (password dependent).
FIGURE 3 – MENU BAR
6.4 Toolbar
The operator can launch commands and read information locally via the toolbar shortcuts
Rolling the mouse over a tool displays information on its function.
FIGURE 4 – TOOLBAR
6.5 Pop-up menus
Right-click the workspace once logged onto a unit to display a pop-up menu to perform reading operations on the local or remote unit.
DIP/EN HI/B23
Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 18/60 e-terragridcom DIP
6.6 Status bars
Depending on the user level and the type of operation in progress, status bars can appear displaying the following information:
When the HMI is connected to the DIP in the maintenance mode, the upper bar is displayed:
− line status (blocked / unblocked)
− restitution relay status (blocked / unblocked)
− type of loopback (local loopback / remote loopback)
The status bar is displayed:
− the connection status (HMI) (connect/disconnect icon)
− the current operating mode (Operation/Maintenance)
− address of the link or other information entered as comment
− transmission time
− bit error rate
− any alarm present (clicking in this zone opens a window displaying the faults that have triggered this alarm)
− user level (0 or 2)
FIGURE 5 – MAINTENANCE STATUS BAR
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/B23
DIGITAL
e-terragridcom DIP Page 19/60
6.7 Work and dialog zone.
Most orders are also issued using dialogue boxes (see figure 6 below). Six standard Windows tools are used:
− optional button groups
− tick boxes
− command buttons
− text boxes
− lists
− cursors
−
FIGURE 6 – EXAMPLE OF DIALOG BOX WITH LIST DISPLAY
DIP/EN HI/B23
Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 20/60 e-terragridcom DIP
7. FUNCTIONALITIES DESCRIPTION
7.1 <File> Menu
The <File> menu provides access to elements allowing to create, modify and send configuration files. It also allows to open archived alarms files (*.Ala) and event files (*.Evt).
FIGURE 7 – FILE MENU
New: this menu allows a new configuration to be created on the basis of a default configuration.
Open: this menu allows opening a previously saved configuration file or opening a list of alarms or events.
3 types of file can be opened:
− *.Cfg -> existing configuration file, this selection will open a window (see figure 8)
− *.Ala -> alarm list file for consultation (see figure 13 for the window display)
− *.Evt -> event list file for consultation (see figure 11 for the window display)
Exit: closes the HMI program.
7.2 <Tools> Menu
User level selection: this menu allows to modify a user level.
Back to level 0: this menu allows to return to level 0, the lowest level of privilege.
Modify the password: this menu allows to enter a password saved in the CPU.
Connect: this menu allows to log onto the DIP and PC.
Disconnect: this menu allows to log off the DIP and PC.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/B23
DIGITAL
e-terragridcom DIP Page 21/60
7.3 <Read> Menu
This menu enables you to read the following parameters on the local or remote unit:
− Configuration: read all configuration parameters,
− Hardware configuration: Read hardware configuration parameters,
− Version: read firmware versions.
− Comments: read comments.
− Events file: read the events list.
− Alarms file: read the alarms list.
− Counters: read the local command counters.
− Alarms snapshot: ‘snapshot’ of the current alarm status.
− Input/Output: read input and output status.
In addition, remote reading provides access to:
− Bit error rate: bit error rate instant indication.
7.4 <Date> Menu
This menu enables you to read or write the date and time on the local or remote unit:
− Read: read the date and time on the local or remote unit.
− Write: write the date and time of the local or remote unit, either by copying the date and time of the PC, or sending a date and time chosen by the user.
7.5 <Maintenance> menu
Selecting this menu allows the following maintenance actions to be performed:
− Maintenance Mode: toggles between operating and maintenance modes.
− Blocking: allows to block or unblock the communication line and command restitution relays.
− Loopback: allows to perform a loopback either on the level of the local unit or remote unit.
− Forcing: allows to force commands in transmission or reception as well as force alarms relays.
− Interface: allows to force the optical or redundancy interface.
− Reset: allows to clear the history lists of events and alarms, as well as counters of the local or remote equipment.
− Reset: performs a hardware or software reset of the local or remote unit.
− Save environment: allows to save the events, alarms and counters lists in the .csv Excel-compatible format.
These files are placed in a directory where the HMI is installed.
7.6 <?> Menu
About: Indicates the software version of the HMI
Documentation: access to user manuals when they are installed.
DIP/EN HI/B23
Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 22/60 e-terragridcom DIP
8. OPERATION OF THE HMI
8.1 Launching the HMI
To launch the HMI, click the HMI icon
8.2 Configuration procedure
Configuration creation is available regardless of PC/DIP connection status, and from level 0. As this availability enables off-site creation and the preparation of configuration libraries, it optimizes commissioning and maintenance operations.
The configuration of a new unit or reconfiguration of an existing unit involves creating or modifying a configuration file by means of a configuration window (see § 8.4). The configuration window is accessible from the menu bar in two ways:
− <File> Menu
− <Read> Menu
8.2.1 Configuration procedure from the <File> menu
1. Click File>New or File>Open.
2. Modify the displayed configuration.
3. Save the changed configuration (File>Save as…>).
4. Send the configuration to the unit.
8.2.2 Configuration procedure from the <Read> menu
The configuration of the local or remote unit can be modified by reading this configuration:
1. Click Read>Local> or Remote>Configuration.
2. Modify the displayed configuration.
3. Save the changed configuration (File>Save as…>).
4. Send the configuration to the unit.
8.3 <Tools> Menu
The <Tools> menu allows entering a user password, return to the user 0 level and log on or log off the HMI application.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/B23
DIGITAL
e-terragridcom DIP Page 23/60
8.3.1 User level selection
When the HMI is opened without entering a password the level user granted is 0.
To access a level 2, the user must enter a password. The level depends on the password. For more details about user level and password management see § 4.
1. Select Tools>Select user level. The <Enter password> window opens:
2. Enter the password.
3. Check the level granted in the status bar.
The password created previously is saved in the PC. If lost, just reinstall the HMI application on the PC and create the passwords again.
8.3.2 Returning to level 0
The user may return to level 0 at any time.
To set the user level to 0:
1. Select Tools>Return to level 0.
2. Check the user level in the status bar
8.3.3 Modify the password
Use the <Modify the password > submenu to create and / or change the embedded password. For more safety, this password is then saved in the unit.
PLEASE NOTE THAT IF YOU FORGET THE EMBEDDED PASSWORD, IT MAY BE RESET ONLY BY RETURNING THE MOTHERBOARD (UT148) TO THE PLANT.
DIP/EN HI/B23
Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 24/60 e-terragridcom DIP
8.3.4 Connect the HMI from the DIP
Click the Connect icon to open the <Connect> window
You can choose among the ports found automatically by the HMI or the favorites defined beforehand. To create a new favorite, right-click the location where you wish to place the favorite.
Check the status information in the status bar.
Note: When the HMI is connected to the DIP, the information is displayed in the upper bar. For more information on the status bar information, refer to chapter 6.6.
8.3.5 Disconnecting the HMI
To log off the HMI:
1. Select Tools> Disconnect.
2. The HMI is logged off, the Read, Data and Maintenance options are grayed out and inaccessible.
8.4 Configuration window
8.4.1 Access to the Configuration window
Two methods allow to open the Configuration window from the <File>:
1. Select File> New to open a default configuration file.
2. Select File> Open to open an existing configuration file.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/B23
DIGITAL
e-terragridcom DIP Page 25/60
The following window opens:
FIGURE 8 – MAIN CONFIGURATION WINDOW
Note: Opening the configuration window is also possible via the menu bar by selecting Read > Local> Configuration.
The configuration window allows reading, modifying or creating configuration files.
Rolling the mouse over a tool displays information on its function.
FIGURE 9 – CONFIGURATION WINDOW TOOLBAR
DIP/EN HI/B23
Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 26/60 e-terragridcom DIP
8.4.2 Configuration window - <File> menu
FIGURE 10 – CONFIGURATION FILE MENU
This menu allows configuration files to be saved, printed and closed.
Saving a configuration
To save a configuration:
1. Select File > Save.
2. Select a directory in the Windows environment.
3. Name the *.cfg file.
To print a configuration, select File > Print.
To exit the configuration window, select File> Exit.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/B23
DIGITAL
e-terragridcom DIP Page 27/60
8.4.3 Configuration window - <Modify> menu
This menu allows to modify a configuration (default or new configuration).
To modify a configuration from the menu bar:
1. Select File>New or File>Open. The following configuration window opens:
8.5 Configuring General Parameters
1. Open the Main Configuration window (see § 8.4).
2. Select Modify>General. The <General configuration> window opens:
If necessary, modify the following parameter values:
Com. link: enter a value between 0 and 124.
DIP/EN HI/B23
Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 28/60 e-terragridcom DIP
Note: The remote unit and local DIP must have the same logical address.
Configuration: check the 2, 4 or 8 commands button.
Please note that the 8 commands box is accessible only when 2 input/output boards were entered in the Input/Output window
HMI port speed: select the value 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps using the scroll down window. The HMI will attempt to connect at the speed defined, in case of bad link, it will attempt to connect at lower speeds.
Master / slave: select the master or slave value for a unit.
A DIP teleprotection unit must be composed of a master unit and the other slave unit.
IRIG-B: select the value Off or On by checking the appropriate box.
Connect the GPS equipment to the P20 connector.
Synchronize the DIP date to the external source (one synchronization signal every 30 seconds).
Limited log length: Limits lists stored in the DIP to 255 events and 255 alarms instead of 1785 each.
This may be useful in case of remote access to a network to shorten the information download time.
During an intervention on running equipment, to ensure proper operation of this feature, delete the lists of events and alarms already saved in the DIPs.
Configuring number of I/O board : Select the matching the hardware configuration (1 or 2 boards) by checking the corresponding box.
3. Once all parameters defined, click the button.
The <General configuration> window closes.
4. Check that the configuration window was updated with the new parameter values:
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/B23
DIGITAL
e-terragridcom DIP Page 29/60
8.6 Configuring the parameters of the communication interface
1. Open the Configuration window (see § 8.4).
2. Select <Modify> Communication interface. The <Interface> window opens:
3. Select the interface module corresponding to the hardware configuration on the scrolling
windows. Possible values are:
− IR182 (optical interface). To be chosen for an IR182 board or an IR187 board in IR182 mode.
− IR173 G703-6 (2 MBps)
− IR179 V11 (RS 422)
− IR180 G703-1 codirectional (64 kbps)
− IR185 C37-94 (optical fiber interface). To be chosen for an IR185 board or an IR187 board in C37.94 mode.
4. Click the button. The following window opens:
DIP/EN HI/B23
Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 30/60 e-terragridcom DIP
5. Select the value Clock Source, Received or Internal, by checking the corresponding button.
The following table indicates the type of source according to the case:
Type of interface
DIP connected to a transmission unit
DIP direct copper connection
(laboratory test)
DIP connected to an optical fiber**
Local Remote Local Remote Local Remote
IR173 Received Received Internal Received N/A N/A
IR180 Received Received Internal Received N/A N/A
IR182 or
IR187(2)
N/A N/A N/A N/A Internal Internal
IR182(3)
Received Received N/A N/A N/A N/A
IR185 or
IR187(2)
Received Received N/A N/A Internal Received
* Case of the IR182 connected to the OCM5000, optical/V11 converter. This mode is not compatible with the IR187 board.
** The C37.94 mode is recommended with the IR187 board for this application.
Type of interface
DIP connected to a transmission unit
DIP direct copper connection
(laboratory test)
DIP in loopback (laboratory test)
Local Remote Local Remote Local Remote
IR179 NORMAL
(Tx and Rx clocks
received)
NORMAL
(Tx and Rx clocks
received)
NORMAL H2
Rate to be selected
between 32 and 256 kbps
H1
Rate to be selected
between 32 and 256 kbps
Loopback of T on R and
S on S'
FIGURE 11 – CLOCK SOURCE SELECTION
6. Check that the parameter values have been updated in the configuration window.
When an IR187 board is used, the parameter indicates its programming mode, i.e. IR182 or IR185 for the C37.94 mode.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/B23
DIGITAL
e-terragridcom DIP Page 31/60
8.7 Configuring the redundancy interface
With the optical interfaces IR182 and IR185, redundancy can be ensured with another digital interface IR173, 179 or 180.
The Redundancy interface corresponds to the redundant digital interface.
Prior conditions
The redundancy interface can be configured only if an optical interface was selected as
communication interface (see § 8.6).
Procedure
1. Open the <Configuration> window (see § 2).
2. Select <Modify> Redundancy interface. The <Redundancy interface> window opens:
3. Select the digital interface corresponding to the hardware configuration in the scrolling
window. Possible values:
− IR 180
− IR 173
− IR179
4. Click the button. The following window opens:
5. Select the value Clock Source, Received or Internal, by checking the corresponding
button.
DIP/EN HI/B23
Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 32/60 e-terragridcom DIP
6. Click the button. The following window opens:
7. Select the value of the TOGGLE delay parameter by placing the cursor properly. The
possible values are between 5 ms and 100 ms.
This means defining the time after which interface toggling will be performed.
8. Click the button.
9. Check that the parameter values have been updated in the configuration window.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/B23
DIGITAL
e-terragridcom DIP Page 33/60
8.8 Configuring Input/output Parameters
1. Open the Configuration window (see § 8.4).
2. Select Modify > Input / Output.
The <Input Output Configuration> window below opens:
8.8.1 Input filter configuration
Input filter
The Input filter delay corresponds to the minimum time for a signal command to be considered.
Select the delay matching each command using the cursor.
A window displaying the numeric values allows placing the cursor on the value required. The possible values are between 0 ms and 100 ms, by 1-ms steps.
We recommend to always leave a 1mS filtering minimum for the best protection against parasite signals which may be present on the command inputs.
For more information on this feature, refer to document PTC-DIP5K-TS008
Reverse logic configuration
Parameter Description
DIP/EN HI/B23
Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 34/60 e-terragridcom DIP
Note: Using the reverse logic function, an idle input corresponds to a command. The matching input must be activated to stop sending commands
Procedure
Check the box associated with a command to apply reverse logic.
A warning message appears to indicate that a command will be sent until the input is activated.
8.8.2 Input logic configuration
Parameter Description
This logic allows to allocate a logical operator to a board input, then allocate a command. This function is available only when two boards are installed.
Logical operator available: OR,AND,LOG
OR
A command is emitted when one or the other inputs is active.
AND
A command is emitted when the two associated inputs are active.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/B23
DIGITAL
e-terragridcom DIP Page 35/60
LOG
The following table describes the outputs corresponding to the possible combination of input signals for the LOG operator.
INPUT 1 INPUT 2 OUTPUT
0 1 0
1 0 1
1 1 PREVIOUS STATE
0 0 PREVIOUS STATE
Procedure
To configure the input logic feature:
1. Click the button in the configuration window to pen the following window:
2. Check the box of the logical operator to allocate to a command.
3. Click the button in the <Input logic> window.
4. Click the button in the <Input Output Configuration> window.
The <Input Output Configuration> window closes.
5. Check that the parameter values have been updated in the configuration window.
8.8.3 State of output on Communication Major Alarm
Parameter Description
Idle: the restitution relay is set to the idle state in case of alarm.
Former state: the restitution relay contact remains open or closed, even in case of alarm. The alarm has no impact on the status of the switch.
For each command
Select the Relay state on alarm parameter using the scrolling window.
DIP/EN HI/B23
Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 36/60 e-terragridcom DIP
8.9 Application parameters configuration
1. Open the Configuration window (see § 8.4).
2. Select Modify>Application parameters:
The following window opens:
8.9.1 Configuration of transmission holding delays
The transmission holding delay corresponds to the validity time of an input command.
In the Transmission part, check the command to which a holding time is to be applied.
Click inside the green zone and enter the delay value (range of values from 20 to 200 ms).
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/B23
DIGITAL
e-terragridcom DIP Page 37/60
8.9.2 Configuration of the holding times for a command restitution
This parameter corresponds to the validity time of a command restitution.
1. Check the command restitution concerned.
2. Set the delay using the cursor (1 to 3000 ms).
3. Repeat this configuration for each command restitution to which a delay is to be applied.
For more information on configuring the holding times, refer to document PTC-DIP5K-TS008
8.9.3 Teleprotection scheme configuration
1. In the scroll-down menu, select the teleprotection scheme of the receiver to apply to commands 1 and 2, 3 and 4, 5 and 6, 7 and 8:
− Presmissive trip
− Teletrip
− Blocking
DIP/EN HI/B23
Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 38/60 e-terragridcom DIP
2. Click the button.
3. Check that the parameter values have been updated in the configuration window.
8.10 Alarm parameters configuration
1. Open the <Configuration> window (see § 8.4).
2. Select Modify > Alarms.
The <Alarms Configuration> window opens:
REMINDER:
A MINOR ALARM INDICATES A PROBLEM BUT THE EQUIPMENT CONTINUES OPERATING.
A MAJOR ALARM INDICATES A PROBLEM BUT THE EQUIPMENT IS BLOCKED. COMMAND ACQUISITION AND RESTITUTION ARE INHIBITED.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/B23
DIGITAL
e-terragridcom DIP Page 39/60
8.10.1 Configuration of the bit error rate threshold
1. Check the Bit error rate button corresponding to the minor alarm threshold required.
2. Check the Bit error rate button corresponding to the major alarm threshold required.
3. We recommend to leave the default values. 1xE-3 for the minor alarm and 1xE-2 for the major alarm.
8.10.2 Configuration of the prolonged command alarm
I
If an input signal exceeds the threshold defined, an alarm is triggered.
1. Check the Alarm upon prolonged command box.
2. Place the cursor to define a duration (between 1 and 30 seconds per 1-second steps).
3. Allocate a minor or major level by checking the corresponding button.
8.10.3 Configuration of the communication time alarm
If the communication time exceeds the threshold defined, an alarm is triggered.
1. Check the Alarm upon communication time box.
2. Place the cursor to define a transmission time (between 3 and 20 ms).
3. Allocate a minor or major level by checking the corresponding button.
DIP/EN HI/B23
Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 40/60 e-terragridcom DIP
8.10.4 Configuration of the command relay delay
Closing of the contact relay can be delayed. Possible values are:
− 0
− 2.5 s
− 5 s
− 10 s
For each relay 1 and 2, a major alarm and a minor alarm are possible:
Select the delay by positioning the scrolling button.
8.11 Entering comments
The user can enter comments.
To enter comments:
1. Open the Configuration window (see § 8.4).
2. Select Modify > Comments.
The following window opens:
1. Fill in the following information fields:
− Local station name (20 characters max)
− Remote station name (20 characters max)
2. Enter the comments in the <Comments> field.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/B23
DIGITAL
e-terragridcom DIP Page 41/60
3. Click the button.
4. Enter the comments in the <Configuration> field.
8.12 Sending a configuration file
This menu allows to send a configuration from the PC HMI to the teleprotection unit.
Prior conditions
Sending a configuration is possible with the user 2 level. The HMI must be connected to the teleprotection unit.
Procedure
To send the configuration, select the <Send> menu (Local or Remote) from the <Configuration> menu:
If the configuration transmission is successful, a message window opens:
Click the OK button, the DIP resets.
8.13 <Read> Menu
8.13.1 Menu Description
The <Read> menu allows to display the following information on the local or remote teleprotection unit:
− Configuration
DIP/EN HI/B23
Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 42/60 e-terragridcom DIP
− Hardware configuration
− DIP firmware version
− Comments
− Event list
− Alarms list
− Counters
− Alarms snapshot
− Inputs / Outputs state
− Remote bit error rate (the local bit error rate is displayed permanently in the lower status bar)
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/B23
DIGITAL
e-terragridcom DIP Page 43/60
8.13.2 Reading a configuration
To read the local configuration, select Read> Local> Configuration. The following configuration window opens:
Note: To read the remote configuration, select Read> Remote>
Configuration.
8.13.3 Reading the hardware configuration
To read the local hardware configuration, select Read> Local> Hardware configuration. The following window opens:
DIP/EN HI/B23
Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 44/60 e-terragridcom DIP
8.13.4 Reading the DIP firmware version
To read the software version in local, select Read> Local> Version. The following window opens:
8.13.5 Read comments
To read comments, select Read> Local> Comments. The following window opens:
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/B23
DIGITAL
e-terragridcom DIP Page 45/60
8.13.6 Read an events list
To read events, select Read> Local>Events list. The following window opens:
FIGURE 12 – EXAMPLE OF READING THE EVENTS LIST
The capacity of the list is 1785 events.
Click the tool to refresh the list
Click the disquette tool (or use the menu File>Save) to generate the events file (*.evt) viewable by the menu File>Open in the main screen.
Click the printer tool (or use the menu File>Print) to print the events file.
Click the tool to export the events file in the Excel compatible format.
DIP/EN HI/B23
Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 46/60 e-terragridcom DIP
8.13.7 Read an alarms list
To read the alarms list in local, select Read> Local> Alarms list. The following window opens:
FIGURE 13 – EXAMPLE OF READING IN THE ALARMS LIST
The capacity of the list is 1785 alarms.
Click the tool to refresh the list
Click the disquette tool (or use the menu File>Save) to generate the events file (*.evt) viewable by the menu File>Open in the main screen.
Click the printer tool (or use the menu File>Print) to print the events file.
Click the tool to export the alarms file in the Excel compatible format.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/B23
DIGITAL
e-terragridcom DIP Page 47/60
8.13.8 Reading counters
To read the counters, select Read> Local> Counter. The following window opens:
FIGURE 14 – EXAMPLE OF LOCAL COMMAND COUNTERS
Click the tool to refresh the list
Click the disquette tool (or use the menu File>Save) to generate the counters file (*.cpt) viewable by the menu File>Open in the main screen.
Click the printer tool (or use the menu File>Print) to print the alarms file.
DIP/EN HI/B23
Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 48/60 e-terragridcom DIP
8.13.9 Reading instant alarms
To read instant alarms, select Read> Local> Instant alarms. The following window opens:
Check the ‘Refresh’ box to refresh the view automatically every 3 seconds.
Note: Instant alarms can also be read by clicking Alarm visible in the status bar in case of alarm.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/B23
DIGITAL
e-terragridcom DIP Page 49/60
8.13.10 Read input / output statuses
To read input / output statuses, select Read> Local> Input Output. The following window opens:
This view is refreshed automatically every 3 seconds.
8.14 <Date> Menu
The <Date> menu allows to read or write the date of local or remote teleprotection unit.
8.14.1 Read the date
Select Date> Local> Read. The following window opens:
DIP/EN HI/B23
Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 50/60 e-terragridcom DIP
8.14.2 Writing the date
Select Date> Local> Write. The following window opens:
The scrolling menus allow selecting the day, month, year and time.
8.15 <Maintenance> menu
Level 2 is required to access this command
The <Maintenance> menu allows the following operations:
− <Maintenance mode / Operating mode>: switch to the maintenance mode or operating mode.
− <Blocking / unblocking>: blocking / unblocking the communication line and restitution relays.
− <Loopback>: local or remote loopback. Remote loopback is accessible only if the line has been unblocked.
− <Forcing>: transmitter, command restitution alarms.
− <Interface> (accessible in operating mode and only when redundancy has been activated): forces the active interface (optical or redundancy).
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/B23
DIGITAL
e-terragridcom DIP Page 51/60
− <reset>: clear events, alarms or counters (local or remote).
− <Reset> local or remote. Resetting the DIP
− <Save environment>, allows saving the files of events, alarms or counters in the Excel-compatible format
THE HMI DOES NOT OPERATE AS A SIMULATOR. MORE PARTICULARLY, FORCING TRIGGERS ACTUAL COMMAND TRANSMISSIONS AND RENDERING. THEREFORE, UNTIMELY USE OF THESE COMMANDS MAY HAVE A SEVERE IMPACT ON THE OPERATION.
8.15.1 Switch to the maintenance / operating mode
To switch from the Maintenance mode to the operating mode (requires level 2)
1. Select Maintenance>Operating mode.
The following window appears and displays a message indicating data was transmitted successfully:
2. Check that appears in the status bar.
To switch from the <Maintenance> mode to the <Operating mode>:
3. Select Operating mode> Maintenance mode.
The <Transmitted data> message is displayed.
4. Check that appears in the status bar.
DIP/EN HI/B23
Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 52/60 e-terragridcom DIP
8.15.2 Blocking / Unblocking
The <Blocking> menu is available in the Maintenance mode.
1. Select Blocking > Unblocking / Blocking the line to unblock / block a line.
Unblocking the line allows to restore communication between both DIP. A command can be transmitted to the remote unit.
2. Select Blocking > Unblocking / Blocking relay to unblock / block a relay.
Unblocking a relay allows to restore the connection between the local DIP and the protection relays it is connected to. A command can be received locally.
3. The line status and relay status displayed in the upper bar are updated:
8.15.3 Loopback
1. Select Loopback > Local loopback deactivated to deactivate loopback.
2. Select Loopback > Local loopback activated to activate loopback.
3. The type of loopback displayed in the upper status bar is up to date:
8.15.4 Forcing
The forcing menus are available in maintenance mode from user 2 level.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/B23
DIGITAL
e-terragridcom DIP Page 53/60
8.15.5 Transmitter forcing
CAUTION ! COMMANDS ARE LAUNCHED USING THIS FEATURE.
Prior conditions
The active mode must be Operational
User level 2.
Procedure
To force the transmitter:
Select Forcing > Transmitter forcing.
The following window opens:
1. Check the boxes matching the commands to be forced.
2. Click the button.
A warning message is displayed to report that local command restitutions are activated.
3. Click the Yes button to confirm.
DIP/EN HI/B23
Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 54/60 e-terragridcom DIP
8.15.6 Restitution forcing
This command allows to force the commands in order to check their operational status.
To force the commands:
Select> Forcing command reception.
The following window opens.
Check the box matching the command to force.
Click the button.
The Data transmitted message is displayed.
If the relays are unblocked, the commands received are transmitted locally to the protection relay connected to the DIP.
8.15.7 Alarms forcing
This command allows to force the alarms in order to check their operation.
To force the alarms:
Select Forcing > Alarms. The <Forcing alarms> window opens:
Check the Minor or Major box, or both, for alarms to be forced.
Click the button.
The Data transmitted message is displayed.
Check the alarms status LEDs and the associated switches on connector P16.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/B23
DIGITAL
e-terragridcom DIP Page 55/60
8.15.8 Interface forcing
Prior conditions
The redundancy feature must be activated.
User level 2.
The mode must be <Maintenance>.
Procedure
This command allows, when the redundancy function is activated, to switch from the optical interface to another digital interface, and vice versa.
To switch from one interface to the other:
1. Select Maintenance> Interface. The following window opens:
The active interface is identified by a dot in the corresponding button.
Click the button of the interface required.
Click the button.
The following confirmation window opens:
Click the Yes button. The Data transmitted message is displayed.
The DIP resets.
After resetting, check that the switch was successful by selecting Maintenance> Interface, the active interface must have changed.
DIP/EN HI/B23
Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 56/60 e-terragridcom DIP
8.15.9 Reset
This command allows clearing files of events, alarms or counters on a local or remote teleprotection unit.
To clear the histories, select Clear histories> Local> Events or History> Local> Alarms.
The warning message <Are you sure ?> is displayed. Answer Yes.
A confirmation of clearing events/alarms is displayed.
8.15.10 Resetting the DIP
This command allows resetting the DIP in local in the <Operating mode>, in local and remote in the <Maintenance> mode.
To reset the DIP, select Reset > Local or Reset> Remote.
A message appears, confirming the reset.
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/B23
DIGITAL
e-terragridcom DIP Page 57/60
8.16 Expert Menu
This command allows to block the oscillator.
This means time stamping to save the batteries in case of extended storage of the teleprotection.
Restarting is performed simply by resetting the time of the DIP. See § 8.14.2.
NOTE: The battery is used to save the time, events and alarms lists as well as command counters.
8.17 Reading the version of the HMI
To read the software version of the HMI, select <?>: About. The following window opens:
8.18 Exit the HMI.
To exit the HMI, click the submenu <Exit> in the <File> menu of the base screen.
DIP/EN HI/B23
Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 58/60 e-terragridcom DIP
9. EXAMPLE OF REDUNDANCY CONFIGURATION
9.1 Example description
The following procedure describes the configuration of the redundancy function with main interface IR185, the redundancy interface IR180, the clock and a 10 ms delay.
9.2 Prior conditions
IR185 and IR 180 must be installed in the DIP.
Read the hardware configuration, by selecting Read> Local> Hardware configuration. The following window opens:
IR 180 and IR 182 must be present.
9.2.1.1 Configuration
Select Read> Local>Configuration to open the configuration file.
Select Modify> Comm. interface. The following window opens:
Human Machine Interface
DIP/EN HI/B23
DIGITAL
e-terragridcom DIP Page 59/60
Select IR185 in the scroll down menu.
Click the button.
Select <Modify> Redundancy interface. The following window opens:
Select IR180 in the scroll down menu.
Click the Trigger button. The following window opens:
.
Adjust the delay before switching to place the cursor on 10 ms.
Click the button.
Check that the configuration window was updated with the new parameter values:
DIP/EN HI/B23
Human Machine Interface
DIGITAL
Page 60/60 e-terragridcom DIP
Comment on the switching delay:
The switching time can be set between 5 and 100 ms for each side. This means the total time measured is:
Switching time = trip time Dip1 + trigger time Dip2 + about 8 ms for the communication of the Dip.
This optical-electric switching redundancy procedure is automatic.
Alstom Grid e-terragridcom DIP © - ALSTOM 2010. ALSTOM, the ALSTOM logo and any alternative version thereof are trademarks and service marks of ALSTOM. The other names mentioned, registered or not, are the property of their respective companies. The technical and other data contained in this document is provided for information only. Neither ALSTOM, its officers and employees accept responsibility for or should be taken as making any representation or warranty (whether express or implied) as to the accuracy or completeness of such data or the achievement of any projected performance criteria where these are indicated. ALSTOM reserves the right to revise or change this data at any time without further notice. Alstom Grid Worldwide Contact Centre www.grid.alstom.com/contactcentre/ Tel: +44 (0) 1785 250 070
www.alstom.com
Top Related